This is a modern-English version of Rules and Examples of Perspective proper for Painters and Architects, etc.: In English and Latin: Containing a most easie and expeditious method to delineate in perspective all designs relating to architecture, originally written by Pozzo, Andrea. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Transcriber’s Note:

Transcriber's Note:

This text uses some Unicode characters that are not supported by all fonts and may not display correctly, for example ꝫ.

This text uses some Unicode characters that not all fonts support and may not display properly, like ꝫ.

Most ‘figure’ illustrations have been moved from their position in the original book: each figure is placed by the passage that describes it, for ease of reference. The figures are large and detailed, and hence displayed only as a thumbnail image inline; if your device supports it, thumbnail images with a blue border can be clicked to display a larger version.

Most 'figure' illustrations have been relocated from their original spots in the book: each figure is now placed next to the section that describes it for easier reference. The figures are large and detailed, so they're only shown as thumbnail images inline; if your device supports it, thumbnail images with a blue border can be clicked to view a larger version.

A list of changes made to the original text (to correct suspected printing errors) is given at the end.

A list of changes made to the original text (to fix suspected printing errors) is provided at the end.

Rules and Examples of
PERSPECTIVE
PROPER FOR
Painters and Architects, etc.

Rules and Examples of
VIEWPOINT
APPROPRIATE FOR
Artists and Designers, etc.

In English and Latin;

In English and Latin;

Containing a most easie and expeditious Method to
DELINEATE in PERSPECTIVE
All DESIGNS relating to ARCHITECTURE,
AFTER A NEW MANNER,
Wholly free from the Confusion of Occult Lines:

Featuring a simple and quick method to
DRAW in PERSPECTIVE
All DESIGNS related to ARCHITECTURE,
IN A NEW WAY,
Completely free from the clutter of hidden lines:

by that GREAT MASTER thereof,
ANDREA POZZO, Soc. Jes.

by that GREAT MASTER of it,
ANDREA POZZO, Soc. Jes.

Engraven in 105 ample folio Plates, and adorn’d with 200 Initial Letters to
the Explanatory Discourses: Printed from Copper-Plates on ye best Paper

By John Sturt.

Engraved in 105 large folio plates and decorated with 200 initial letters for the explanatory texts: Printed from copper plates on the finest paper
By John Sturt.

Done into English from the Original Printed at Rome 1693 in Lat. and Ital.
By Mr John James of Greenwich.

Translated into English from the original printed in Rome in 1693 in Latin and Italian.
By Mr. John James of Greenwich.

Engraving of some classical ruins

LONDON:
PRINTED by Benj. Motte, MDCCVII.

Sold by John Sturt in Golden-Lion-Court in
Aldersgate-Street.

LONDON:
PRINTED by Benj. Motte, 1707.

Sold by John Sturt in Golden Lion Court in
Aldersgate Street.


PERSPECTIVA
PICTORUM
ET
ARCHITECTORUM,

Perspective
Artists
and
Architects,

ANDREÆ PUTEI,
E SOCIETATE JESU.

ANDREÆ PUTEI,
AND SOCIETY OF JESUS.

In quâ docetur Modus expeditissimus Delineandi
Opticè omnia quę pertinent ad Architecturam.

In which the most efficient way of designing is taught
Optically encompasses everything related to Architecture.

Engraving of some classical ruins

LONDINI:
Juxta Exemplar ROMÆ excusum, MDCXCIII.
Ex Sculpturâ Joannis Sturt, et ejusd. Curâ adornata:
TYPIS Benj. Motte, MDCCVII.

LONDON:
Printed after the Roman model, 1693.
From the engraving by John Sturt, and decorated under his care:
Printed by Benj. Motte, 1717.


Classical amphitheatre and columns

Decorative headpiece with engraving of Queen Anne and royal insignia

To
Her Most Sacred Majesty,

Queen Anne.

May it please your Majesty!

May it please you, Your Majesty!

The Condescension of the late Emperor of Germany to patronize this Work in the Original, could not have incited me to the Presumption of laying the Translation at Your Royal Feet; had not the Art of Perspective, of which it treats, been so nearly ally’d to the Noble Arts of Painting and Architecture. The First of these Your Majesty has been pleas’d to honour, as well in expressing a Satisfaction with the Performances, as in extending Your Royal Munificence to that great Master thereof, Signor Verrio.

The condescension of the late Emperor of Germany to support this job in the original couldn't have led me to the presumption of placing the translation at Your Royal Feet; unless the art of viewpoint, which it addresses, was so closely related to the noble arts of artwork and architecture. Your Majesty has been kind enough to honor the first of these, both by expressing satisfaction with the performances and by extending Your Royal generosity to that great master of it, Signor Verrio.

And although Affairs of higher Consequence have hitherto deferr’d Your Majesty’s Commands for Raising WHITE-HALL from its Ruins; yet has not Architecture been without Encouragement, under Your Majesty’s Most Auspicious Reign: Witness the great Dispatch lately given to those Noble Fabricks of S. PAUL’s, Greenwich-Hospital, and Blenheim.

And even though matters of greater importance have delayed Your Majesty’s orders to rebuild Whitehall from its ruins, Architecture has still received support during Your Majesty incredibly successful reign: Look at the recent progress made on the impressive structures of S. PAUL's, Greenwich-Hospital, and Blenheim Palace.

These seem to presage, that a Time is coming, when, through the Blessing of Peace, and the Happy Influence of Your Majesty’s Government; WHITE-HALL shall become a Structure worthy its Great Restorer, and its Name as much Celebrated among Palaces, as Your Royal Vertues are Illustrious among Princes: When Your Majesty’s Subjects shall exert themselves as much to their Country’s Honour, in the Arts of Design, and Civil Architecture; as they have already done in the Art Military, and Personal Valour.

These seem to indicate that a time is coming when, with the blessing of peace and the positive influence of Your Majesty’s government, WHITEHALL will become a structure worthy of its great Restoration Specialist, and its name will be celebrated among Castles, just as Your Royal virtues are renowned among Royals: When Your Majesty’s subjects will strive just as much for their country's honor in the Arts of Design and Civil Architecture as they have already done in the Military Strategy and Personal Courage.

Preliminary to such Happy Season, I presume this Art of Perspective made Practicable, may not be improper; being One of the most Useful, though hitherto the most Obscure and Confus’d, of all the Lineary Arts. I therefore, with all Submission, beg Leave to supplicate Your Majesty’s Pardon for this Address, and Your Gracious Protection of this Specimen of English Graving; to which if Your Majesty vouchsafe Your Royal Patronage, it will effectually animate the future Endeavours of,

Before this Happy Season, I think this Making Perspective Art Practical may be fitting; it is one of the most useful, though until now, the most obscure and confusing, of all the linear arts. I therefore, with all respect, kindly ask for Your Majesty’s forgiveness for this address and Your gracious support for this example of English engraving; if Your Majesty graciously extends Your Royal Support, it will truly inspire the future efforts of,

May it please Your Majesty!

Your Majesty, if it pleases you!

Your Most Obedient Subject,

Your Most Committed Follower,

J. Sturt.

J. Sturt.


PREFACE
TO THIS
TRANSLATION.

Notwithstanding the Art of PERSPECTIVE must be acknowledg’d so highly and indispensably requisite in the Practice of Painting, Architecture, and Sculpture; that in the First of these especially, nothing commendable can be perform’d without its Assistance: Yet such have been the Difficulties and Obscurities met with in the first Attempts, and so great the Perplexity and Confusion of Lines in the Practice thereof; that the best Instructions, hitherto made English, have invited very few to such a Prosecution of this Study, as might render their Performances of this kind, truly valuable.

However, the Art of PERSPECTIVE must be recognized as highly important and absolutely necessary in the practice of Painting, Architecture, and Sculpture; especially in the first of these, where nothing commendable can be achieved without its help. Yet, the challenges and complexities faced in the initial attempts, along with the confusion and chaos of lines in its practice, have meant that the best instructions, so far translated into English, have attracted very few to pursue this study in a way that would make their work truly valuable.

’Tis something unaccountable, that, among so many learned Persons as have handled this Subject, Priests, Architects, and Painters; very few, if any of them, have given Directions proper for shunning that Disorder and Confusion of Lines, which, in most Instances, must necessarily attend the Execution of their Rules: In all or most of which, the whole Space for the Performance is confin’d between the Lines of the Plan and Horizon; which, where the Scale is small, and the Height of the Eye not very much advanc’d, renders the Work exceedingly confus’d; and where those Lines are coincident, (which frequently happens) the Method becomes utterly impracticable.

It's something strange that, among so many educated people who have tackled this topic—Priests, Architects, and Painters—very few, if any, have provided proper guidance to avoid the disorder and confusion of lines that often accompany applying their rules. In most cases, the entire area for the work is limited by the lines of the plan and horizon; when the scale is small and the viewer's height isn't very elevated, it makes the project quite confusing. And when those lines overlap (which often happens), the approach becomes completely unworkable.

This Author’s great Experience in the Practice of Perspective, having furnish’d him with excellent RULES for Shortning the Work, and Obviating the foremention’d Difficulties; he has here very generously imparted them, and especially the latter, in the Tenth and Eleventh Figures. And tho’ on Perusal of the first three or four Plates, this Method may possibly seem the same that some others have before made use of; yet whoever shall diligently observe and copy the Rules and Examples of the succeeding Figures, must necessarily acknowledge the great Advantage this has in a Perspective-Plan and Upright, clear and distinct; whence the finish’d Piece is deduc’d, without the least Incumbrance of the Work. The Explanations of the Rules here given, are short and instructive; and the Architectonical Designs produc’d to exemplify them, Noble and Magnificent.

This author's extensive experience in the practice of Perspective has provided him with great rules to streamline the work and address the mentioned challenges. He has generously shared these insights, particularly in the Tenth and Eleventh Figures. While the first three or four plates may seem similar to methods previously used by others, anyone who carefully observes and applies the rules and examples in the following figures will recognize the significant advantage this approach offers in creating a clear, distinct Perspective-Plan and upright design. This allows for a finished piece to be derived without any unnecessary complexity. The explanations of the rules provided here are concise and informative, and the architectural designs showcased to illustrate them are impressive and grand.

The Manner of Designing, where the Perspective is drawn on several Ranges of Frames one behind the other, and such Scenes of Theaters whose Grooves lie oblique to the middle Line, is also here laid down: And by our Author’s Method, Horizontal Perspective, or that of Ceilings, is render’d less difficult than the Vertical, or that against an upright Wall. Upon the whole, nothing seems wanting that may make a Work of this nature complete; unless what concerns Designs which are either Circular, or abound with many Columns: For the Performance whereof, the Author, as he promises in the Sixty-fifth Figure, has, in a SECOND Volume, given a Rule more proper for the purpose; which also may possibly be made English in due time, if this Part meet with Encouragement.

The way of designing, where the perspective is drawn on multiple layers of frames stacked behind each other, and the scenes of theaters where the grooves are angled away from the center line, is also explained here: And using our Author’s method, Horizontal Perspective, or that of ceilings, becomes easier than the Vertical, or that against a straight wall. Overall, it seems that everything needed to make a work like this complete is included; except for designs that are either circular or filled with many columns: For these, the Author has promised in the Sixty-fifth Figure that he has provided a more suitable rule in a SECOND Volume; which may also potentially be made English in time, if this section receives support.

What the Author once intended should make a Part of that Second Volume, he afterwards inserted in the Ninety-third and following Figures of this Book: In the last of which, particular Notice should be taken of his Conclusion; That if Painters would not run into inextricable Errors, they ought as strictly to observe the Rules of Perspective, in designing the Figures of Men and Animals; as they do in painting Columns, Cornices, or other Parts of Architecture.

What? the Author initially planned to include in that Second Volume, he later added to the Ninety-third and subsequent Figures of this Book: In the last of which, special attention should be paid to his Conclusion; That if Painters want to avoid serious mistakes, they need to follow the Rules of Perspective just as carefully when depicting Figures of Men and Animals as they do when painting Columns, Cornices, or other Elements of Architecture.

That none therefore be discourag’d in their first Attempts, through the Brevity or Silence of our Author; (who, writing in a Country where the Principles of this Art are more generally known than with Us, had no need to insist so long on some things, as might be thought necessary to Beginners) we shall endeavour to speak as plainly as we can to a point or two, most liable to be misunderstood, or to prove a Stumbling-Block at the Entrance; and then add a Word of Advice to such as shall attempt the putting these Rules in Execution.

So no one should be discouraged in their initial attempts because of the brevity or silence of our author; (who, writing in a country where the principles of this art are more widely known than here, didn’t need to elaborate on certain points as much as might be considered necessary for beginners) we will try to explain as clearly as we can a couple of points that are most likely to be misunderstood or pose a challenge at the beginning; and then we’ll add some advice for those who will attempt to put these rules into practice.

The Author, in both his Explanations of the first Plate, has given some Account of what he would have his Reader understand, by Designing in Perspective; and a right Conception of this point being of great Use to facilitate the Work, we thought it not improper, to describe something more particularly, what is meant by the Art Perspective: but shall at present speak only of That, which, whether Vertical or Horizontal, is receiv’d on a Flat and Even Superficies; This being of much the more general Use, and, when rightly understood, renders the Difficulties of the Circular or Irregular Surfaces, easy and familiar.

The Author, in his explanations of the first Plate, has provided some insight into what he wants his readers to grasp about Designing in Perspective; and since having a clear understanding of this concept is very useful for making the work easier, we thought it appropriate to describe a bit more specifically what the Art of Perspective means: however, we will currently focus only on what is received on a flat and even surface, whether vertical or horizontal; this being much more commonly used, and when properly understood, makes the challenges of circular or irregular surfaces easier to tackle.

PERSPECTIVE is the Art of Delineating, on a flat Superficies, as a Wall, Ceiling, Canvas, Paper, or the like, the Appearances of Objects, as seen from One determinate Point: For tho’ in Works of great Length, Two, Three, or more Points of Sight are sometimes made use of; yet such may more properly be said to be Several Views conjoin’d, than One Piece of Perspective: Of which see the Author’s Opinion, at the End of this Treatise.

PERSPECTIVE is the art of representing, on a flat surface, like a wall, ceiling, canvas, paper, or something similar, the appearances of objects as seen from a specific viewpoint. Although in longer works, two, three, or more viewpoints are sometimes used, it’s more accurate to say those are several combined views rather than one piece of perspective. For more on this, see the author's opinion at the end of this treatise.

In Perspective, the Eye of the Beholder is esteem’d a Point, from whence Rays are suppos’d to proceed to every Angle of the Object. The Wall or Canvas to be painted (which we shall here call the Section) is imagin’d to intervene at right Angles to the Axis of the said Rays, and, by dissecting them, to receive the Appearance of the Object, in greater or less Proportion, as the Section is more or less remote from the Point of Sight. Our Author’s Rule is, That the Distance of the Eye ought to be equal to the greatest Extent of the Object, whether in Length or Height: As, to view a Building that is a hundred Foot long, and fifty high; he would have the Distance a hundred Foot: To view a Tower sixty Foot wide, and a hundred and fifty Foot high; the Distance should be a hundred and fifty Foot. This Distance is not strictly to be understood of the Space between the Eye and the Object, but of the Space between that and the Section, the Plan of which our Author calls the Line of the Plan, or Ground-line; for it’s often requisite, that the Section be plac’d at some Distance before the Object, on account of Projectures of Cornices, and other Parts of the Work that advance, as in the Eighth Figure.

In Perspective, the Eye of the Beholder is regarded as a point from which rays are thought to radiate to every angle of the object. The wall or canvas to be painted (which we will refer to as the Section) is imagined to be positioned at right angles to the axis of those rays and, by cutting through them, to capture the appearance of the object in greater or lesser proportion, depending on how far the Section is from the Point of Sight. Our Author’s rule is that the distance from the eye should equal the greatest dimension of the object, whether in length or height: for example, to view a building that is a hundred feet long and fifty feet high, the distance should be a hundred feet; to view a tower that is sixty feet wide and a hundred and fifty feet tall, the distance should be a hundred and fifty feet. This distance should not be strictly understood as the space between the eye and the object, but rather the space between that and the Section, which our Author calls the Line of the Plan or Ground-line; for it is often necessary for the Section to be placed some distance in front of the object due to projections of cornices and other parts of the work that extend outward, as illustrated in the Eighth Figure.

The Place of the Eye, with respect to its Height above the Ground, ought to be such, as is most natural and agreeable to the Object. Thus in Architecture, the Basements and inferior Parts of a Building are improper to be set above the Eye, and their Cornices and Entablatures have but an ill Effect when below it. General Perspectives indeed require the Sight to be taken at a Birds View; and on other Occasions the Place of the Eye may be vary’d: but the best and most general Rule is, not to exceed five or six Foot Height above the Ground. The Height of the Eye above the Ground, thro’ which a Line is drawn, call’d the horizontal Line, is set on by the same Scale of Proportion, as the Design bears to the real Work; and the Point of Sight so plac’d therein, as may render the Object most agreeable. From the Point of Sight, either on one or both sides in the horizontal Line, you are to set, by the same Scale, the Distance you stand from the Section. And by means of these Points of Sight and Distance, and the Measures of the Parts brought on the Lines of the Plan and Elevation of the Section, by the same Scale; all the Examples of this Volume are reduc’d into Perspective; as is manifest on Inspection of the Figures.

The Place of the Eye, in relation to its Height above the Ground, should be positioned in a way that feels most natural and appealing to the Object. In Architecture, the Bases and lower Parts of a Building shouldn’t be placed above the Eye level, and their Cornices and Entablatures have a negative effect when below it. General Perspectives actually require the View to be taken from a Bird’s Eye perspective; on other occasions, the Place of the Eye can change. However, the best and most common Rule is to keep it at a height of no more than five or six Feet above the Ground. The Height of the Eye above the Ground, through which a Line is drawn, called the horizontal Line, is set according to the same Scale of Proportion that the Design has to the actual Work; and the Point of Sight is placed in such a way that it makes the Object most pleasant. From the Point of Sight, either on one side or both sides of the horizontal Line, you must set, using the same Scale, the Distance from the Section. With these Points of Sight and Distance, along with the Measurements of the Parts brought on the Lines of the Plan and Elevation of the Section, by the same Scale; all the Examples in this Volume are rendered into Perspective, as is clear upon examining the Figures.

What we would add, by way of Advice, is,

What we would suggest, in terms of advice, is,

I. That you very carefully observe, what the Author understands by Breadth, Length, and Height, in his Explanation of the Fifth Plate, before you proceed to practise on any Figure; otherwise you’ll certainly misunderstand him; especially in the Third Figure.

I. Make sure you carefully understand what the Author means by Breadth, Length, and Height in his Explanation of the Fifth Plate before you start working with any Figure; otherwise, you'll definitely get it wrong, especially with the Third Figure.

II. That the Rules of the Tenth and Eleventh Figures be particularly regarded, for avoiding Confusion in the Plans and Uprights.

II. That the Rules of the Tenth and Eleventh Figures be especially observed to avoid confusion in the plans and uprights.

III. That from the Disposition of the Perspective-Plans and Uprights, with respect to the finish’d Pieces in the Twelfth and many following Figures, you would observe, with what Dispatch the said Pieces may, without the Help of Compasses, be delineated by your Drawing-Square; viz. the Perpendiculars from the Perspective-Plan, and the level Lines from the Perspective-Upright, or Section.

III. That regarding the layout of the perspective plans and uprights, in relation to the finished pieces in the twelfth and many subsequent figures, you will notice how quickly those pieces can be drawn using just your drawing square, without needing compasses; viz. the vertical lines from the perspective plan and the horizontal lines from the perspective upright, or section.

IV. That you would accustom yourself in Works that have many Lines, to make the Perspective-Plans and Uprights for each Part distinct, so as to prevent all Danger of Confusion. Thus you may have one Plan and Upright for the Basement of a Building; and when that is drawn on your finish’d Piece, remove them, and place those of the Body of the House; and when that’s complete, do so by the Attick, &c. always observing so to place the Plan below, and the Upright on one side of your neat Draught, that your Drawing-Square may command each of them; which will mightily shorten your Work.

IV. To get used to working on projects that have a lot of lines, create separate perspective plans and elevations for each part to avoid any confusion. This way, you can have one plan and elevation for the building's basement. Once that’s done, remove them and add the ones for the main part of the house. When that’s complete, do the same for the attic, etc. Always make sure to place the plan below and the elevation on one side of your drawing so that your drawing square can easily manage both. This will greatly speed up your work.

V. That the Author’s Advice of taking the Figures in Course, be strictly follow’d in the Practice; which will be a great means to render the Whole easy and pleasant.

V. That the Author’s advice to follow the figures in order should be strictly adhered to in practice; this will greatly help make the whole process easier and more enjoyable.

This is the Sum of what we thought most proper to advertise you; and have only this farther to request, That if any Mistakes may have escap’d the Press undiscover’d, as we well hope there are few or none, you will favourably correct and pardon them.

This is the summary of what we thought was most important to inform you about; and we only ask one more thing: If any mistakes slipped through the printing that we hope are few or none, please correct and forgive them.


MONITA ad TYRONES.

Concinnitatem ac symmetriam opticæ delineationes ædificiorum habere nequeunt, nisi utramque mutuentur ab Architectura. Proinde necesse est, ut in istius graphide ac intelligentia te aliquandiu exerceas, donec uniuscujusque elevationis vestigium formare didiceris, ex eoque eruere sectionem totius longitudinis, ut in Opere toto videre est, præsertim figuris sexagesimaoctava & septuagesima. Siquidem ex vestigio & ex sectione derivatur in opticas imagines congrua rerum singularum profunditas.

To accomplish harmony and symmetry in the visual representation of buildings, one must draw from architecture. Therefore, it's essential to practice your skills in this drawing and understanding for a while until you learn to form the outline of each elevation and derive the section of its full height, as can be seen throughout the work, especially in figures sixty-eight and seventy. Indeed, from the outline and the section derives the appropriate depth of individual elements in the visual representations.

Subjiciam his consilium summi momenti; videlicet, egregiè intelligas oportet figuram secundam, priusquam progrediaris ad tertiam, idemque de cæteris dictum velim; nam singulas eo disposuimus ordine, ut quæ præcedit, necessaria sit ad percipiendas eas quæ sequuntur. Si aliqua sint in explicatione, quæ initio non intelligas, ipsum schema sæpius diligenter inspicies; ac vicissim si aliqua desint in schematibus, ex declarationibus ea supplebis. Lapsus verò quos deprehenderis, facilè pro tua benignitate, mihi, ut spero, condonabis.

I'll share a plan of great importance; you need to understand the second figure well before you move on to the third, and I’d like the same to be said for the others; we’ve arranged them in a way that what comes first is necessary to grasp what follows. If there are any explanations that you don’t understand at first, be sure to take a close look at the diagram multiple times; and conversely, if anything is missing in the diagrams, you can fill in those gaps with the explanations. I hope, with your kindness, you'll easily forgive any mistakes you notice.

ADVICE to BEGINNERS.

The Perspective of Structures here treated of, can have no Grace or Proportion, without the Help of Architecture. ’Tis therefore absolutely necessary, that you employ yourself for some time in Drawing, and the Study of that Art; till you can readily describe the Plan of any Upright, and from thence project the Section or Profile, as is shewn through the whole Course of this Work; and more particularly, in the Sixty-eighth and Seventieth Figures: Forasmuch as the proper Depth of each Part of the Perspective, is determin’d by the Plan and Profile thereof.

The perspective of structures discussed here cannot have any grace or proportion without the assistance of architecture. Therefore, it’s essential that you spend some time practicing drawing and studying that art until you can easily outline the plan of any upright and then project the section or profile, as demonstrated throughout this work, particularly in Figures Sixty-eight and Seventy. The appropriate depth of each part of the perspective is determined by its plan and profile.

I shall add this one thing more, which is indeed of the last Importance; to wit, that you endeavour to understand the Second Figure throughly, before you proceed to the Third; and so of the rest: they being dispos’d in such Order, that the Knowledge of the preceding Figure is always necessary to a right Understanding of that which follows. If you meet with any thing which at first seems difficult in the Description, a diligent Inspection of the Figure may relieve you: And on the other hand, if you find not in the Figure every thing you desire, you may have Recourse to the Explanation. What Errours you discover in the Work, I hope you’ll generously overlook and pardon.

I want to add one more important thing: make sure you fully understand the Second Figure before moving on to the Third and so on. The concepts are arranged in such a way that knowing the previous Figure is always necessary for understanding the next one. If you come across something that seems difficult in the description at first, taking a close look at the Figure may help you out. Conversely, if you don’t find everything you’re looking for in the Figure, feel free to check the explanation. I hope you’ll kindly overlook and forgive any errors you find in this work.


AD
Lectorem Perspectivæ studiosum.

Ars Perspectiva, oculum, licet sagacissimum inter sensus nostros exteriores, mirabili cum voluptate decipit; eademque necessaria est iis, quibus in pingendo, tum singulis figuris positionem ac deformationem suam congruè tribuere, tum colores & umbras, magis vel minus intendere aut remittere, prout oportet, curæ est. Ad id autem sensim sine sensu illi perveniunt, qui solo studio Graphidis non contenti, singulis Architecturæ Ordinibus exactè deformandis assueverint. Nihilominus, inter multos qui opus hujusmodi magno impetu aggressi hucusque fuerunt, paucos numeramus, qui animum ipso statim initio non desponderint, ob magistrorum librorumque penuriam, ordinatè ac perspicuè docentium opticas projectiones, à principiis hujus artis, usque ad omnimodam perfectionis consummationem. Quum autem sentiam, longâ multorum annorum exercitatione, me non minimam facilitatem in hac disciplina mihi parasse: censeo Studiosorum voluntati me satisfacturum, eorumque profectui consulturum, si methodos expeditissimas in lucem proferam, ad singulorum Architecturæ Ordinum opticas delineationes perficiendas, adhibitâ communi regulâ, ex qua omnia linearum occultarum offendicula sustulimus. Deinde, si tempus & vires ad aliud Opus conscribendum Bonitas Divina dederit, projectiones quascunque absolvemus regulâ qua in præsentia uti soleo, ac multò facilior & universalior est regula communi & vulgata, quamvis hæc sit fundamentum alterius. Itaque, Lector studiose, constanti animo negotium tuum suscipe; ac lineas omnes tuarum operationum, ad verum oculi punctum ducere, ad gloriam scilicet DEI O.M. tecum omninò decerne. Sic votis honestissimis, ut auguror tibi ac spondeo, feliciter potieris.

Ars Perspectiva, the eye, although the sharpest of our external senses, deceives us with wonderful pleasure; it is also essential for those who, when painting, need to properly assign the position and deformation of individual figures, and to intensify or lessen colors & shadows as needed. However, they gradually reach this understanding without realizing it, those who, not satisfied with just the study of geometry, have become accustomed to precisely deforming every Order of Architecture. Nevertheless, among the many who have approached work of this kind with great enthusiasm, we count only a few who have not lost heart from the very beginning due to the lack of teachers and books that clearly and systematically teach optical projections, from the principles of this art to its complete perfection. However, since I have come to realize, through many years of extensive practice, that I have acquired considerable skill in this discipline, I believe I will satisfy the desires of the students and consult their progress if I publish the most straightforward methods for completing the optical delineations of the individual Orders of Architecture, using a common rule from which we have removed all the pitfalls of hidden lines. Then, if time & strength granted by Divine Goodness allows me to write another Work, I will complete any projections following the rule I currently use, which is much easier & more universal than the common & widely known rule, although this is the foundation of another. Therefore, Reader, take up your task with diligence and a steady mind; and resolve to lead all the lines of your operations to the true point of sight, for the glory of God Almighty. Thus, with the most honorable wishes, as I hope for you and promise, you will be successful.

TO
The Lovers of Perspective.

The Art of PERSPECTIVE does, with wonderful Pleasure, deceive the Eye, the most subtle of all our outward Senses; and is very necessary to be known of all, who in Painting would give a due Place and Proportion to their Figures, and more or less Strength requisite to the Lights and Shades of the Picture. This might be insensibly attain’d, if Persons, not content with the Study of Drawing only, would accustom themselves exactly to delineate the several Orders of Architecture. Nevertheless, among many who have hitherto vigorously undertaken this Work, there have been but very few, who have not been in a manner quite discourag’d, through want of Masters and Books to teach them clearly and methodically the Rules of Perspective-Projections, from the first Principles of the Art, to the entire Perfection thereof. Wherefore, apprehending that by long and constant Practice in Works of this kind, I had acquir’d a Method to facilitate the same; I judg’d it might be for the Satisfaction and Advantage of the Studious, to publish the shortest way for designing in Perspective the several Orders of Architecture, by a common and easy Rule, free from the Incumbrances of occult Lines. But if it please God to give me Life and Health to compose another Book, I shall therein shew the Method of putting Works into Perspective by the Rule I make use of at present, which is more easy and general than the common way, though this be the Foundation of the other. Therefore, Reader, my Advice is, that you chearfully begin your Work, with a Resolution to draw all the Lines thereof to that true point, the Glory of GOD; and I durst predict, and promise you good Success in so honourable an Undertaking.

The Art of PERSPECTIVE wonderfully tricks the Eye, the most delicate of all our senses; and it’s essential for anyone who wants to give proper space and proportion to their figures in Painting, as well as the right strength to the lights and shadows in the artwork. This could be subtly achieved if people, not satisfied with just studying Drawing, would train themselves to accurately depict the various Orders of Architecture. However, among many who have passionately taken on this task, very few have succeeded without feeling disheartened due to a lack of teachers and books that clearly and systematically explain the Rules of Perspective Projections, from the basic principles of the Art to its full mastery. Therefore, believing that through long and consistent practice in such works, I have developed a method to make this easier, I thought it might benefit and satisfy those interested to publish a straightforward approach to designing the various Orders of Architecture in Perspective, using a simple and easy rule, free from complicated lines. If God grants me Life and Health to create another Book, I will demonstrate the method for creating Perspective works using the rule I currently utilize, which is simpler and more general than the traditional method, although this serves as its foundation. So, dear Reader, my advice is to joyfully begin your work with a determination to draw all its lines towards that true point, the Glory of GOD; and I dare to predict and promise you success in such an honorable endeavor.


THE
Approbation of this Edition.

At the Request of the Engraver, We have perus’d this Volume of Perspective; and judge it a WORK that deserves Encouragement, and very proper for Instruction in that ART.

At the request of the engraver, we have reviewed this volume of Viewpoint; and believe it is a work that deserves support, and is very suitable for instruction in that art.

  • Chr. Wren,
  • J. Vanbrugh,
  • N. Hawksmoor.

An engraving with instructions on how to set your table up for drawing

POZZO's

ARCHITECTURE
IN
PERSPECTIVE.


Fig. I.

Fig. I.

FIGURA PRIMA.

Explicatio linearum Plani & Horizontis, ac Punctorum Oculi & Distantiæ.

Explication of the Lines of the Plane & Horizon, as well as Points of View & Distance.

Ut principia Perspectivæ faciliùs intelligas, pono tibi ob oculos Templum, in cujus interiori facie, præter cætera, pingendum sit aliquid ad Perspectivam pertinens. Templi hujus vestigium geometricum est A, elevatio geometrica in longum est B, in latum est C. In A est locus Hominis aspicientis lineam DE, cui paries pingendus incumbit. In B idem Homo ex eâdem distantiâ intuetur lineam FG, quæ refert elevationem parietis. In figura C supponimus Hominem consistere è regione ipsius parietis: easdemque proportiones mensuratum translatas esse ex vero pariete in figuram C, quæ ipsum in parvo repræsentat.

To understand the principles of perspective more easily, I’ll present to you a depiction of a temple, in which, among other things, something related to perspective should be illustrated. The geometric outline of this temple is A, the geometric height in length is B, and the width is C. At A is the position of a person observing the line DE, to which the wall to be painted is adjacent. At B, the same person from that same distance looks at the line FG, which reflects the height of the wall. In figure C, we assume the person stands directly opposite the wall: the same proportions measured are transferred from the actual wall into figure C, which represents it on a smaller scale.

Prima ergo linea HI dicitur linea terræ vel plani, ex quâ incipit, eidemque incumbit ædificium. Secunda linea NON priori parallela, dicitur horizontalis, in quâ ponitur O punctum oculi, & N punctum distantiæ. Duo autem puncta distantiæ à nobis posita sunt, ut unum adhibeas ex quâ parte volueris; nam ad figuras opticè contrahendas sufficit unum punctum distantiæ: nec fieri potest ulla optica delineatio, quin primo loco designentur duæ parallelæ, una plani seu terræ, altera horizontis, notando in lineâ horizontis, punctum oculi, seu opticum, & punctum distantiæ. Porrò unam eandemque rem triplici Schemate repræsentare oportuit, ut videas, locum ex quo aspicienda est figura C esse punctum N unius ex rectis NO, quam concipere debemus veluti normaliter infixam in O; ac distantiam inter O & N eandem esse debere cum distantiâ inter A & DE, inter B & GF.

The first line Hi is called the ground line or plane, from which it begins and on which the building rests. The second line NON, which is parallel to the first, is called the horizontal line, where point O (the eye point) and point N (the point of distance) are placed. There are two points of distance set from us, so you can use whichever one you prefer; for optical representations, one point of distance is sufficient: no optical drawing can be made without first designating two parallels, one for the plane or ground and the other for the horizontal, marking in the horizontal line the eye point or optic point, and the point of distance. Furthermore, the same thing should be represented in three Schemes, so that you see the place from which the figure C should be viewed as point N on line NO, which we should conceive as normally fixed at O; and the distance between O & N should be the same as the distance between A & DE, and between B & GF.

In picturis multum spatii occupantibus, punctum oculi poni solet in medio lineæ horizontalis: atque ubi altitudo picturæ sit major latitudine, distantia NO fiet æqualis altitudini. Si latitudo picturæ sit major altitudine, distantia NO fiet æqualis latitudini; ita enim unico intuitu totum picturæ spatium comprehendi poterit. Porrò quamvis eadem distantia diverso modo adhibeatur in vestigio A, & in elevationibus B & C; nihilominus sectiones visualium cum pariete vestigii A, & elevationis B, omninò conspirant cum sectionibus visualium figuræ C.

In images that take up a lot of space, the focal point is usually placed at the center of a horizontal line. When the height of the image is greater than its width, the distance NO will not be equal to the height. If the width of the image is greater than the height, the distance NO will not be equal to the width; this way, one can grasp the entire space of the image in a single glance. Furthermore, although the same distance may be applied differently in the footprint A and in the elevations B & C, the visual sections of the footprint A and elevation B completely align with the visual sections of figure C.

Jam si velimus ut spectatori in A & B paries depictus videatur distare à lineis DE & GF, quanta est longitudo quadrati P, cujus elevatio est Q; ex punctis A & B fiant visuales ad puncta extrema quadrati, notando sectiones visualium cum pariete DE & GF, qui ab aliis vocatur velum, vitrum diaphanum, sectio, tela, vel tabula. Invenies autem, lineas RS ac TV esse æquales, ac similiter lineas XZ & YK; & sic de aliis.

If we want the audience to see the wall depicted at A & B as being distanced from the lines DE & GF, the distance should equal the length of square P, which has a height of Q; from points A & B, draw lines to the square's endpoints, noting the intersections of these lines with the wall DE & GF, which is also referred to as a curtain, glass, section, web, or board. You will find that lines RS and Television are equal, as well as lines XZ & YK; and so forth.

The First Figure.

Explication of the Lines of the Plan and Horizon, and of the Points of the Eye and of the Distance.

Explanation of the Lines of the Plan and Horizon, and of the Points of the Eye and Distance.

That you may the better understand the Principles of Perspective, here is presented to your View a Temple, on the inner Wall of which, amongst other things, one would paint something in Perspective. The Geometrical Plan of this Church is A, the Geometrical Elevation, or Upright, lengthwise is B, breadthwise is C. In A is the Place from whence a Man beholds the Line DE, which is the Plan of the Wall that is to be painted: In B the same Man, from the same Distance, looks upon the Line FG, that represents the Elevation of the Wall. In Fig. C, the Man is supposed to stand opposite to the said Wall; and this Figure contains, in Little, the very same Proportions of Measures transferr’d from the real Wall.

To help you better understand the Principles of Perspective, here’s a view of a Temple. On the inner Wall of this Temple, among other things, something will be painted in Perspective. The geometric layout of this Church is labeled A, the geometric elevation (or height) is B, and the width is C. In A, there's the spot from where a person sees the line DE, which represents the layout of the wall that will be painted. In B, the same person, from that same distance, looks at the line FG, which shows the elevation of the wall. In Fig. C, the person is positioned directly in front of that wall; this figure reflects, in a smaller size, the exact proportions and measurements taken from the actual wall.

The first Line therefore HI is call’d the Ground-line, or Line of the Plan, at which the Edifice begins, and on which it stands. The second Line NON, parallel to the former, is call’d the Horizontal Line, wherein is plac’d O the Point of the Eye, and N the Point of the Distance. Two Points of Distance are here laid down, that you may make use of which you please; for that on one Side only is sufficient for the fore-short’ning Figures in Perspective: Neither can any Optick Delineation, or Perspective, be described, without first making two Parallels; one of the Plan, or Ground-line, the other of the Horizon; marking, in the Line of the Horizon, the Point of the Eye, or Sight, and the Point of Distance. It was thought besides expedient to put one and the same Thing into three Schemes or Designs, to let you see, that the Place, from which the Figure C is to be look’d upon, is the Point N, one of the right Lines NO, which must be conceived as fixt at right Angles into O; the Distance ON being the same as that between A and DE in the Plan, or between B and GF in the Upright.

The first line, therefore, HI, is called the Ground Line, or the Line of the Plan, where the building starts and on which it stands. The second line, NON, which runs parallel to the first, is called the Horizontal Line, where point O, the Point of the Eye, and point N, the Point of Distance, are located. Two Points of Distance are marked here so you can use whichever you prefer; just one side is enough for shortening figures in perspective. No optical drawing or perspective can be created without first establishing two parallels: one for the Plan, or Ground Line, and the other for the Horizon. In the Horizon line, mark the Point of Eye, or Sight, and the Point of Distance. It was also considered helpful to present the same thing in three schemes or designs, to show you that the viewpoint for figure C is point N, one of the right lines NO, which should be imagined as fixed at right angles to O; the distance ON being the same as that between A and DE in the Plan, or between B and GF in the Upright.

In Pictures taking up a great deal of Room, the Point of Sight ought to be made in the middle of the Horizontal Line; and where the Height of the Picture happens to be greater than the Breadth, the Distance NO must be made equal to the Height. If the Breadth of the Picture exceed the Height, the Distance NO must be made equal to the Breadth: For so will the Extent of the Picture be the better comprehended, or receiv’d, at one View. And altho’ the same Distance may seem to be used in a different manner in the Plan A, and in the Elevation B, from what it is in C; nevertheless the Sections of the visual Rays, with the Wall of the Plan A, and of the Elevation B, have a perfect Correspondence with the Sections of those of the Figure C.

In pictures that take up a lot of space, the viewpoint should be positioned in the center of the horizontal line. If the height of the picture is greater than the width, the distance NO must be equal to the height. If the width of the picture exceeds the height, the distance NO should match the width. This way, the overall picture can be better understood and appreciated at a glance. And although the same distance may seem to be used differently in Plan A and Elevation B compared to C, the sections of the visual rays with the wall in Plan A and Elevation B correspond perfectly with the sections in Figure C.

Now, if to the Spectator in A and B, we would have the farthest Part of the Work seem to recede from the Lines DE and GF, as much as the Square P does, whose Elevation is Q; draw from the Points A and B, the visual Rays to the extreme Points of the Square P and Q; noting the Sections they make with the Walls DE and GF; which by some is call’d the Veil, Transparent Medium, Section, Cloth, or Table: and you’ll find RS equal to TV, XZ equal to YK; and so of the rest.

Now, if we want the viewer at points A and B to see the farthest part of the work appear to pull away from the lines DE and GF just like square P does, whose height is Q, then we should draw visual lines from points A and B to the farthest points of squares P and Q. We should also note the sections they create with walls DE and GF, which some call the Veil, Transparent Medium, Section, Cloth, or Table. You'll find that RS is equal to TV and XZ is equal to YK, and the same goes for the rest.


Fig. II.

Fig. II.

FIGURA Secunda.

Modus delineandi opticè Quadratum.

Method for visually outlining a square.

Ante descriptionem opticam quadrati A, quod fingimus delineatum esse in papyro separatâ, ducendæ sunt duæ lineæ parallelæ; altera plani, altera horizontis, ut jam docuimus; notando in linea horizontis punctum oculi O, & punctum distantiæ E. Tum translatâ in lineam plani latitudine ac longitudine ipsius quadrati A, ita ut linea CB sit æqualis latitudini, & DC sit æqualis longitudini. Ex punctis B & C fiunt visuales BO, CO ad punctum oculi; ex puncto D fit recta DE ad punctum distantiæ. Demum ubi visualem CO secat recta DE, fit GF parallela ad CB; habesque quadratum opticè contractum.

Before describing the optical square A, which we imagine is drawn on a separate piece of paper, you need to draw two parallel lines; one is the horizontal line and the other is the vertical line, as we have already explained. Mark the point of the eye O on the horizontal line, and the point of distance E. Then, translate the width and height of square A onto the plan, so that line CB is equal to the width, and DC is equal to the height. From points B and C, draw visual lines BO and CO to the eye point; from point D, draw a straight line DE to the point of distance. Finally, where the visual line CO intersects the straight line DE, draw Girlfriend parallel to CB; you now have the square optically contracted.

Compendium temporis & laboris facies, præsertim in schematibus quæ abundant lineis, si chartulam in medio complicaveris, eademque utaris, ut latitudinem ac longitudinem quadrati transferas in lineam plani.

Gathering of time and labor aspects, especially in diagrams that are filled with lines, if you fold the paper in the middle and use it to translate the width and length of the square into a flat line.

The Second Figure.

Manner of delineating a Square in Perspective.

How to Draw a Square in Perspective.

Before the Square A, which is supposed to be drawn on a separate Paper, can be laid down in Perspective, two parallel Lines must be drawn; one of the Plan, the other of the Horizon, as is already intimated; noting in the Horizontal Line the Point of Sight O, and the Point of Distance E. Then, when the Length and Breadth of the Square A shall be transferr’d into the Line of the Plan, so that the Line CB be equal to the Breadth, and DC be equal to the Length, let the visual Lines BO, CO be drawn from the Points B and C to the Point of Sight O, and the right Line DE from the Point D to the Point of Distance. Lastly, where the Line DE cuts the Visual CO, make GF parallel to CB: and you have the Square Optically contracted, or fore-shorten’d in Perspective.

Before the Square A, which needs to be drawn on a separate piece of paper, can be set up in perspective, two parallel lines must be drawn: one for the Plan and the other for the Horizon, as mentioned earlier; marking the Point of Sight O and the Point of Distance E on the Horizontal Line. Next, when the Length and Width of the Square A are transferred to the Line of the Plan, ensuring that the Line CB matches the Width and DC matches the Length, draw the visual lines BO and CO from points B and C to the Point of Sight O, and the straight line DE from Point D to the Point of Distance. Finally, where the Line DE intersects Visual CO, make GF parallel to CB, and you've got the Square optically contracted or shortened in perspective.

To spare Time and Pains, especially in Figures that abound in Lines, fold your Paper in the middle, and make use of it to transfer the Breadth and Length of the Square, into the Line of the Plan.

To save time and effort, especially with figures that have a lot of lines, fold your paper in half and use it to transfer the width and length of the square onto the line of the plan.


FIG. III.

FIG. III.

FIGURA TERTIA.

Optica delineatio rectanguli, alterâ parte longioris.

Optical outline of a rectangle, on the longer side.

Latitudo BC rectanguli A ponatur in linea plani, adhibito circino, vel chartulâ complicatâ; & ex punctis B & C fiant visuales ad O, punctum perspectivæ. Tum papyro ex altera parte iterum complicatâ, notetur longitudo CD rectanguli; ducendo tum rectam DE ad punctum distantiæ, tum rectam FG parallelam ad BC, quæ complebit opticam delineationem rectanguli.

Width BC of rectangle A should be set on a flat line, using a compass or folded paper; then, from points B and C, create lines to O, the point of perspective. Next, using another folded piece of paper, mark the length CD of the rectangle; then draw line DE to the distance point, and line FG parallel to BC, which will complete the optical representation of the rectangle.

Altera figura ostendit complicationem cruciformem papyri, quæ adhiberi potest in delineandis rectangulis, seu latitudo eorum sit major longitudine, aut vice versâ; seu latitudo & longitudo sint æquales.

This figure shows the cross-shaped complexity of the paper, which can be used to draw rectangles, whether their width is greater than their length, or vice versa; or whether the width and length are equal.

The Third Figure.

The Delineation of an Oblong Square in Perspective.

The Outline of a Rectangle in 3D.

Let the Breadth BC of the Square A, be plac’d in the Line of the Plan, by the Compass, or a folded Paper, and from the Points B and C, make the Visuals to the Point of Sight O. Then fold your Paper cross-wise, and mark CD the Length of the Square, drawing the Line DE to the Point of Distance, and the Line FG parallel to BC, which will complete the Optick Delineation of the oblong Square.

Let the width BC of Square A be positioned along the line of the plan, using a compass or a folded piece of paper, and from points B and C, draw the lines to the point of sight O. Then, fold your paper in half, and mark CD as the length of the square, drawing line DE to the point of distance, and line FG parallel to BC, which will complete the optical depiction of the rectangular square.

The other Figure shews the Folding of the Paper cross-wise, which is of ready use in delineating Squares, whose Breadth exceeds their Length, or vice versâ; or whose Length and Breadth are equal.

The other figure shows how to fold the paper crosswise, which is useful for drawing squares that are wider than they are long, or vice versa, or where the length and width are the same.


FIG. IV.

FIG. IV.

FIGURA QUARTA.

Optica descriptio quadrati duplicis.

Double square optical description.

Iam incipies frui compendio papyri complicatæ. Nam eam admovendo lineæ plani, nullo negotio notare poteris puncta 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, linearum visualium, quæ ducentur ad O punctum perspectivæ. Exinde complicatâ rursum chartulâ in crucem ad P, notabuntur hæc puncta; 7, coincidens cum puncto 6, nisi quadratum distet à linea plani; 8, 9, 10. Ductis autem rectis ex 8, 9, 10, ad punctum E, ubi secant visualem 6, 7, O fient parallelæ, eritque completa delineatio.

You’ll begin to enjoy the summary of the folded paper. By moving it closer to the flat lines, you'll easily be able to mark points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, of the visual lines, which will lead to point O of perspective. Then, by folding the paper back in crosswise toward P, you will mark these points; 7, coinciding with point 6, unless the square is separated from the line of the flat; 8, 9, 10. Then, drawing straight lines from 8, 9, 10, to point E, where they intersect with visual points 6, 7, O will become parallel, and the outline will be complete.

In medio quadrati B, aliud quadratum facilè describetur, ducendo diagonales seu diametros ab angulo ad angulum, ut in figura.

In the middle of square B, another square can easily be drawn by connecting the diagonals or diameters from corner to corner, as shown in the figure.

The Fourth Figure.

The Optical Delineation of a double Square.

The Optical Delineation of a double Square.

Here you’ll find the Advantage of your folded Paper; for, applying it to the Line of the Plan, you readily mark the Points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, of the visual Lines, which must be drawn to the Point of Sight O. Then folding the Paper cross-wise, as in P, you mark the Points 7, 8, 9, 10, placing the Point 7 on that of 6, unless you would have the Square removed within the Line of the Plan. Then from 8, 9, 10, drawing Lines to the Point of Distance E; where they intersect the Line 6, 7, O, draw Parallels to the Line of the Plan; and your Work is done.

Here you’ll see the benefit of your folded paper; by applying it to the line of the plan, you can easily mark points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 of the visual lines that need to be drawn to the point of sight O. Then, folding the paper crosswise, as shown in P, you mark points 7, 8, 9, 10, positioning point 7 over point 6, unless you want the square to be moved inside the line of the plan. Next, from points 8, 9, and 10, draw lines to the point of distance E; where they cross the line 6, 7, O, draw parallels to the line of the plan, and your work is finished.

Within the Square B, you may easily inscribe another Square, by help of the Diagonals; as may be seen in the Figure.

Within Square B, you can easily draw another square using the diagonals, as shown in the figure.


Fig. v.

Fig. v.

FIGURA QUINTA.

Vestigia quadratorum, cum elevationibus.

Footprints of squares, with elevations.

Suppositis iis quæ jam diximus de Contractione optica Quadratorum, notandum est, vestigium primi Quadrati distare à linea plani spatio BA opticè contracto; quia linea BD habet à visuali AO, distantiam BA. Eodem modo Quadratum secundum distat à linea plani spatio EA, & sic deinceps.

About the points we've already made about the optical contraction of squares, it's important to note that the distance from the first square to the flat plane line BA is contracted optically; because the line BD has a distance from the visual line AO that is equal to BA. Similarly, the second square is distanced from the flat plane line EA, and so on.

Velim observes, in omnibus his Quadratis lineas longitudinis esse partes visualium, lineas vero latitudinis esse parallelas lineæ plani, & in primo Quadrato duci ex punctis, in quibus lineæ BD, CD, tendentes ad punctum distantiæ, secant visualem AO.

Velim notes that in all these squares, the lines of length are parts of the visuals, while the lines of width are parallel to the plane line, and in the first square, it's drawn from the points where the lines BD and CD, extending toward the point of distance, intersect the visual line AO.

Sub singulis vestigiis Quadratorum, delineavimus alia omnino similia, per quæ parvo labore fient tres bases, erigendo ad libitum duas primas perpendiculares æquales; ac ducendo tum duas visuales ad punctum oculi O, tum reliquas, ut in figura. Supponendum est autem, geometricam altitudinem cujuslibet rei desumi ex lineis normalibus ad lineam plani; quemadmodum latitudo & longitudo geometrica desumuntur ex eadem linea plani.

Under each corner of the Squares, we’ve outlined completely similar ones, through which, with minimal effort, three bases can be created by raising two equal verticals as desired; and then drawing two lines to the point of sight O, along with the others, as shown in the figure. It should be noted that the geometric height of anything is derived from the normal lines to the plane line; just as the geometric width and length are derived from that same plane line.

Tres aliæ bases inferiores formantur sine lineis occultis ex vestigio & ex elevatione longitudinis opticè deformatis, adhibendo solas altitudines ac latitudines angulorum. Nomine altitudinis intelligimus distantiam cujuslibet anguli à linea plani; nomine latitudinis intelligimus distantiam anguli ab una aliqua linea normali ad lineam plani; dummodo hæ normales eandem habeant positionem respectu basium, & respectu vestigiorum & elevationum. Quemadmodum autem per concursum altitudinis FG, & latitudinis HI, ope duorum circinorum invenitur unus angulus in una basi; ita inveniuntur cæteri tum in ea, tum in reliquis.

Three additional lower bases are formed without hidden lines from the trace and from the elevation of lengths optically distorted, using only the heights and widths of the angles. By height, we mean the distance of any angle from the plane line; by width, we mean the distance of an angle from a line normal to the plane line; provided these normals have the same position relative to the bases and to the traces and elevations. Just as through the intersection of height FG and width Hey, one angle is found on one base using two compasses; so the others are found both on it and on the remaining ones.

The Fifth Figure.

Plans of Squares, with their Elevations.

Blueprints of Squares, along with their Heights.

Besides what has been already said of the fore-short’ning of Squares in Perspective, it is convenient to observe, That the Foot of the first Square is here set within the Line of the Plan, as much as the Space BA optically contracted; because the Line BD has the Distance BA from the Visual AO: And in like manner, the second Square is distant from the Line of the Plan the Space EA; and so for the rest.

Additionally to what has already been said about the shortening of squares in perspective, it's helpful to note that the base of the first square is positioned within the line of the plan by the same amount as the space BA is visually contracted; because the line BD has the distance BA from the visual AO. Similarly, the second square is set apart from the line of the plan by the space EA, and this pattern continues for the others.

I would have you observe in all these Squares, That by the Length I always understand part of the visual Lines, and by the Breadth those parallel to the Ground-line; which in the first Square are drawn from the Points in which the Lines BD, CD, tending to the Point of Distance, intersect the Visual AO.

I want you to notice in all these Squares that by the Length, I always mean part of the visual Lines, and by the Breadth, those that are parallel to the Ground-line; which in the first Square are drawn from the Points where the Lines BD and CD, pointing towards the Point of Distance, intersect the Visual AO.

Under the Plans of these Squares are described three others just like them, which are easily converted into three Bases, by erecting, at pleasure, the two first Perpendiculars of equal Height, and thence drawing two Visuals to the Point of Sight O, which also bound the rest, as in the Figure. Observe also, That the Geometrical Height of every thing is to be set perpendicularly from the Ground-line, or Line of the Plan, as the Geometrical Length and Breadth are also placed on the same Line.

Under the plans for these squares, there are three others similar to them, which can easily be turned into three bases by erecting, as desired, the first two perpendiculars of equal height, and then drawing two sight lines to the point of sight O, which also define the rest, as shown in the figure. Also, note that the geometric height of everything should be measured straight up from the ground line, or the plan line, just as the geometric length and width are also placed on that same line.

The three other Bases below are form’d without the Help of Occult Lines, by making use only of the Heights and Breadths of the Angles, taken from the Perspective Plan and Upright. By Height I understand the Distance of each Angle, or Corner, from the Ground-Line; By Breadth, the Distance of an Angle, or Corner, from any Line perpendicular to the Ground-line; provided these Lines have always the same Place in respect of the Bases, as they have in respect of the Perspective Plan and Upright. And as, by the Help of two Compasses, the Height FG, and the Breadth HI determine the Corner of the first Base; so, in like manner, are found the Corners of the other Bases.

The three other bases below are created without using hidden lines, relying solely on the heights and widths of the angles taken from the perspective plan and upright. By height, I mean the distance of each angle or corner from the ground line; by width, I mean the distance of an angle or corner from any line that is perpendicular to the ground line, as long as these lines maintain the same position relative to the bases as they do in the perspective plan and upright. Just as the height FG and the width HI determine the corner of the first base using two compasses, the corners of the other bases are found in the same way.


Fig. vi.

Fig. vi.

FIGURA SEXTA.

Modus opticæ delineationis, absque lineis occultis.

Modus opticæ delineationis, absque lineis occultis.

In hac figura sexta, vestigium geometricum B seorsim posui ab elevatione geometrica A, ut deinceps faciemus. Vestigium B opticè contractum in E est NMRS; elevatio contracta longitudinis vestigii est FTSN. Posito autem quòd altitudines FN, 1, 5, 2, 6, sint æquales; latitudines NM, 1, 2, 5, 6, sint æquales; & rectæ NM, 5,6, sint in linea X plani; rectæ FN, 1, 5, sint in perpendiculo V: anguli 3 & 4 basis C habent eandem elevationem seu distantiam à linea X plani, quam habet angulus T: anguli 1 & 2 habent elevationem, quam angulus F: anguli 3 & 7 habent eandem latitudinem seu distantiam à perpendiculo V, quam habet angulus R: anguli 2 & 6 habent eandem latitudinem, quam habet angulus M.

In this sixth figure, I've placed the geometric point B separately from the geometric elevation A, as we will do next. The point B is optically contracted to E as NMRS; the contracted elevation of the length of the point is FTSN. Assuming that the heights FN, 1, 5, and 2, 6 are equal; the widths NM, 1, 2, and 5, 6 are equal; and the lines NM and 5, 6 are on line X of the plane; the lines FN and 1, 5 are perpendicular to V: angles 3 and 4 at base C have the same elevation or distance from the line X of the plane as angle T: angles 1 and 2 have the same elevation as angle F: angles 3 and 7 have the same width or distance from the perpendicular V as angle R: angles 2 and 6 have the same width as angle M.

The Sixth Figure.

The Manner of designing in Perspective, without occult Lines.

How to design in Perspective without hidden Lines.

In this sixth Figure, I have design’d the Geometrical Plan B separately from the Geometrical Elevation A, as I shall always do hereafter. The Plan B optically contracted, or put in Perspective, in E, is NMRS; the Elevation of its Length in Perspective is FTSN. Then supposing the Heights FN, 1,5, 2,6, equal; and the Breadths NM, 1,2, 5,6, equal; the Lines NM, 5,6, to be in the Line of the Plan X; and the Lines FN, 1,5, in the Perpendicular V: the Angles 3 and 4 of the Base C have the very same Elevation or Distance from the Line of the Plan X, as has the Angle T: the Angles 1 and 2 have the same Elevation with the Angle F: the Angles 3 and 7 have the same Breadth or Distance from the Perpendicular V, as the Angle R has: the Angles 2 and 6 have the same Breadth, as the Angle M has.

In this sixth figure, I’ve designed the Geometrical Plan B separately from the Geometrical Elevation A, and I will continue to do so from now on. The Plan B, when viewed in perspective, in E, is NMRS; the Elevation of its Length in Perspective is FTSN. Assuming the Heights FN, 1,5, 2,6 are equal, and the Widths NM, 1,2, 5,6 are equal; the Lines NM, 5,6, are along the Line of the Plan X; and the Lines FN, 1,5, are in the Vertical V: the Angles 3 and 4 of the Base C have the same Elevation or Distance from the Line of the Plan X as the Angle T does: the Angles 1 and 2 share the same Elevation as the Angle F: the Angles 3 and 7 have the same Width or Distance from the Vertical V as the Angle R: the Angles 2 and 6 have the same Width as the Angle M.


Fig. vii.

Fig. 7.

FIGURA SEPTIMA.

Aliud exemplum vestigii geometrici, cum elevatione longitudinis.

Aliud exemplum vestigii geometrici, cum elevatione longitudinis.

Si delineanda sit basis dissecta in quatuor partes, fiat vestigium A cum suis divisionibus longitudinis ED & latitudinis CD. Easdem vero divisiones latitudinis habebit in EF elevatio B quæ pertingit usque ad X. Porro ad contractionem opticam vestigii adhibebitur papyrus complicata in latum & in longum, transferendo in lineam plani latitudinem & longitudinem vestigii. Deinde nullo negotio fiet optica deformatio elevationis, ut clarè positum est in figura. Quomodo autem ex vestigio & ex elevatione longitudinis opticè imminutis eruatur basis nitida sine lineis occultis, ex præcedentibus manifestum est. Optarem ut per assiduam circini tractationem in hac methodo exercenda operam sedulò ponas; quum ex ea pendeat omnis facilitas delineationum opticarum.

If the base is to be outlined and divided into four parts, create a footprint A with its divisions for length ED and width CD. This same width division will apply to EF for elevation B, reaching up to X. Additionally, for the optical contraction of the footprint, folded paper will be used for width & length, transferring the width and length of the footprint into the plane line. Then, the optical deformation of the elevation will occur seamlessly, as clearly shown in the figure. However, how the clear base is obtained from the footprint & elevation of reduced optical length without hidden lines is evident from the previous explanation. I would like you to diligently focus on practicing this method through consistent use of the compass; all ease of optical drawings depends on it.

The Seventh Figure.

Another Example of a Geometrical Plan and Upright, put in Perspective.

Another Example of a Geometric Plan and Elevation, shown in Perspective.

For drawing in Perspective a Pedestal, or Base, divided into four Parts, make the Plan A with its Divisions of Length ED, and of Breadth CD; and the same Divisions of Breadth EF, in the Elevation B, prolong’d to X. Then make the Perspective-Plan, by transferring the Breadth and Length into the Ground-line, by means of your Paper folded cross-wise. From which Plan the Perspective-Upright is very easily made, as may be plainly seen in the Figure. How the Base below, without occult Lines, is made from the Perspective-Plan and Upright, is manifest from what has been said before. I could wish you would be very diligent in the Practice of this Method by the Compass; because the Dispatch of Perspective-Delineations chiefly depends thereon.

To draw a pedestal or base in perspective, divided into four parts, start with Plan A, featuring its length divisions ED and width divisions CD; and the same width divisions EF in Elevation B, extended to X. Next, create the perspective plan by transferring the width and length onto the ground line using your paper folded crosswise. From this plan, the perspective upright is made quite easily, as shown in the figure. It's clear how the base below is formed from the perspective plan and upright without hidden lines, based on what has been discussed earlier. I encourage you to practice this method with a compass diligently, as the speed of perspective drawings largely relies on it.


Fig. 8.

Fig. 8.

FIGURA OCTAVA.

Optica projectio stylobatæ.

Optical projection of the stylobate.

Si libitum fuerit delineare stylobatam, cum projecturis in summo & imo, incipies ab elevatione geometrica A, ducendo occultas ad id necessarias, tum versus perpendicularem L, tum deorsum pro vestigio geometrico B, cujus distantiæ transferentur in spatium G. Si mensuræ longitudinis distent spatio C à mensuris latitudinis, vestigium deformatum videbitur distare à linea K plani, quantum est idem spatium C. In construenda optica elevatione D, visuales ex punctis lineæ L dabunt lineas latitudinis; lineas vero altitudinis accipies ex lineis vestigii contracti, ut in figura. In formando stylobata nitido EF, locum anguli H dabit concursus latitudinis ex linea L usque ad M, & altitudinis ex linea K usque ad I. Concursus tum ejusdem altitudinis, tum latitudinis ex L usque ad O, dabit angulum N. Demum altitudinem anguli P accipies ex K usque ad Q; latitudinem ex L usque ad R.

If you want to outline the base, with projections at the top & bottom, start with geometric elevation A, drawing the necessary hidden lines to it, then a vertical line L, and downwards to the geometric marker B, whose distances will transfer into space G. If the length measurements differ by space C from the width measurements, the distorted outline will appear to be offset from line K by the same distance C. In constructing optical elevation D, the visuals from the points of line L will provide width lines; the height lines will come from the contracted outline lines, as depicted in the figure. When forming the clear base EF, the angle point H will be given by the width intersection from line L to M, and height from line K to I. The intersection of both the height and width from L to O will provide angle N. Finally, you'll take the height of angle P from K to Q; the width from L to R.

The Eighth Figure.

The Projection of a Pedestal in Perspective.

The Projection of a Pedestal in Perspective.

If you would draw a Pedestal, with the Projecture of its Cap and Base, you must begin with the Geometrical Elevation A, by drawing such occult Lines as are necessary, as well sideways to the Perpendicular L, as downwards for making the Geometrical Plan B, whose Distances must be transferr’d, and carry’d into the Space G. If the Measures of the Length be placed the Distance of the Space C, from those of the Breadth, the Perspective-Plan will then appear removed within the Ground-line K, as much as the said Space C is. In the Construction of the Perspective Elevation D, the Visuals drawn from the Points of the Line L give the Lines of the Breadth; and those of the Height are taken from the Lines of the Perspective-Plan, as in the Figure. In delineating the clean or finish’d Pedestal EF, the Intersection of the Breadth from L to M, with the Height from K to I, gives the precise Place of the Corner H. The Intersection of the same Height with the Breadth LO gives the Angle N. Lastly, the Angle P is found by the Intersection of the Height KQ, with that of the Breadth LR.

If you want to draw a pedestal with the design of its top and bottom, start with the geometric elevation A by drawing the necessary hidden lines, both horizontally to the vertical line L and downward to create the geometric plan B. Transfer the measurements for length to the spacing C from those for width, and this will place the perspective plan within the ground line K as far back as the space C. In constructing the perspective elevation D, the lines of width come from the points on line L, while the lines of height are taken from the perspective plan lines, as shown in the figure. When outlining the finished pedestal EF, the intersection of the width from L to M with the height from K to I determines the exact position of the corner H. The intersection of that height with the width LO gives you the angle N. Finally, the angle P is found where the height KQ intersects with the width LR.


Fig. ix.

Fig. ix.

FIGURA NONA.

Optica delineatio Architecturæ Jacobi Barozzii; & primum, de Stylobata Ordinis Etrusci.

Optical Outline of the Architecture of Jacopo Barozzi; & first, about the Stylobate of the Etruscan Order.

Perspectiva nusquam clariùs emicat, quàm in Architectura. Iccirco tibi ob oculos pono Architecturam Jacobi Barozzii, quem à patria nuncupant Il Vignola, reliquis fortasse usitatiorem; in eaque continetur elevatio geometrica singulorum quinque Ordinum, qui vocantur, Etruscus, Doricus, Ionicus, Corinthius, & Romanus, vel Compositus; delineando seorsim partes cujuscunque Ordinis in figuris grandioribus. Elevationi geometricæ suum vestigium nos addemus; ex vestigio autem & ex elevatione opticè deformatis, eliciemus apparentias solidorum juxta regulam traditam. Exempli gratia, si delineare velis stylobatam quadratum & pilam Ordinis Etrusci, præter elevationem geometricam A delineare oportet vestigium geometricum B; ex ambobus autem opticè contractis formatur stylobata nitidus D, cum anta & pila existente ad latus, accipiendo altitudines à linea plani, latitudines à linea perpendiculari ad ipsum planum. In alia delineatione posuimus pilam ex adverso, ut eis omni modo delineandis assuescas.

Viewpoint shines most clearly in Architecture. Therefore, I present to you the Architecture of Jacobo Barozzi, known in his homeland as Il Vignola, perhaps more familiar to others; it contains the geometric elevation of the five Orders known as Etruscan, Doric, Ionic, Corinthian, and Roman or Composite, separately illustrating the parts of each Order in larger figures. We will add our trace to the geometric elevation; from the trace and the optically distorted elevation, we will derive the appearances of solids according to the established rule. For example, if you want to draw the square stylobate and the column of the Etruscan Order, besides the geometric elevation A, you must draw the geometric trace B; from both, the neatly contracted stylobate D is formed, with the anta and column existing on the side, taking heights from the plane line and widths from the perpendicular line to that plane. In another drawing, we placed the column facing the opposite way so that you can get accustomed to drawing them in every possible manner.

Ad vitandam confusionem linearum, proderit ut figuræ fiant his nostris multò grandiores: in quem finem singulis paginis apposita est scala modulorum. Hoc nomine intelliguntur partes æquales, in quas dividuntur lineæ latitudinis & altitudinis elevationum geometricarum; ac lineæ latitudinis & longitudinis vestigiorum geometricorum. Si moduli sint parvi, subdividuntur singuli in duodecim partes; ac prout fuerint grandiores, subdividuntur in partes triginta, vel sexaginta, vel centumviginti. Modulos Etruscum Doricúmque in partes duodecim; reliquos autem in octodecim partiti sunt.

To avoid confusion with the lines, it will help if the figures are much larger: towards this goal, a scale of measures is added to each page. This refers to equal parts into which are divided the lines of width & height of geometric elevations; and the lines of width & length of geometric traces. If the measures are small, each one is divided into twelve parts; and depending on how large they are, they are further divided into thirty, sixty, or one hundred twenty parts. They split the Etruscan and Doric modules into twelve parts, while the others were divided into eighteen.

The Ninth Figure.

The Architecture of Vignola in Perspective; and first, of his Pedestal of the Tuscan Order.

The Architecture of Vignola in Perspective; and first, of his Pedestal of the Tuscan Order.

Perspective never appears more graceful, than in Architecture; for which Reason I present you with that of James Barozzi, from his Country generally call’d Vignola; which perhaps is more in use than any other; and contains the Geometrical Upright of each of the five Orders, viz. the Tuscan, Dorick, Ionick, Corinthian, and the Roman, or Composite; together with a separate Delineation of the Parts of each Order, in larger Figures. To this Geometrical Elevation we shall add the Plan, and, from both of them reduc’d into Perspective, shall draw the Appearances of Solids, according to the Rule before laid down. For Example: If you would draw the square Tuscan Pedestal, and its Pilaster, you must, from the Geometrical Elevation A, make the Geometrical Plan B; and from both of them reduc’d in Perspective, draw the finish’d Pedestal D, with that of its Pilaster on the Side, by taking the Heights from the Ground-line, and the Breadths from a Line perpendicular to the same. On the other Side we have placed the Pilaster on the Back-part, that you may practise the Drawing them in any manner.

Point of view is never more graceful than in architecture. That's why I'm sharing the perspective of James Barozzi from his country, commonly known as Vignola; which might be more widely used than any other. It outlines the geometric upright of each of the five orders, namely the Tuscan, Doric, , Corinthian, and the Roman or Composite; along with a separate drawing of the components of each order in larger figures. To this geometric elevation, we will add the plan, and from both of these, we'll create a perspective to illustrate the appearances of solids, following the previously established rule. For example, if you want to draw the square Tuscan pedestal and its pilaster, you should create the geometric plan B from the geometric elevation A. Then, from both of these reduced into perspective, draw the finished pedestal D, along with its pilaster on the side, by measuring the heights from the ground line and the widths from a line perpendicular to it. On the other side, we have placed the pilaster at the back so you can practice drawing them in any arrangement.

For avoiding the Confusion of Lines, I advise you to make the Figures as much larger than ours as you can; for which purpose there is annex’d a Scale of Modules to each Figure. By this Name we understand the equal Parts, into which the Lines of the Breadth and Height of the Geometrical Uprights, and of the Breadth and Length of the Geometrical Plans, are divided. If the Modules are small, they are subdivided into twelve Parts; and according as they are larger, into thirty, sixty, or an hundred and twenty Parts. I have divided the Tuscan and Dorick Module into twelve Parts, and that of the other Orders into eighteen.

To avoid confusion with the lines, I recommend making the figures as much larger than ours as you can; for this reason, a scale of modules is attached to each figure. By this term, we mean the equal parts into which the lines of the width and height of the geometric uprights, and of the width and length of the geometric plans, are divided. If the modules are small, they are divided into twelve parts; and as they get larger, they are divided into thirty, sixty, or one hundred and twenty parts. I have divided the Tuscan cuisine and Dorick module into twelve parts, and the modules of the other orders into eighteen.


Fig. 10.

Fig. 10.

FIGURA DECIMA.

Optica deformatio stylobatæ Dorici; ubi de modo vitandi confusionem, in vestigiis delineandis.

Optics of the distortion of the Doric stylobate; where it discusses how to avoid confusion in outlining the footprints.

Elevatio geometrica B stylobatæ Dorici continet eandem symmetriam partium quæ habetur apud Barozzium; ex eaque eruitur vestigium geometricum A per lineas occultas, quæ descendant ex punctis terminativis præcipuarum projecturarum. Earundem projecturarum distantiæ transferendæ sunt in lineam elevationis, notando puncta quæ necessaria sunt ad deformandam elevationem longitudinis stylobatæ.

Geometric height B of the Doric stylobate contains the same symmetry of parts found in Barozzi's work; from this, a geometric trace A is derived through hidden lines that descend from the terminal points of the main projections. The distances of these projections must be transferred to the line of elevation, marking the points necessary to shape the elevation of the stylobate's length.

Si ob propinquitatem lineæ plani ad lineam horizontis, vestigium evadat confusum, fiant in distantia congrua sub linea plani aliæ lineæ planorum ipsi parallelæ, cum suis vestigiis. Quid autem emolumenti afferat distantia major præ minori, ostendit vestigium E distinctiùs vestigio D. Singula hæc vestigia fiunt notando in linea cujuslibet plani mensuras latitudinis & longitudinis vestigii A, & ducendo lineas ad eadem puncta oculi ac distantiæ.

If the proximity of the plane to the horizontal line causes the trace to become unclear, other planes can be established at a suitable distance below the plane, parallel to it, with their own traces. However, the benefit of a greater distance compared to a lesser one is shown by the trace E being clearer than the trace D. Each of these traces is created by marking the width and length measurements of trace A on the line of any plane and drawing lines to the same points of vision and distance.

Stylobatam nitidum descripsimus ex parte G, tum ex necessitate, tum ut videas, pro distantia FO, usurpandam esse distantiam GO penitus æqualem.

We described the polished stylobate from section G, both out of necessity and to show that, for the distance FO, the distance Understood. Please provide the text to modernize. must be completely equal.

The Tenth Figure.

A Dorick Pedestal in Perspective; with the Manner of avoiding Confusion, in designing the Plans.

A Doric Pedestal in Perspective; with the Way to avoid Confusion in creating the Plans.

The Geometrical Elevation B has the same Members and Proportions, as the Dorick Pedestal of Vignola; and the Geometrical Plan A is form’d, by letting fall occult Lines from the principal Projectures of the Upright. Occult Lines are also to be continued to the Perpendicular F, from the several Members requisite for elevating in Perspective the Length of the Pedestal.

The Geometrical Elevation B has the same components and proportions as the Doric pedestal by Vignola; and the Geometrical Plan A is created by dropping hidden lines from the main projections of the upright structure. Hidden lines should also be extended to the perpendicular F, from the different components needed to raise the length of the pedestal in perspective.

When, by reason of the too near Approach of the Ground-line to that of the Horizon, the Plan becomes thereby confus’d; draw at a convenient Distance underneath, other Ground-lines parallel to the first; together with the Plans in Perspective. And of what Advantage the Removal of the Ground-line is, is evident from the Plan E, which is much more distinct than the Plan D. Each of these Plans is made, by marking upon its respective Ground-line the Measures of the Breadth and Length of the Plan A, and by drawing Lines to the same Points of Sight and Distance, which were first assign’d.

When the ground line gets too close to the horizon, making the plan confusing, draw additional ground lines below, parallel to the first one, at a comfortable distance. Add the perspective plans as well. It’s clear that moving the ground line is beneficial, as shown by Plan E, which is much clearer than Plan D. Each plan is created by marking the width and length measurements of Plan A on its own ground line and drawing lines to the same points of sight and distance that were designated initially.

We have placed the finish’d Pedestal on the Side G, partly for want of Room, and partly to shew, that the Point of Distance G is there made use of, GO being equal to FO.

We have placed the finished pedestal on Side G, partly because of a lack of space, and partly to show that the point of distance G is used there, with GO being equal to FO.


Fig. xi.

Fig. xi.

FIGURA Undecima.

Stylobatæ Ionici deformatio; ubi de vitanda confusione in elevationibus.

Stylobatæ Ionici deformatio; where confusion in elevations should be avoided.

Tum in figura præcedenti, tum rursus in hac, ostendimus quid agendum sit ubi vestigia AA nimium obliquentur, unde oritur confusio; præcipuè in lineis parallelis quæ exhibent latitudines. Non minor difficultas interdum occurret in elevationibus longitudinis opticè deformandis; quòd videlicet, ob nimiam earum obliquitatem, pervium non sit altitudines singularum projecturarum probè discernere ac designare. Ad scopulos istos declinandos, loco elevationis B adhibebitur elevatio C, quæ distinctior est, tum illâ, tum duabus intermediis D & E, ob majorem distantiam quam habet à puncto oculi.

In the previous figure and again in this one, we show what needs to be done when the lines AA bend too much, which leads to confusion; especially in parallel lines that show widths. A similar challenge can arise in the elevation of lengths that appear distorted; because of their excessive angle, it's difficult to clearly see and define the heights of each projection. To address these issues, instead of using elevation B, we will use elevation C, which is clearer, along with two intermediate elevations D & E, due to its greater distance from the viewpoint.

In delineando stylobata nitido, latitudines accipientur ex ultimo vestigio, ponendo unam cuspidem circini in linea perpendiculari, quæ proxima est literæ O: altitudines accipientur ex elevatione C, ponendo unam cuspidem circini in linea plani, ut in præcedentibus ostensum est.

In outlining the clear base, measurements will be taken from the last mark, placing one point of the compass on a vertical line closest to the letter O: heights will be taken from the height of C, placing one point of the compass on a flat line, as shown previously.

The Eleventh Figure.

The Ionick Pedestal in Perspective; with the Manner of avoiding Confusion, in Elevations.

The Ionick Pedestal in Perspective; with the Way to avoid Confusion, in Elevations.

As in the foregoing Figure, so in this also is shewn what is to be done, where the Plans AA lie so oblique, as to cause Confusion; especially in the Parallel-lines which give the Breadths. The like Inconvenience often happens in elevating the Lengths in Perspective; when by their too near Approach to the Point of Sight, the Contour of the several Mouldings can’t be distinctly delineated: For avoiding which, instead of B you may make use of the Elevation C, which is not only more distinct than the former, but better than either of the two intermediate ones D or E, by so much as it is more remote from the Point of Sight.

As shown in the previous Figure, this one also illustrates what needs to be done, where the Plans AA are positioned at an angle that creates confusion, especially in the Parallel lines that indicate the Widths. A similar issue often arises when elevating the Lengths in Perspective; when they are too close to the Point of Sight, the edges of the various Mouldings can't be clearly detailed. To avoid this, instead of using B, you can use the Elevation C, which is not only clearer than the former but also better than either of the two intermediate ones D or E, as it is further away from the Point of Sight.

In designing the finish’d Pedestal, the Breadths are taken from the lowest Plan, by setting one Point of the Compasses in the perpendicular Line OL: the Heights are taken from the Elevation C, by placing one Point of the Compasses in the Ground-line, as has been shewn before.

In designing the completed pedestal, the widths are taken from the lowest plan by setting one point of the compass on the vertical line OL; the heights are taken from the elevation C by placing one point of the compass on the baseline, as shown earlier.


FIG. XII.

FIG. 12.

FIGURA Duodecima.

Deformatio stylobatæ Corinthii, cum duabus pilis.

Deformation of the Corinthian stylobate, with two columns.

Ornatus gratiâ, stylobatæ Corinthio additæ sunt pilæ, quæ pone columnas locari solent. Ut autem pilæ clariùs appareant, columna omissa est, cujus deformandæ rationem nondum tradidimus. Mensuras omnes ex Barozzio acceptas esse demonstrat ipsum schema, in quo elevatio geometrica stylobatæ est A; vestigium ejus geometricum est B: pilæ CC. Vestigium opticè contractum est D, elevatio longitudinis stylobatæ opticè contracta est E, ac methodo consuetâ ex iis eruetur stylobata nitidus cum suis pilis.

Ornatus adds pilasters to the stylobate of Corinth, which are usually placed behind the columns. To make the pilasters stand out more clearly, one column has been omitted, and we haven't yet explained how to shape it. The measurements are all taken from Barozzi, as demonstrated by the schematic, where the geometric elevation of the stylobate is A; its geometric footprint is B: the pilasters are CC. The visually contracted footprint is D, and the visually contracted elevation of the stylobate is E, from which the polished stylobate with its pilasters will be derived using the usual method.

The Twelfth Figure.

The Corinthian Pedestal, with its Pilasters, in Perspective.

The Corinthian style Pedestal, with its Columns, in Perspective.

For Ornaments sake, we have added to this Corinthian Pedestal the Pilasters, which are usually placed behind Columns: And that they may be the more perspicuous, have left out the Column, not having yet shewn the Manner of putting it in Perspective. The Scheme shews the Measures are taken from Vignola; in which the Geometrical Upright of the Pedestal is A; the Geometrical Plan of the same is B; that of the Pilasters CC. The Plan in Perspective is D, the Elevation in Perspective is E; from which the finish’d Pedestal and Pilasters are drawn by the usual Method.

For the sake of decoration, we’ve added the Pilasters to this Corinthian Pedestal, which are typically placed behind Columns. To make them clearer, we've omitted the Column since we haven't yet shown how to represent it in Perspective. The diagram indicates that the measurements are based on Vignola; where the Geometrical Upright of the Pedestal is A, the Geometrical Plan of the same is B, and that of the Pilasters is CC. The Plan in Perspective is D, and the Elevation in Perspective is E; from which the finished Pedestal and Pilasters are drawn using the standard method.


FIG. XIII.

FIG. XIII.

Figura Decimatertia.

Projectio stylobatæ, ordinis Compositi.

Stylobate projection, Composite order.

Quum pagina non caperet integrum stylobatam tantæ molis, fingere oportuit detractum illi esse aliquid de trunco; ac partem supremam stylobatæ sustentari ab infima, non immediatè, sed per quatuor asseres; eisque impositam fuisse adjumento funium suspensorum ex trochlea. Elevatio geometrica stylobatæ est B; vestigium geometricum est A. Ex his eruitur optica delineatio vestigii C & elevationis D. Ac postea formatur stylobata nitidus E, accipiendo latitudines ex vestigio C, altitudines ex elevatione D.

Since the page could not hold the entire base of such a large structure, it was necessary to imagine that part of it was removed from the trunk; and the upper part of the base is supported by the lower part, not directly, but through four beams; and these were supplemented by suspended ropes from a pulley. The geometric elevation of the base is B; the geometric footprint is A. From these, the optical outline of the footprint C and elevation D is derived. And afterward, the precise base E is formed, taking widths from the footprint C and heights from the elevation D.

The Thirteenth Figure.

The Projection of a Pedestal, of the Composite Order, in Perspective.

The Projection of a Pedestal, of the Composite Order, in Perspective.

Wanting Room in this Page to describe so large a Pedestal entire, we imagine it to have lost part of its Trunk, and the upper part to be set on the lower; not immediately, but on four Cross-pieces that intervene; and for placing it thereon, we suppose the Assistance of Ropes and a Pulley. The Geometrical Elevation of the Pedestal is B; its Plan A; from whence are found their Projections in Perspective D and C. Then taking the Breadths from the Plan C, and the Height from the Elevation D, you complete the finish’d Pedestal E.

Desiring space on this page to fully describe such a large pedestal, we imagine it has lost part of its trunk, and the top part is placed on the bottom; not directly, but on four crosspieces that sit in between; and we assume ropes and a pulley were used to lift it into position. The geometric elevation of the pedestal is B; its layout is A; from which we derive their projections in perspective D and C. Then, by taking the widths from layout C and the height from elevation D, you can complete the finished pedestal E.


Fig. xiv.

Fig. xiv.

Figura Decimaquarta.

Deformatio circulorum.

Circle deformation.

Ut stylobatis imponere liceat columnas cum suis basibus & capitellis, docendus est modus qui servandus est in projectione optica circulorum, tum singularium, tum duplicium aut multiplicium circa idem centrum.

That the stylobate may support columns with their bases and capitals, the method that must be followed in the optical projection of circles must be taught, both for single ones, as well as for double or multiple around the same center.

Vestigium geometricum A constat quadrato in quatuor partes æquales diviso, cui circulus inscribitur, additis diagonalibus: & ubi hæ secant circulum, fiunt rectæ parallelæ ad singula latera ipsius quadrati. Deinde quadratum cum omnibus divisionibus opticè imminuitur; ac tum per quatuor puncta ubi tres lineæ rectæ se intersecant, tum per quatuor extrema reliquarum duarum diametrorum circuli, ducetur cum venustate circumferentia circuli B. Si addere velimus alium circulum, vestigio geometrico C inscribetur aliud quadratum; indeque habebitur optica delineatio duplicis circuli D. Inter hos duos quomodo liceat describere tertium, per octo sectiones quadratorum, ostendunt figuræ E & F. Uno verbo, circuli describuntur per quadrata, adhibendo sectiones visualium cum parallelis ad lineam plani; ac nullum est punctum in quadratis & circulis A, C, E, cui per sectiones illas nequeat inveniri punctum correspondens in quadratis & circulis B, D, F. Nihilominus ubi opus habeas pluribus circulis, autor tibi sum ne multiplices quadrata, plus confusionis allatura tibi quam adjumenti.

The geometric trace A consists of a square divided into four equal parts, with a circle inscribed within it, along with added diagonals; and where these intersect the circle, parallel lines to each side of the square are formed. Next, the square and all its divisions are optically diminished; and then through the four points where three straight lines intersect, and through the four endpoints of the other two diameters of the circle, a beautiful circumference of circle B will be drawn. If we want to add another circle, a different square will be inscribed into the geometric trace C; thus, an optical delineation of the double circle D will be obtained. The figures E & F demonstrate how a third can be described between the two, through eight sections of the squares. In short, circles are described through squares using sections visualized parallel to the plane line; and there is no point in the squares & circles A, C, E that cannot be found as a corresponding point in the squares & circles B, D, F through those sections. Nonetheless, when you need multiple circles, I advise you not to use multiple squares, as it will bring you more confusion than help.

The Fourteenth Figure.

Circles in Perspective.

Circles from a Perspective.

That upon Pedestals you may be able to place Columns with their Bases and Capitals, it is requisite you should know the Manner of putting Circles into Perspective; whether single, double, or many concentrick.

That to position Columns with their Bases and Capitals on Pedestals, you need to understand how to place Circles in Perspective; whether it's a single circle, double, or multiple concentric ones.

The Geometrical Plan A consists of a Square with a Circle inscrib’d, whose Diameters divide it into four equal Parts; and the Diagonals being drawn where they intersect the Circle, continue Lines parallel to each Side of the Square. The Square, with all its Divisions, being put in Perspective; by the four extreme Points of the Diameters, and by those of the Intersection of the Diagonals, you neatly trace by hand the Circumference B. If you would add another Circle, you must inscribe another Square, as in the Plan C; from whence you find in Perspective the double Circle D. Between these two Circles, you may, by the eight Intersections of the Squares, describe a third; as is evident by the Figures E and F. In a word, all Circles are described by the Help of Squares, tracing them by the Intersections of the visual Lines, with those parallel to the Ground-line: Nor is there any Point in either the Squares or Circles A, C, E, whose correspondent Point may not be readily found by such Sections, in the respective Squares and Circles B, D, F. Nevertheless, where your Work requires many Circles, I would advise you to use as few Squares as possible; lest they perplex, rather than assist you.

The Geometrical Plan A consists of a square with an inscribed circle, whose diameters divide it into four equal parts. Drawing the diagonals where they intersect the circle, continue lines parallel to each side of the square. The square, with all its divisions, is put in perspective; using the four extreme points of the diameters and those at the intersection of the diagonals, you can neatly trace the circumference B by hand. If you want to add another circle, you need to inscribe another square, as in Plan C; from this, you can find the double circle D in perspective. Between these two circles, you can describe a third circle using the eight intersections of the squares, as shown in Figures E and F. In short, all circles are created with the help of squares, tracing them through the intersections of the visual lines with those parallel to the ground line. There’s no point in either the squares or circles A, C, E, whose corresponding point can’t be easily found with such sections in the respective squares and circles B, D, F. However, when your work involves many circles, I recommend using as few squares as possible to avoid confusion.


Fig. xv.

Fig. 15.

Figura Decimaquinta.

Optica delineatio Columnæ.

Optical diagram of the column.

Descripturi frustum cylindricum I uniforme, fiet elevatio A, & vestigium geometricum B, saltem quoad medietatem. Ex hoc opticè deformato, ut vides in C, ducendæ sunt parallelæ tum latitudinis ad visualem D, tum elevationis ad visualem E; ex quibus describentur circuli opticè contracti F & L, accipiendo latitudines ex vestigio C, altitudines ex perpendiculari M; & juxta hanc methodum circuli F & L fiunt sine ope quadratorum. Demum ducendæ sunt perpendiculares G & H, quæ tangant circulos F & L in punctis terminativis maximæ latitudinis.

Descriptions a uniform cylindrical frustum I will have a height A, and a geometric footprint B, at least for half of it. From this optically distorted view, as you see in C, parallel lines must be drawn for both the width to the visual D and the height to the visual E; from which optically contracted circles F & L will be described, taking widths from the footprint C and heights from the perpendicular M; and using this method, the circles F & L are created without the aid of squares. Finally, perpendiculars G & H must be drawn, which will touch the circles F & L at the points defining maximum width.

Nullum est punctum in vestigio C, cui per lineas latitudinis & elevationis nequeat inveniri locus correspondens in circulo F. Exempli gratia; locus puncti 7 est punctum 6. Hunc autem locum habemus per tres lineas, CD, DE, E7.

There is no point on the line C for which a corresponding location cannot be found in circle F based on the latitude and elevation lines. For example, the location of point 7 is point 6. We determine this location through three lines, CD, DE, E7.

In delineandis duobus frustis cylindricis, cum summo & imo scapo, eandem regulam servare oportebit.

When outlining two cylindrical pieces, with the top and bottom ends, you must keep the same rule.

The Fifteenth Figure.

A Column in Perspective.

A Column from a Modern Viewpoint.

Being to describe Part of the Shaft of a Pillar without Projectures, make the Elevation A, and the Geometrical Plan B, at least to the middle: From this brought into Perspective, as you perceive in C, must be drawn Parallels both of Breadth to the Visual D, and of Elevation to the Visual E; from which are described the Circles in Perspective F and L, taking the Breadths from the Plan C, and the Heights from the Perpendicular M: And according to this Method the Circles F and L are made, without the Help of Squares. Lastly, draw the Perpendiculars G and H, by the Points which terminate the greatest Breadth of the Circles F and L.

To explain part of the shaft of a pillar without projections, create the elevation A and the geometric plan B, at least up to the middle. From this, bring it into perspective as shown in C. You need to draw parallels for both width to the visual D and height to the visual E. From this, the circles in perspective F and L can be drawn, using the widths from the plan C and the heights from the perpendicular M. By following this method, circles F and L are created without the use of squares. Finally, draw the perpendiculars G and H at the points that mark the widest part of circles F and L.

There is not a Point in the Plan C, but what, by means of the Lines of Breadth and Elevation, may be found in the Circle F. For Instance; the Place of the Point 6 is 7, which is found by the three Lines CD, DE, E7.

There isn't a point in the Plan C that can't be found in the Circle F using the Lines of Breadth and Elevation. For example, the position of Point 6 is 7, which is determined by the three Lines CD, DE, E7.

In designing the two Pieces of a Pillar, with the Projecture of the Fillet at Head and Foot, you must observe the very same Rule.

In designing the two parts of a pillar, with the shaping of the fillet at the top and bottom, you must follow the exact same rule.


Fig. xvi.

Fig. xvi.

Figura Decimasexta.

Optica projectio basis Etruscæ.

Etruscan optical projection basis.

Ex elevatione geometrica A eruitur vestigium B. Hoc autem deformato in C & D, ex circulis vestigii C habentur latitudines columnæ, quadræ, ac tori triplicis basis: & eodem modo ex vestigio D habentur latitudines quadræ ac tori ultimæ basis. Ex maximis latitudinibus circulorum vestigii C ereximus perpendiculares ad partes quæ ipsis respondent in basi; ut agnoscas quænam sint puncta maximæ latitudinis in eisdem partibus. Hæc puncta (quæ in circulo maximo vestigii C sunt M & N) invenientur tangendo circumferentiam uniuscujusque circuli regulâ parallelâ ad lineam perpendicularem E, nam si figura exactè delineata fuerit, regula tanget singulos toros trium basium in punctis maximæ hinc inde latitudinis.

From the geometric elevation, we derive the trace B. However, when deformed into C & D, the widths of the column, square, and triple base of the torus are obtained from the circles of the trace C; similarly, the widths of the square and the final base of the torus are derived from the trace D. From the greatest widths of the circles of the trace C, we erect perpendiculars to the parts corresponding to these widths in the base; this will help you identify which points represent the greatest width in those parts. These points (which are M & N on the largest circle of the trace C) will be found by touching the circumference of each circle with a ruler parallel to the perpendicular line E, as long as the figure is drawn accurately. The ruler will touch each of the three bases of the torus at points of maximum width on either side.

Magis laborandum erit in reperiendis altitudinibus quatuor basium. Verum si sedulò inspiciatur deformatio elevationis F, aliarumque duarum, (quæ factæ sunt, notatis in linea perpendiculari E divisionibus desumptis ex elevatione geometrica A) constabit, nullum esse punctum in circulis vestigii C, cui nequeat inveniri punctum correspondens in toro & quadra ipsius basis, ut ostendunt lineæ occultæ, quæ incipiunt ex M & N. Earum quælibet ex vestigio C pervenit ad lineam visualem, & continuatur cum linea altitudinis ex visuali ad elevationem F, & cum alia linea latitudinis ex elevatione F ad basim. Porrò ex figura constat, superficiem superiorem quadræ subduci oculis à columna, & aliquid ex parte postica tori quod cæteroqui conspiceretur, abscondi à quadra. Proinde torus, qui ex punctis maximæ latitudinis retrorsum flectitur, eousque delineandus est, quoad hinc inde occurrat quadræ ipsum cooperienti. Præstaret autem singula membra ita exactè delineari, quasi essent diaphana; ut partes oculis imperviæ, omnino cohæreant cum partibus quæ ipsis conspicuæ sunt.

It will take more effort to find the heights of the four bases. However, if you carefully examine the distortion of elevation F and the other two (which were created, marked on the perpendicular line E with divisions taken from the geometric elevation A), it will be clear that there is no point in the tracing circles C for which a corresponding point can be found on the torus and its base square, as shown by the hidden lines that start from M and N. Each of these from the tracing C reaches the visual line and continues with the line of height from the visual to the elevation F, and with another line of latitude from the elevation F to the base. Furthermore, it is clear from the figure that the upper surface of the square is lowered from view by the column, and something from the back part of the torus that would otherwise be seen is hidden from the square. Therefore, the torus, bending back from points of maximum latitude, must be drawn to the extent it encounters the square covering it. It would be best for each part to be drawn so precisely, as if they were transparent; so that the parts not visible to the eyes perfectly integrate with the parts that are visible.

Completâ delineatione, si figuram tuam ex perpendiculo puncti oculi ex debita distantia contemplatus fueris, omnes defectus facilè deteges & statim corriges. Præcipuam diligentiam pones in formando & emendando toro, qui habet duas rotunditates; unam quatenus ambit columnam; alteram quatenus caret angulis, ut ostendit elevatio geometrica in I.

After you've finished the outline, if you look at your figure from the right angle at the proper distance, you'll easily spot any mistakes and fix them right away. Pay special attention to shaping and refining the rounded part, which has two curves: one that surrounds the column and the other that is smooth without corners, as shown in the geometric elevation in I.

The Sixteenth Figure.

The Tuscan Base in Perspective.

The Tuscan Base in Perspective.

From the Geometrical Elevation A, is drawn the Plan B; which being put into Perspective, as you see in C and D, from the Circles of the Plan C you have the Breadths of the Column, and of the List, and Torus of the three Bases: And after the same manner, by the Plan D, you have the Breadth of the List and Torus of the last Base. From the greatest Breadth of the Circles of the Plan C, we have erected Perpendiculars to the Parts that answer them in the Base, to the end that you may see where the Points fall, which terminate the greatest Breadth of those Parts. These Points (which in the biggest Circle of the Plan C are M and N) are found by touching the Extremity of the Circumference with a Line parallel to the Perpendicular E: for if the Figure were exact, that Line would touch every Torus of the three Bases in the extreme Points of their Breadth.

From the Geometrical Elevation A, we draw Plan B; which, when put into Perspective, as shown in C and D, allows us to determine the Widths of the Column, the List, and the Torus of the three Bases from the Circles in Plan C. Similarly, Plan D gives us the Width of the List and the Torus of the last Base. From the widest part of the Circles in Plan C, we have set up Perpendiculars to the corresponding Parts in the Base, so you can see where the Points land that define the widest part of those Sections. These Points (which in the largest Circle of Plan C are M and N) are found by drawing a Line parallel to the Perpendicular E that touches the Edge of the Circumference; if the Figure were accurate, that Line would touch every Torus of the three Bases at the farthest Points of their Width.

The Heights of the four Bases are something more difficult to be found. Nevertheless, if you consider well the Elevation F, and the other two G and H, (which are made by transporting the Divisions of the Elevation A upon the Perpendicular E) it will plainly appear that there is no Point in the Circles of the Plan C, to which there may not be a correspondent Point found in the Torus and List of the said Base; as the occult Lines shew, that arise from M and N; each of which is a Continuation of three Lines: The first of Breadth, from the Plan C to the Visual; the second of Height, from the Visual to the Elevation F; the third of Breadth, from the Elevation F to the Base. Now, tho’ it’s plain by the Figure, that the Body of the Column prevents the Sight of good part of the Fillet, and the same Fillet takes off from part of the Torus, which would otherwise be visible; for which Reason the Back-part of the Torus is continu’d only till it meet the same: Yet it’s certainly best to draw every Member complete, as tho’ the Work were transparent; that the Parts hidden from the Eye may the better agree with those that are expos’d to it.

The heights of the four bases are somewhat more challenging to determine. However, if you carefully examine Elevation F, along with the other two, G and H (which are created by transferring the divisions of Elevation A onto Perpendicular E), it will clearly show that there is no point in the circles of Plan C that doesn't have a corresponding point in the Torus and the outline of the base. This is evident from the hidden lines that extend from M and N, each of which continues along three lines: the first is width from Plan C to the Visual; the second is height from the Visual to Elevation F; and the third is width from Elevation F to the Base. Now, although it’s clear from the figure that the body of the column obscures a significant part of the fillet, and the same fillet partially hides part of the Torus, which would otherwise be visible, the back part of the Torus is only extended until it meets it. Still, it's definitely best to draw every element completely, as if the work were transparent, so that the parts hidden from view can better align with those that are visible.

When your Draught is finish’d, if you view it at the due Distance, and perpendicularly to the Point of Sight; you’ll readily discover and rectify what’s amiss. Your chief Care will be employ’d in shaping the Torus, difficult by reason of its Roundness both ways; namely, in the Contour of its Moulding, as in the Elevation I; and in the Circuit it makes about the Column.

When your drawing is finished, if you look at it from the right distance and straight on, you'll easily spot and fix any mistakes. Your main focus will be on shaping the Torus, which is tricky because of its roundness on both sides; that is, in the outline of its molding, as shown in Elevation I, and in the loop it creates around the column.


Fig. xvii.

Fig. xvii.

Figura Decimaseptima.

Deformatio basis Doricæ.

Doric column base deformation.

Ad vitandam satietatem quam pareret nimia uniformitas, unam ex basibus invertimus. Utraque autem basis delineata est methodo quam tradidimus figurâ præcedenti. Eademque methodus adeò manifestè patet ex lineis occultis latitudinum & elevationum, ut superfluum futurum sit ipsam repetere.

To avoid the boredom created by excessive uniformity, we switch one of the bases. However, both bases are outlined using the method we presented in the previous figure. This same method is so clearly apparent from the hidden lines of widths and elevations that it would be unnecessary to repeat it.

The Seventeenth Figure.

The Dorick Base in Perspective.

The Dorick Base in Perspective.

That you may not be tir’d with practising one and the same thing, I have here, for Variety-sake, inverted one of the Bases. Both of ’em are drawn after the Manner explain’d in the foregoing Figure; which is so evident from the occult Lines of the Plan and Elevation here given, that I think it superfluous to say any more of it.

So you don’t get bored by practicing the same thing, I’ve switched up one of the bases for variety. Both are created in the style explained in the previous figure; it's clear from the hidden lines of the plan and elevation provided here, so I think there's no need to elaborate further.


FIG. XVIII.

FIG. 18.

Figura Decimaoctava.

Optica delineatio basis Ionicæ.

Optical definition of the Ionians.

Ex multitudine ac varietate figurarum hujus Operis, disces, mi Lector, modum deformandi res demissas & sublimes, magnas & parvas. In hac figura, linea cui bases duarum columnarum incumbunt, est conjunctim linea plani, & linea horizontalis; linea cui bases trium columnarum incumbunt, est altior linea horizontali. Quemadmodum autem, si linea plani sit inferior linea horizontali, lineæ quæ tendunt ad punctum oculi & ad punctum distantiæ, ascendunt sursum; ita si linea plani sit superior horizontali, lineæ quæ veniunt ad punctum oculi & ad punctum distantiæ, tendunt deorsum. Quòd si in eadem tabula sint plura plana, eorumque aliqua sint altiora, alia verò demissiora linea horizontali, lineæ omnes planorum, ac linea horizontalis, sunt invicem parallelæ; adeoque ex linea, quæ omnes eas normaliter secet, statim dignosci potest, in qua proportione, singula plana sint altiora vel profundiora linea horizontali. Velim quoque observes, latitudinem columnæ mediæ, minorem esse latitudine columnarum lateralium; & discrimen inter hujusmodi latitudines eò est majus, quò punctum distantiæ fuerit vicinius puncto oculi. Quæ dicta sunt de columnis, intelligere oportet de basibus, & de optica delineatione ambarum. Nihilominus, si figura ex debito puncto inspiciatur, columnæ pictæ habebunt eandem apparentiam, quam haberent columnæ solidæ, invicem æquales.

From the multitude and variety of figures in this work, you will learn, dear Reader, how to distort both low and high objects, large and small. In this figure, the line that the bases of two columns rest on is a combined line of the plane and a horizontal line; the line that the bases of three columns rest on is a higher horizontal line. Just as, if the line of the plane is below the horizontal line, the lines that extend to the eye point and the distance point rise upward; so if the line of the plane is above the horizontal line, the lines that come to the eye point and the distance point go downward. If there are multiple planes on the same table, some of which are higher and others lower than the horizontal line, all the lines of the planes and the horizontal line are parallel to each other; thus from the line that intersects all of them normally, it can be immediately determined how each plane is positioned relative to the horizontal line. I would also like you to note that the width of the middle column is less than the width of the side columns; and the difference between these widths becomes greater the closer the distance point is to the eye point. What has been said about the columns must also be understood in relation to their bases and the optical depiction of both. Nevertheless, if the figure is viewed from the correct point, the painted columns will have the same appearance as solid columns that are equal to each other.

The Eighteenth Figure.

The Ionick Base in Perspective.

The Ionick Base in Perspective.

By the Multitude and Variety of Figures in this Work, the Reader will be instructed in delineating things, however different in Size or Situation. In this Figure, the Line on which the two Columns rest, is both the Horizontal and the Ground-line; that on which the three Columns are plac’d, is so much higher than the Horizontal Line. And as, where the Ground-line is beneath the Horizontal, the Lines drawn to the Points of Sight and Distance tend upwards; so, where the same is above the Horizontal, the Lines to the Points of Sight and Distance tend downwards. If in the same Picture there are different Grounds, some higher, others lower than the Horizontal Line; yet are all those Ground-lines, and the Horizontal, parallel one to another; and therefore, by a Line cutting them all perpendicularly, you presently know in what proportion each Plan or Ground is higher or lower than the Horizontal. I would have you observe, That the Breadth of the middle Column is, by the Perspective, render’d less than that of the Side-Columns; and that this Difference is the greater, as the Point of Distance approaches nearer to the Point of Sight. What has been said of the Columns, is also to be understood of the Bases, and the Projections of all their Parts in Perspective: Nevertheless, if the Picture be view’d from its due Place, the Columns will have the same Effect, as if solid; and all appear equal one to the other.

With the wide range of shapes in this work, the reader will learn how to depict things, regardless of their size or position. In this figure, the line that supports the two columns serves as both the horizontal and ground line, while the line for the three columns is positioned higher than the horizontal line. Just as, when the ground line is below the horizontal line, the lines leading to the points of sight and distance angle upwards; when the ground line is above the horizontal, the lines to the points of sight and distance angle downwards. If the same picture contains different ground levels, with some higher and others lower than the horizontal line, all those ground lines and the horizontal line remain parallel to each other; thus, by drawing a line that intersects them all perpendicularly, you can easily determine how each level compares to the horizontal line. Note that the width of the middle column is represented as smaller than that of the side columns due to perspective; this difference becomes more pronounced as the point of distance gets closer to the point of sight. The same principle applies to the bases and projections of all their parts in perspective. However, if the picture is viewed from the correct position, the columns will appear solid and equal to one another.


Fig. xix.

Fig. xix.

Figura Decimanona.

Optica imminutio basis Corinthiæ.

Optical reduction basis of Corinth.

Hæc basis juxta regulas traditas opticè contracta est. Porrò altitudo superficiei A est eadem cum altitudine lineæ visualis CD; latitudo crucis A est eadem cum latitudine crucis secundi circuli vestigii B, incipiendo à minimo omnium. Duæ lineæ normaliter infixæ basi, ostendunt maximam latitudinem quam habere debet columna supra imum scapum. Maxima latitudo tori superioris & utriusque astragali, est eadem cum maxima latitudine tertii circuli. Maxima latitudo tori inferioris est eadem cum maxima latitudine ultimi circuli.

This base is constructed according to traditional optical rules. Furthermore, the height of surface A is the same as the height of the visual line CD; the width of cross A is the same as the width of the cross of the second circle's outline B, starting from the minimum of all. Two lines normally fixed to the base show the maximum width that the column should have above the bottom shoulder. The maximum width of the upper torus and both astragali is the same as the maximum width of the third circle. The maximum width of the lower torus is the same as the maximum width of the last circle.

The Nineteenth Figure.

The Corinthian Base in Perspective.

The Corinthian Base in Perspective.

This Base is put in Perspective by the Rules before laid down. The Height of the Superficies A is the same with that of the visual Line CD; the Breadth of the Cross A is the same with that of the second Circle of the Plan B, beginning with the least. The two Lines that stand perpendicularly on the Surface of the Base, shew the greatest Breadth of the Columns Shaft above the Fillet. The Extent of the upper Torus and the two Astragals, is the same with that of the third Circle; and the Extent of the lower Torus is the same with that of the outward Circle.

This base is put into perspective by the rules outlined earlier. The height of surface A matches the height of the visual line CD; the width of the cross A is the same as that of the second circle of plan B, starting from the smallest. The two lines that stand perpendicular to the surface of the base show the greatest width of the column's shaft above the fillet. The extent of the upper Torus and the two astragals is the same as that of the third circle; and the extent of the lower Torus is the same as that of the outer circle.


Fig. xx.

Fig. xx.

FIGURA Vigesima.

Basis Acticurga opticè imminuta.

Basis Acticurga optics diminished.

Basis Acticurga Pictoribus præ reliquis familiaris est, quia cum omnibus ferè Ordinibus egregiè consentit. Porrò ex punctis E & F maximæ utrinque latitudinis extimi circuli vestigii, habetur maxima latitudo tori inferioris CD. Ac cætera quæ spectant ad ipsum & ad torum AB, petenda sunt ex dictis de basi Etrusca.

Foundation is particularly familiar to the Acticurga Pictoribus because it aligns remarkably well with almost all the other Orders. Furthermore, from the points E & F, the maximum width of the outermost circle of the footprint is defined by the largest width of the lower beam CDs. Other matters related to it and the beam AB should be sought from the discussions about the Etruscan base.

The Twentieth Figure.

The Attick Base in Perspective.

The Attic Base in Perspective.

The Attick Base is more frequently made use of by Painters, than any other; because it suits well with most of the Orders. The Points E and F, the greatest Breadth of the outward Circle of the Perspective-Plan, give the greatest Breadth of the lower Torus CD. And whatever else relates either to this or the upper Torus AB, is to be sought in the same Manner, as has been shewn in the Tuscan Base.

The Attick Base is used more often by painters than any other type because it works well with most styles. The points E and F, representing the widest part of the outer circle of the perspective plan, provide the maximum width of the lower Torus CD. Anything else related to this or the upper Torus AB should be examined in the same way as demonstrated with the Tuscan Base.


FIG. XXI.

FIG. 21.

Figura Vigesimaprima.

Optica imminutio capitelli Etrusci.

Optical reduction of the Etruscan capital.

Eâdem cum reliquis formâ, eâdemque methodo capitella delineanda sunt: quum habeant ipsa quoque suum cimatium quadratum, & sint rotunda. Linea plani solet in iis fieri altior lineâ horizontali: quia quum capitella imponenda sint columnis homine altioribus, plerumque apparent sublimiora nostris oculis.

The same method should be used for drawing the capitals as for the others: since they also have their own square shape and are round. The line of the plane is usually made higher than the horizontal line: because when the capitals are placed on columns that are taller than a person, they generally appear higher to our eyes.

The Twenty-first Figure.

The Tuscan Capital in Perspective.

Tuscan Capital Perspective.

The Manner before deliver’d concerning Bases, is of the same Use in delineating Capitals; forasmuch as these also have their square Abacus, and their round Members. The Ground-line in Capitals is usually plac’d above the Horizon; because when they are set upon Columns which exceed a Man’s Height, they are generally represented above the Eye.

The method mentioned earlier about Bases is equally useful for drawing Capitals, since they also have their square Abacus and their round parts. The ground line for Capitals is usually positioned above the horizon, because when they are placed on columns taller than a person, they are typically seen from above eye level.


Fig. xxii.

Fig. xxii.

Figura Vigesimasecunda.

Optica projectio capitelli Dorici.

Optical projection of Doric capital.

Capitellum hoc pluribus membris constat, adeóque operosius est quàm præcedens. Nihilominus accurata delineatio vestigii geometrici omnes difficultates complanabit.

The capitellum consists of several parts, making it more complex than the previous one. Nevertheless, a precise geometric drawing will flatten out all the difficulties.

Twenty-second Figure.

The Projection of a Dorick Capital, in Perspective.

The Projection of a Doric Capital, in Perspective.

This Capital consisting of more Members than the foregoing, will be more troublesom to put in Perspective; but an accurate Delineation of the Geometrical Plan will certainly remove many seeming Difficulties.

This Capital, made up of more Members than the previous one, will be more challenging to visualize; however, a precise outline of the Geometrical Plan will definitely clarify many apparent difficulties.


Fig. xxiii.

Fig. xxiii.

Figura Vigesimatertia.

Deformatio capitelli Ionici.

Ionic capital deformation.

Capitellum Ionicum poscit duas elevationes geometricas distinctas, alteram faciei, alteram lateris; ex iisque conflatur vestigium geometricum A, quod opticè contrahitur, translatis in B punctis latitudinis C, & in E punctis longitudinis D more consueto: ut ex punctis B latitudinis, lineæ tendant ad punctum oculi; ex punctis verò E longitudinis, lineæ tendant ad punctum distantiæ.

Capitellum Ionicum requires two distinct geometric elevations, one for the face and the other for the side; from these, a geometric trace A is formed, which is optically contracted by shifting to B points of latitude C, and to E points of longitude D in the usual manner: so that lines from B latitude points extend to the line of sight; and lines from E longitude points extend to the point of distance.

Ex vestigio capitelli opticè contracto eruenda est elevatio longitudinis ut in figura. Ex utrisque verò juxta morem fiet capitellum nitidum, acceptis latitudinibus ex vestigio, altitudinibus ex elevatione longitudinis. Hæc quoque dabit maximam latitudinem singularum volutarum.

From the immediate shape of the capital, the elevation of the length must be drawn as shown in the figure. Additionally, according to tradition, both sides will create a polished capital, taking the widths from the shape and the heights from the elevation of the length. This will also provide the maximum width for each of the scrolls.

Modum delineandi capitellum Ionicum, in quo helices volutarum obliquentur, dabimus infra figurâ trigesimâ.

We'll provide a way to design the Ionic capital, where the helixes of the volutes are inclined, below in figure thirty.

Twenty-third Figure.

The Ionick Capital in Perspective.

The Ionick Capital in Perspective.

The Ionick Capital requires two distinct geometrical Elevations, one of the Front, the other of the Side; from both which is found the geometrical Plan A, which is put in Perspective by transferring into B the Points of Breadth C, and into E the Points of Length D, after the usual Manner; that from the Points of Breadth B, Lines may be drawn towards the Point of Sight; and from the Points of Length E, towards the Point of Distance.

The Ionick Capital needs two separate geometric elevations, one for the front and one for the side. From both, you get the geometric plan A, which is visualized in perspective by moving the width points C into B and the length points D into E, as is typically done. This way, lines can be drawn from the width points B towards the vanishing point, and from the length points E towards the point of distance.

From the Plan of the Capital in Perspective, is to be drawn the Upright of the Length, as in the Figure; and from both, as usual, the finish’d Capital is wrought, by taking the Breadths from the Plan, and the Heights from the Elevation; this giving the utmost Height, and that the utmost Breadth of each of the Volutes.

From the Capital Plan in Perspective, the Upright Length is to be derived, as shown in the Figure; and from both, as is customary, the finished Capital is created by taking the Widths from the Plan and the Heights from the Elevation; this provides the maximum Height, and that gives the maximum Width of each of the Volutes.

The Manner of describing the Ionick Capital, whose Volutes lie obliquely, we shall hereafter treat of in the Thirtieth Figure.

The method of describing the Ionian Capital, whose volutes are positioned obliquely, will be discussed in the Thirtieth Figure.


FIG. XXIV.

FIG. 24.

Figura Vigesimaquarta.

Optica projectio capitelli Corinthii.

Corinthian capital optical projection.

Capitellum Corinthium absolvere non poteris, nisi elevatione geometrica ejusque vestigio exactissimè delineatis juxta regulas Barozzii.

You won't be able to finish the Corinthian capital unless you properly outline its geometric height and shape following Barozzi's guidelines.

Ad formandum ex vestigio B vestigium E, rectis occultis fient quadrata necessaria ad contractionem opticam quatuor vel trium saltem circulorum; translatis in lineam D divisionibus lineæ C, & aliis, more consueto. Contrahentur deinde lineis occultis vestigia foliorum, & absolventur cætera quæ posita sunt in vestigio E.

To create from the remains of B the trace of E, necessary optical squares will form from four or at least three hidden lines; by aligning the divisions on line D of line C, and others, in the usual manner. Next, the hidden lines will outline the traces of the leaves, and the rest will be completed as placed in the trace of E.

Ut fiat optica elevatio longitudinis F, in lineam perpendicularem H transferentur ex elevatione A omnes ejus divisiones. Complebitur autem per lineas rectas, quæ ex punctis divisionum ducantur ad punctum oculi, ac per rectas ex circulorum summitate ac profunditate, quæ rectæ sint parallelæ ad lineam D, ac perveniant ad visualem G; indeque descendant, ac sint parallelæ ad lineam perpendicularem H.

To create the visual elevation of length F, all its divisions will be transferred vertically from elevation A to a perpendicular line H. This will be completed by straight lines drawn from the division points to the eye point, and by lines from the tops and depths of the circles, which will be parallel to line D and reach the visual G; from there, they will descend and be parallel to the perpendicular line H.

Capitellum nitidum exordieris ab infimo circulo I, ostendente ambitum columnæ. Succedent folia 1, 2, quorum latitudines accipientur ex vestigio E per circinum, positâ unâ ejus cuspide in linea H; altitudines verò accipientur ex elevatione F, posita una cuspide circini in linea D. Idipsum dico tum de foliis 3, 3, 4, 4, tum de folio 5, ac de aliis, & demum de cymatio. Descensus verò lineæ curvæ ipsius cymatii incipiet ex acie L.

The shiny capital starts from the bottom circle I, showing the outline of the column. The successive leaves 1, 2, will have their widths taken from point E using a compass, with one point of the compass placed on line H; the heights will be taken from point F, with one point of the compass on line D. The same applies to leaves 3, 3, 4, 4, as well as leaf 5, and others, finally concerning the cymatium. The descent of the curve line of the cymatium will begin from point L.

Twenty-fourth Figure.

The Corinthian Capital in Perspective.

The Corinthian Capital in Perspective.

There is no Completing the Corinthian Capital, unless you most accurately describe its Geometrical Elevation and Plan, according to the Rules of Vignola.

There is no way to finish the Corinthian Capital unless you precisely outline its Geometrical Elevation and Plan, following the guidelines of Vignola.

Being to form the Plan E from the Plan B, you must, with occult Lines, make the Squares necessary for bringing four, or at least three of the Circles into Perspective; transferring into the Line D the Divisions of the Line C, and the rest as usual. Then, with other occult Lines, contract the Plans of the Leaves, and finish what’s farther requisite in the Plan E.

Being to create Plan E from Plan B, you need to use hidden lines to make the squares necessary for bringing four, or at least three, of the circles into perspective; transferring the divisions of Line C into Line D, and the rest as usual. Then, with additional hidden lines, adjust the plans of the leaves, and complete what’s further needed in Plan E.

To make the Optick Elevation of the Length F, you must transfer into the Perpendicular H all the Divisions of the Elevation A; and complete the same, by Lines drawn toward the Point of Sight, till they meet their respective Perpendiculars; which proceeding from all parts of the Circles parallel to the Line D, intersect the Visual G; from whence they descend, Parallels to the Perpendicular H.

To create the visual elevation of length F, you need to move all the divisions from elevation A into the perpendicular H. Then, you complete it by drawing lines towards the point of sight until they meet their respective perpendiculars. These lines, originating from all parts of the circles parallel to line D, intersect the visual G. From there, they drop down parallel to the perpendicular H.

In working the clean Capital, you should begin with the lowest Circle I, which denotes the Compass of the Column. Then make the Leaves 1, 2, by taking their Breadths from the Plan E, with the Compasses, and keeping one Point of them upon the Line H; and their Heights from the Elevation F, keeping one Point on the Line D. The same must be done, as well by the Leaves 3, 3, 4, 4, as by the Leaf 5, and the others; and last of all, by the Abacus also; the Sinking of the Horns whereof answers that of the visual Line L.

In working with the clean Capital, you should start with the lowest Circle I, which represents the Compass of the Column. Then create the Leaves 1, 2, by measuring their Widths from the Plan E using the Compasses, ensuring one Point is on the Line H; and their Heights from the Elevation F, keeping one Point on the Line D. The same process should be followed for Leaves 3, 3, 4, 4, as well as Leaf 5 and the others; and lastly, for the Abacus; the Indentation of the Horns corresponds to that of the visual Line L.


FIG. XXV.

FIG. XXV.

Figura Vigesimaquinta.

Optica descriptio capitelli Compositi.

Optical description of the Composite capital.

Ex iis quæ diximus de capitello Corinthio, didiceris modum faciendi capitellum Compositum. Velim autem tibi persuadeas, cum lectione harum regularum quæ sunt magistri inanimes, circini usum perpetuò conjungi oportere. Hic enim vivi magistri defectum unicè supplere potest.

From what we’ve discussed about the Corinthian capital, you will learn how to create a Composite capital. However, I want you to understand that when studying these rules set forth by the master, the use of a compass must always be combined. Only living masters can uniquely fill the void of knowledge.

The Twenty-fifth Figure.

The Composite Capital in Perspective.

The Composite Capital Today.

From what has been said of the Corinthian Capital, may be learnt the Manner of putting the Composite also into Perspective. I wish I could prevail with you, that to the Reading of the Rules, which in themselves are but lifeless Masters, you would constantly add a diligent Practice of the Figures by the Compasses; this being the only way to supply the Want of a living Master.

From what has been said about the Corinthian Capital, you can learn how to put the Composite into perspective as well. I wish I could persuade you to consistently combine your reading of the rules, which are basically just lifeless instructions, with dedicated practice using the compasses; this is the only way to make up for not having a live instructor.


Fig. xxvi.

Fig. xxvi.

Figura Vigesimasexta.

Deformatio coronicis Etruscæ.

Etruscan crown deformity.

Post capitella sequuntur coronices, quæ utpote quadratæ, minimam habent arduitatem. Inter coronices verò, nulla est Etruscâ simplicior ac facilior. Ex elevatione geometricâ, more solito, formatur vestigium geometricum; ex eoque opticè contracto eruitur similis elevatio longitudinis. Demùm ex elevatione & vestigio componitur coronix nitida. Memineris autem duas esse lineas, quæ hinc inde terminant latitudinem elevationis opticæ. Linea quæ altior est, dat altitudinem anterioris faciei coronicis, alia quæ est depressior, dat altitudinem faciei posterioris. Et ita erit in posterum.

After the capitals come the cornices, which, being square, have minimal height. Among the cornices, none is simpler or easier than the Etruscan style. From the geometric elevation, as usual, a geometric trace forms; from this, a similar elevation of length is derived optically. Finally, the shiny cornice is composed of elevation and trace. However, remember that there are two lines that define the width of the optical elevation. The higher line gives the height of the front face of the cornice, while the lower line gives the height of the back face. And it will be so in the future.

Twenty-sixth Figure.

The Tuscan Entablature in Perspective.

The Tuscan Entablature in Perspective.

After Capitals we proceed to Entablatures, which because they are square, are less difficult than the former. And of all Entablatures, that of the Tuscan Order is the most simple and easie to be put in execution. From the Geometrical Upright is drawn, as usual, the Geometrical Plan; from the Plan put in Perspective is describ’d the Optick Elevation of the Length; and from both the latter is wrought the clean Entablature requir’d. You may observe, here are two Lines that terminate the Breadth of the Perspective on one side and the other. The Line which proceeds from the higher Corner of the Visual, gives the Height of the most advanc’d Part; that from the lower determines the Height of the Back-part. And so for the future.

After Capitals, we move on to Entablatures, which are square and therefore easier to work with than the previous ones. Among all Entablatures, the one from the Tuscan Order is the simplest and easiest to execute. From the Geometrical Upright, we draw the Geometrical Plan; from the Plan in Perspective, we create the Optic Elevation of the Length; and from both of these, we develop the clean Entablature needed. You’ll notice that there are two Lines that define the Width of the Perspective on either side. The Line coming from the upper Corner of the Visual indicates the Height of the most prominent Part, while the one from the lower determines the Height of the Back part. This process continues similarly moving forward.


Fig. xxvii.

Fig. xxvii.

Figura Vigesimaseptima.

Optica delineatio coronicis Doricæ.

Optical design of Doric crowns.

In faciendâ coronice Doricâ, quæ majorem operam poscit, ob denticulos & triglyphos; communis regula servanda est. Si autem libeat coronicem nitidam describere in papyro separatâ ab ejus præparationibus, id profectò licet, tum in hoc, tum in quocunque alio schemate.

In making a Doric cornice, which requires more effort because of the little teeth and triglyphs, a common rule must be followed. However, if you would like to describe the clean cornice on paper separate from its preparations, that is certainly allowed, both in this and in any other design.

Twenty-seventh Figure.

The Dorick Entablature in Perspective.

The Dorick Entablature in Perspective.

In making the Dorick Entablature, which has something more Work in it than the former, on account of its Dentels and Triglyphs; the common Rule is to be observ’d. And if you would delineate the finish’d Entablature in a Paper distinct from that of its Preparations, you are at liberty so to do, either in this or any other Figure.

In creating the Dorick Entablature, which has more detail than the previous one due to its Dentils and Triglyphs, the standard rules should be followed. And if you want to draw the finished Entablature on a separate piece of paper from its preparations, you are free to do so, whether in this or any other illustration.


Fig. xxviii.

Fig. xxviii.

Figura Vigesimaoctava.

Præparatio figuræ sequentis.

Preparation of the following figure.

In figurâ vigesimaoctavâ, quæ continet vestigium & elevationes geometricas figuræ vigesimænonæ, oportuit latus C delineare seorsim à facie B; quia facies exhibet latitudinem ædificii, latus verò exhibet longitudinem; atque una non est alteri æqualis. In vestigio geometrico solidus paries est A: circuli referunt summum scapum columnarum. Cætera dant projecturas coronicis, cum suis mutulis.

In the twenty-eighth figure, which contains the outline and geometric elevations of the twenty-ninth figure, it was necessary to draw side C separately from face B; because the face shows the width of the building, while the side shows its length; and one is not equal to the other. In the geometric outline, the solid wall is A: the circles represent the upper part of the columns. The rest provide projections for the cornices, along with their multiples.

Twenty-eighth Figure,

Preparatory to the following Figure.

Before the following Figure.

In this Twenty-eighth Figure, which contains the Plan and Geometrical Elevations of the Twenty-ninth Figure, it was requisite to delineate the Side C separately from the Front B; because the Front, which signifies the Breadth of the Building, and the Side, which shews its Length, are not equal one to the other. In the Geometrical Plan the solid Wall is A: the Circles express the Nakeds of the Pillars Shafts at top. The rest is the Projecture of the Cornice, with its Mutules.

In this twenty-eighth figure, which includes the plan and geometric elevations of the twenty-ninth figure, it was necessary to show the side C separately from the front B; because the front, indicating the width of the building, and the side, showing its length, are not equal to each other. In the geometric plan, the solid wall is A: the circles represent the tops of the pillar shafts. The remaining part is the projection of the cornice, along with its mutules.


FIG. XXIX.

FIG. 29.

Figura Vigesimanona.

Optica projectio ædificii Dorici.

Optical projection of a Doric building.

Habes in hac figura vigesimanona, opticam delineationem vestigii, & unius ex elevationibus figuræ vigesimæoctavæ; nimirum, elevationis longitudinis; ex quibus eruitur imago nitida ædificii Ordinis Dorici, cum summitatibus & capitellis trium columnarum; ejusque epistylium, zophorus, & corona.

You’ve got in this figure twenty-nine, an optical representation of the footprint, & one of the elevations of figure twenty-eight; namely, the elevation of the length; from which is derived a clear image of the Doric Order building, with the tops & capitals of three columns; and its architrave, frieze, & cornice.

BO est linea horizontis; AC est linea plani; in quam, ex lineis D & C figuræ vigesimæoctavæ, transferuntur puncta latitudinis & longitudinis duarum elevationum; prolongando versus C ipsam lineam plani, ut oportet. Operaberis autem, ut diximus figurâ vigesimatertia; nimirum, in puncto V desinet latitudo vestigii, incipiet longitudo; & ex punctis latitudinis lineæ tendent ad punctum oculi; ex punctis longitudinis lineæ occultæ tendent ad punctum distantiæ. Ubi verò hæ lineæ secant visualem VO, fient parallelæ ad lineam AC, cum cæteris quæ necessaria sunt ad complendam delineationem opticam vestigii.

BO is the horizontal line; AC is the plane line; on which, from the lines D & C of the twenty-eighth figure, the points of latitude & longitude of the two elevations are transferred; extending towards C the plane line as required. However, you will work, as we mentioned, with the thirty-second figure; specifically, at point V, the width of the trail will end, and the length will begin; and from the points of latitude, the line will extend to the eye point; from the points of longitude, the hidden line will extend to the distance point. Where these lines cut the visual VO, they will become parallel to the line AC, along with the other necessary elements to complete the optical representation of the trail.

Elevatio C figuræ vigesimæoctavæ opticè contrahetur more consueto, translatis in lineam AB divisionibus lineæ E vel F, ex quibus fient visuales ad punctum oculi; ac demissis ex linea visuali AO perpendicularibus ad lineam AC, ita ut lineæ parallelæ ad lineam plani AC continuentur cum aliis lineis parallelis ad lineam AB.

The elevation of the 28th figure will be visually contracted as usual, by aligning the divisions of line E or F along line AB, from which visual lines will be created to the point of view; and dropping perpendiculars from the visual line AO to the line AC, so that lines parallel to the plane line AC continue with other lines parallel to line AB.

Hic quoque locum habet observatio illa, cujus meminimus figura vigesimasexta, de lineis quæ deorsum excurrunt, & hinc inde terminant membra elevationis opticæ. Ex iis autem desumuntur projecturæ omnes coronicis & capitellorum.

This also includes the observation we mentioned earlier, shown in figure 26, about the lines that extend downward and terminate on either side of the optical elevation. From these, all projections of the crowns and capitals are derived.

Twenty-ninth Figure.

A Projection of the Dorick Order in Perspective.

A Projection of the Dorick Order in Perspective.

In this Twenty-ninth Figure, you have in Perspective the Plan, and one of the Uprights of the Twenty-eighth Figure; namely, that of the Length; from whence is drawn this finish’d Piece of the Dorick Order, which has the upper Part and Caps of three Pillars, with their Architrave, Freeze, and Cornice.

In this Twenty-ninth Figure, you see the Perspective Plan and one of the Uprights from the Twenty-eighth Figure; specifically, the Length; from which this finished piece of the Dorick Order is drawn, featuring the upper part and caps of three pillars, along with their architrave, frieze, and cornice.

BO is the Horizontal-line; AC that of the Plan; into which, from the Lines D and C of the Twenty-eighth Figure, are transferr’d the Points of Breadth and Length of the two Elevations; first prolonging the Line itself, as much as is needful, through C. The Work is then perform’d, as was shewn in the Twenty-third Figure; namely, the Divisions of the Breadth of the Plan end in the Point V, at which those of Length begin. From the first, Lines are drawn to the Point of Sight; and from the latter, occult Lines are directed to the Point of Distance: And where these cut the Visual VO, Lines are drawn parallel to AC; with those that are farther necessary for completing the Plan in Perspective.

BO is the horizontal line; AC represents the plan. From the lines D and C of the twenty-eighth figure, the points for width and length of the two elevations are transferred, first extending the line itself through C as much as needed. The work is then done as shown in the twenty-third figure; specifically, the divisions of the width of the plan end at point V, where the divisions of length begin. From the first, lines are drawn to the point of sight, and from the latter, hidden lines are directed to the point of distance. Where these intersect the visual VO, lines are drawn parallel to AC, along with any other necessary lines to complete the plan in perspective.

The Elevation C of the Twenty-eighth Figure is put in Perspective, as usual, by transferring the Divisions of the Line E, or F, into that of AB in this Plate; from whence drawing Visuals to the Point of Sight, they are intersected by Perpendiculars let fall from those Divisions of AO made by the Parallels to the Ground-line AC, and again continu’d parallel to the Perpendicular AB.

The Elevation C of the Twenty-eighth Figure is shown in perspective, as usual, by mapping the divisions of Line E or F onto Line AB in this Plate; from there, we draw lines of sight to the Point of Sight, which are crossed by perpendiculars dropped from those divisions of AO created by parallels to the ground line AC, and then continued parallel to the perpendicular AB.

The Observation, mention’d in the Twenty-sixth Figure, is also pertinent in this place; That the Lines, which, in the Perspective-Elevation, tend downward, give the Advance and Recess of the several Members of the Work; and from them are taken all the Projectures of the Entablature and Capitals.

The observation mentioned in the Twenty-sixth Figure is relevant here too. The lines that slope downward in the perspective elevation indicate the advancement and recess of the different parts of the work, and all the projections of the entablature and capitals are derived from them.


Fig. xxx.

Fig. xxx.

FIGURA Trigesima.

Optica projectio ædificii Ionici; ubi de modo jungendi fictum cum vero.

Optical projection of the Ionic building; where it discusses how to connect the artificial with the real.

Si tibi Pictor quum sis, occasione apparatûs quadraginta horarum, vel sepulcri Domini, mutare ad tempus libeat formam architecturæ alicujus Ecclesiæ jungendo fictum cum vero, ut mihi sæpius contigit Mediolani ac Romæ, cum ingenti spectatorum delectatione & admiratione; paucis ostendam tibi modum quem servare debeas in operando.

If you are a painter and have the opportunity of a 40-hour setup, or for the burial of the Lord, if you feel like changing the architecture of a church temporarily by blending fiction with reality, as I have often done in Milan and Rome with great delight and admiration from the audience; I will show you briefly the method you should follow while working.

Sectio coronicis veræ, quæ, ut suppono, videri debet continua esse cum coronice picta in telario, est A; elevatio geometrica coronicis, & reliquorum quæ delineanda sunt, est B; vestigium geometricum est C. Porrò, tum vestigium tum elevatio longitudinis opticè contrahentur more consueto, ut vides in C & B: ex iisque formabitur in telario coronix nitida cum columna & anta; ipsumque telarium depictum, normaliter coagmentandum erit veræ coronici.

The section of the true crown, which, as I assume, should appear to be continuous with the painted crown on the tapestry, is A; the geometric elevation of the crown, and the others to be drawn, is B; the geometric outline is C. Furthermore, both the outline and the elevation will typically be contracted in length, as you see in C & B: from these, a polished crown will be formed on the tapestry along with a column & anta; and the tapestry itself will be painted, normally to be joined to the true crown.

Ut fiat ea pars longitudinis, quæ coronicem pictam continuare videatur cum vera, & erui non potest ex elevatione deformata; oportet sectionem A transferre in D, ducendo visuales ex punctis terminativis membrorum sectionis D, usque dum occurrant lineis latitudinis eorundem membrorum. Quod si colores in telarium scitè inducantur, angulus in E, quamvis merè depictus, videbitur verus; & ex adverso, anguli quos telarium ipsum depictum facit cum diversis adeò crepidinibus coronicis veræ, nusquam apparebunt, præterquàm in quadra simæ dumtaxat; & unio architecturæ veræ cum ficta dignosci non poterit.

To make it a part of the length that seems to continue the painted crown with reality, and cannot be extracted from a distorted elevation; you need to transfer section A to D, drawing visuals from the endpoint of the members of section D, until they meet the width lines of the same members. If colors are skillfully introduced into the fabric, the angle at E, although merely depicted, will appear real; and conversely, the angles created by the fabric itself with various crown edges will not be visible anywhere except in the flat plane; and the union of true architecture with the fictitious will not be discernible.

The Thirtieth Figure.

An Ionick Work in Perspective; with the Manner of reconciling the fictitious to the solid Architecture.

A Ionick Work in Perspective; showing how to blend the imaginary with real architecture.

If, being a Painter, you were requir’d, against the Solemnity of the Holy-Week, to alter for a while the Architecture of some Altar-piece, by joining Painting to the real Work; as I have often done, both at Rome and Milan, to the great Satisfaction and Surprize of the Beholders: I shall briefly shew the Method to be observ’d in performing the same.

If, as a Painter, you were asked to temporarily modify the structure of an altar piece during Holy Week by combining painting with the actual work, like I have often done in Rome and Milan, much to the satisfaction and surprise of the viewers: I will briefly explain the method to be followed in doing so.

The Dissection of the solid Cornice, which I here suppose shall appear continu’d in that painted on the Canvass, is A; the Geometrical Elevation of the Cornice, and other Parts to be drawn, is B; the Geometrical Plan is C. The Plan and Elevation of the Length are put in Perspective after the usual manner, in C and B; from those the finish’d Cornice, with the Pillar and Pilaster, are delineated on the Canvass; and the Picture is then conjoin’d, at right Angles, to the true Cornice.

The dissection of the solid cornice, which I assume will also be shown in the painting on the canvas, is A; the geometrical elevation of the cornice and other parts to be drawn is B; the geometrical plan is C. The plan and elevation of the length are represented in perspective as usual in C and B; from these, the finished cornice, along with the pillar and pilaster, are drawn on the canvas; and then the picture is joined at right angles to the actual cornice.

For adjusting the Members so, that the painted Cornice may seem to be the real one continu’d, (which can’t be done by the Perspective Upright) you must transfer the Section A to D; and from the terminating Points of the several Members thereof, draw visual Lines, till they meet those of their respective Members in the Perspective. And if the Colours are laid by a skilful Hand, the Angle at E, tho’ painted only, will appear as real; and on the contrary, the Angles which the Members of the painted Cornice make with the different Projectures of those of the true, will never be discern’d, unless in the very uppermost Fillet; but the Conjunction of the real with the painted Architecture, will be altogether imperceptible.

To adjust the Members so that the painted Cornice looks like it's a seamless continuation of the real one (which can’t be achieved through the Perspective Upright), you need to transfer Section A to D. From the ending Points of the various Members in that section, draw visual Lines until they intersect with those of their corresponding Members in the Perspective. If the Colors are applied by a skilled Artist, the Angle at E, although just painted, will appear to be real. Conversely, the Angles formed between the painted Cornice Members and the different Projections of the actual ones won’t be noticeable, except at the very top Fillet; however, the connection between the real and the painted Architecture will be completely undetectable.


Fig. xxxi.

Fig. xxxi.

Figura Trigesimaprima.

Optica projectio coronicis Corinthiæ, cum capitello & summitate columnæ.

Optical projection of the Corinthian crown, with the capital and top of the column.

In hoc schemate linea plani est CIE, horizontis est DFO; punctum oculi est O, distantiæ est D. Elevatio geometrica capitelli Corinthii cum sua coronice est A, quorum divisiones cernuntur in perpendiculari CD. Vestigium geometricum B habet longitudinem æqualem latitudini: opticè autem contrahitur methodo consueta. Nimirum, translatis divisionibus latitudinis & longitudinis in lineam plani CIE; ex punctis latitudinis fiunt visuales ad punctum oculi; ex punctis verò longitudinis fiunt occultæ ad punctum distantiæ: hoc modo habes quicquid necessarium est ad contractionem opticam vestigii. Nam lineæ longitudinum sunt partes visualium, ut patet in GN, HL: lineæ latitudinum, parallelæ ad lineam plani fiunt ex punctis in quibus lineæ tendentes ad punctum distantiæ secant visualem HO, ut vides in NL. Porro, si tantundem prolongaretur horizontalis DO, ita ut haberet duo puncta distantiæ remota æqualiter ab O, medietas diagonalium, quæ sunt in quadrato majori GNLH opticè deformato, & in quadratis ejus minoribus, tendent ad unum punctum distantiæ; altera medietas ad aliud punctum distantiæ.

In this diagram, the plane line is CIE, and the horizontal is DFO; the eye point is O, and the distance is D. The geometric height of the Corinthian capital with its crown is A, whose divisions are visible on the perpendicular CD. The geometric trace B has a length equal to its width: however, it appears reduced through the usual method. Indeed, by shifting the divisions of width & length onto the plane line CIE; the points of width create visual lines to the eye point; while the points of length create concealed lines to the distance point: this way, you have everything necessary for the optical contraction of the trace. For the lines of lengths are parts of the visuals, as seen in GN, HL: the lines of widths, parallel to the plane line, are created from points where the lines aiming at the distance point intersect the visual line HO, as you see in NL. Furthermore, if the horizontal line DO were extended so that it had two distance points equally spaced from O, the midpoints of the diagonals, which are in the larger square GNLH optically distorted, & in its smaller squares, would converge at one distance point; the other midpoint would lead to another distance point.

Elevatio longitudinis opticè contrahitur ductis parallelis ad CE, quæ ubi pervenerint ad visualem IO, continuentur cum aliis parallelis ad IK. Præterea, translatis in lineam IK divisionibus lineæ perpendicularis CD, ex punctis divisionum fiunt visuales ad punctum oculi, ac ducuntur singula membra ipsius elevationis, cujus latitudines sunt partes visualium, altitudines verò sunt partes linearum parallelarum ad IK. Demùm ex vestigio & ex elevatione longitudinis, formatur coronix nitida cum capitello. Ut autem faciliùs delineentur mutuli, primùm fient quadratâ formâ, ut in M; deinde congruus flexus in singulos inducetur.

The elevation of length is visually narrowed by parallel lines to CE, which, when they reach the visual IO, continue with other parallels to IK. Furthermore, by transferring the divisions of the perpendicular line CD to the line IK, visual points are created from the division points to the eye, and each segment of the elevation is drawn, where the widths are parts of the visuals, and the heights are parts of the parallel lines to IK. Finally, from the outline and from the elevation of length, a shiny crown with a capital is formed. To make the modules easier to outline, they will first take on a square shape, as in M; then a suitable curve will be introduced to each.

The Thirty-first Figure.

The Optick Projection of a Corinthian Cornice, with the Capital and PART of the Column.

The visual depiction of a Corinthian cornice, including the capital and part of the column.

In this Figure the Line of the Plan is CIE, that of the Horizon is DFO; the Point of Sight is O, the Point of Distance D; the Geometrical Elevation of the Corinthian Capital, with its Entablature, is A; whose Divisions are seen in the Perpendicular CD. The Length and Breadth of the Geometrical Plan B are equal, and the Plan is put into Perspective after the usual Method; to wit, by transferring the Divisions of Breadth and Length into the Line CIE; from the Points of Breadth drawing Visuals to the Point of Sight; and from those of Length occult Lines to the Point of Distance: by which Intersections you have all that’s necessary for putting the Plan into Perspective. For the Lines of Length are Parts of visual Rays, as is manifest by GN, HL; and the Lines of Breadth are made Parallels to the Ground-line, from the Intersections before-mention’d, as is seen in NL. Moreover, if the Horizontal-line DO were so prolong’d, as to receive another Point of Distance equidistant from O; half the diagonal Lines of the great Square GNLH, and of the lesser Squares contain’d therein, would tend to one Point of Distance, and the other half to the other.

In this figure, the line of the plan is CIE, the horizon line is DFO; the point of sight is O, and the point of distance is D. The geometrical height of the Corinthian capital with its entablature is A, and its divisions are visible in the perpendicular CD. The length and width of the geometrical plan B are equal, and the plan is presented in perspective using the usual method; specifically, by transferring the divisions of width and length into the line CIE; from the width points, drawing visual lines to the point of sight; and from the length points, drawing hidden lines to the point of distance: through these intersections, you have everything necessary to put the plan into perspective. The length lines are parts of visual rays, as shown by GN, HL; and the width lines are made parallel to the ground line, from the previously mentioned intersections, as seen in NL. Furthermore, if the horizontal line DO were extended to include another point of distance at an equal distance from O, half the diagonal lines of the large square GNLH, and the smaller squares contained within it, would converge at one point of distance, while the other half would converge at the other.

The Elevation of the Length is put in Perspective, by continuing the Parallels to CE, till they cut the Visual IO; and from thence dropping Lines parallel to IK: Then transferring into IK the Divisions of the Perpendicular CD, from them make visual Lines to the Point of Sight, and draw the several Members of the Upright; whose Breadths are Parts of Visuals, and their Heights Parts of Perpendiculars, or Lines parallel to IK. Lastly, from the Plan and Elevation of the Length, you delineate the finish’d Cornice and Capital: But that you may more easily draw the Modillions, first make them in a square Form, as in M; and that will very much assist you to give the Scroll of each a more agreeable Turn.

The elevation of the length is shown in perspective by extending the parallels to CE until they intersect the visual IO; then, from there, drop lines parallel to IK. Next, transfer the divisions of the perpendicular CD into IK, and from those, create visual lines to the point of sight, drawing the various parts of the upright. The widths are sections of the visuals, and their heights are sections of the perpendiculars or lines parallel to IK. Finally, from the plan and elevation of the length, you can sketch the finished cornice and capital. To make it easier to draw the modillions, first shape them into a square form, as shown in M, which will help you give each scroll a more pleasing curve.


FIG. XXXII.

FIG. XXXII.

Figura Trigesimasecunda.

Delineatio geometrica coronicis, Ordinis Compositi.

Geometric outline of the crown, Composite Order.

Ut hoc schema grandius ac distinctius esset, ejus medietatem dumtaxat suscepi delineandam. PN est vestigium geometricum. M est solidus paries. OO spatia columnarum. In H sunt crepidines coronicis. Elevatio geometrica latitudinis ædificii constat epistylio T, zophoro L, & coronâ V, supra quam eminet fastigium S.

To make this design larger and clearer, I’ve taken on just the middle part to outline. PN is a geometric trace. M is a solid wall. OO are the spaces for the columns. In H are the bases of the crowns. The geometric elevation of the building's width consists of the epistyle T, the frieze L, and the cornice V, above which rises the pinnacle S.

Jam ut inveniatur centrum arcuum, distantiæ AV fiat æqualis distantia AC. Positaque una cuspide circini in C, alia extendatur usque ad V: ita fient arcus, quorum ultimus est BD, omnesque sunt concentrici. Elevatio F ostendit longitudinem ædificii ex parte GI; elevatio E ostendit longitudinem ipsius ex parte DR.

Let a center of arcs be found, where the distance AV is equal to the distance AC. Place one end of a compass at C, and extend the other to V: thus, arcs will be created, the last of which is BD, and all are concentric. Elevation F shows the length of the building from the side GI; elevation E shows its length from the side DR.

Thirty-second Figure.

The Geometrical Design of a Cornice, of the Composite Order.

The Geometrical Design of a Cornice, of the Composite Order.

That this Figure might be larger and more distinct, I have here describ’d only the Half of it. PN is the Geometrical Plan. M is the solid Wall. OO are the Places of the Columns. H shews the Projectures of the Cornice. The Geometrical Elevation of the Breadth of the Frontispiece, consists of the Architrave T, the Freeze L, and the Cornice V, over which is rais’d the Pedament S.

To make this figure clearer and more visible, I've only described half of it. PN is the geometrical layout. M is the solid wall. OO shows the locations of the columns. H indicates the extensions of the cornice. The geometrical elevation of the width of the front piece includes the architrave T, the frieze L, and the cornice V, topped by the pediment S.

For finding the Center of the arch’d Lines of the Pedament, make the Distance AC equal to that of AV; and placing one Point of the Compasses in C, extend the other to V, and describe the Arch. The other Arches, of which BD is the utmost, have all the same Center. The Elevation F shews the Length of the Work on the Side GI. The Upright E shews the Length of the same on the Front DR.

For finding the center of the curved lines of the pediment, make the distance AC equal to the distance AV; then, place one point of the compass at C and extend the other to V to draw the arc. The other arcs, with BD being the outermost, all share the same center. The elevation F shows the length of the work on the side GI. The upright E shows the length of the same on the front DR.


FIG. XXXIII.

FIG. XXXIII.

Figura Trigesimatertia.

Deformatio coronicis Compositæ.

Deformation of the Composite Crown.

Figura hæc trigesimatertia minus ardua tibi videbitur, si ex ea delineandam primùm suscipias medietatem quæ respondet vestigio PN & elevationi BR figuræ trigesimæsecundæ; rejecto in ultimum fastigio, postquàm cætera compleveris. Linea BV est horizontalis. Punctum oculi est V, punctum distantiæ remotum est ab V spatio BV, additis modulis quatuordecim cum dimidio. Linea plani est AR, in quam ex Q versus A transfertur latitudo P; ex Q versus R transfertur longitudo N, cum omnibus earum divisionibus; ut ex punctis latitudinis fiant visuales ad punctum oculi; & ex punctis longitudinis fiant occultæ ad punctum distantiæ. Ex his habes quicquid necessarium est ad projectionem opticam vestigii, ut ostendimus figurâ trigesimaprimâ. Eademque methodo, quam ibi servavimus, contrahes elevationem P longitudinis coronicis: ac tum ex illa, tum ex vestigio, eruetur coronix nitida more consueto.

This figure will seem less difficult for you if you first sketch the half that corresponds to the trace PN and the elevation BR of the thirty-second figure; excluding the top part, after you have completed the rest. The line BV is horizontal. The point of sight is V, and the point of distant sight is from V through the space BV, adding fourteen and a half modules. The plane line is AR, where the width P is transferred from Q towards A; from Q towards R is transferred the length N, with all its divisions; so that the width points become visual to the point of sight; and the length points become hidden to the point of distance. From this, you have everything necessary for the optical projection of the trace, as we showed in the thirty-first figure. By the same method we used there, you will derive the elevation P of the crown's length: and from that, as well as from the trace, the shining crown will be produced as usual.

Ut delineetur fastigium, transferendæ sunt in lineam AB divisiones ipsius ex elevatione F figuræ trigesimæsecundæ, ac ducendæ visuales ad punctum oculi, additis lineis terminativis uniuscujusque membri, quæ accipientur ex vestigio Q opticè deformato. Centrum O arcuum fastigii nitidi, remotum est à summitate coronicis, medietate distantiæ, quam habent ungues quadræ cui fastigium ipsum incumbit. Ac proinde, si accipias ex elevatione P diversas altitudines membrorum fastigii; latitudines verò accipias ex vestigio Q; opus tuum feliciter absolves.

To outline the peak, the divisions from the elevation of the thirty-second figure must be aligned with line AB and visual lines should be drawn to the viewpoint, including boundary lines for each section, which will be taken from the distorted optical trace at Q. The center O of the clear peak arcs is located halfway between the top of the crown and the distance from the square nails that support the peak itself. Therefore, if you derive various heights of the peak's members from elevation P, and take the widths from the trace at Q, you will successfully complete your work.

The Thirty-third Figure.

A Composite Cornice in Perspective.

A Composite Cornice in Perspective.

This Thirty-third Figure will be found the less difficult, if you first attempt that Half which answers to PN in the Plan, and BR in the Upright of the Thirty-second Figure; leaving the Pedament, till all the rest be finish’d. The Line BV is the Horizontal. V is the Point of Sight; the Point of Distance is fourteen Modules and a half without the Point B, more than the Interval BV. The Line of the Plan is AR, in which from Q toward A you have the Divisions of Breadth of the foregoing Plan P; and from Q to R those of the Length thereof N: From the former, Visuals are drawn to the Point of Sight; and from the latter, occult Lines to the Point of Distance. And from these you have all that’s necessary for putting the Plan in Perspective; as was shewn in the Thirty-first Figure. By the Method there observ’d, you may also describe the Perspective-Elevation of the Length P; and from this, and the Plan, delineate the finish’d Cornice after the usual Manner.

This Thirty-third Figure will be easier to understand if you first focus on the Half that corresponds to PN in the Plan, and BR in the Upright of the Thirty-second Figure; save the Pediment for last after everything else is completed. The Line BV is the Horizontal. V is the Point of Sight; the Point of Distance is fourteen and a half Modules beyond Point B, which is more than the Interval BV. The Line of the Plan is AR, where from Q towards A you have the Divisions of Width from the previous Plan P; and from Q to R are the Length divisions N: From the first, Visuals are drawn to the Point of Sight; and from the second, hidden Lines to the Point of Distance. From these, you have everything needed to create the Plan in Perspective, as demonstrated in the Thirty-first Figure. Using the method shown, you can also draw the Perspective-Elevation of the Length P; and from this, along with the Plan, you can create the finished Cornice in the usual way.

For making the Pedament, the Divisions of the Elevation F in the Thirty-second Figure, must be transferr’d into the Line AB, and Visuals drawn from them to the Point of Sight; giving to each Member its proper Out-line and Contour, as may be taken from the Perspective-Plan Q. The Center O of the Arches in the finish’d Pedament, is plac’d below the upper Member of the Cornice, as much as half the Extent of the upper Fillet from whence the Pedament springs. And by taking the several Heights of the Members thereof, from the Elevation P; and the Breadths from the Plan Q; you will successfully finish and complete your Work.

To create the Pediment, transfer the divisions of Elevation F from the thirty-second figure to line AB, and draw visuals from those points to the Point of Sight. This will give each section its proper outline and contour, which can be referenced from the Perspective Plan Q. The center O of the arches in the finished Pediment is placed below the upper member of the cornice, as far down as half the height of the upper fillet from which the Pediment originates. By measuring the various heights of the sections from Elevation P and the widths from Plan Q, you will successfully finish your work.


Fig. xxxiv.

Fig. xxxiv.

Figura Trigesimaquarta.

Præparatio ad figuram trigesimamquintam.

Preparation for figure thirty-five.

Si placuerit conferre figuram trigesimamtertiam cum præsenti figura trigesimaquarta, dignosces vestigium & elevationem coronicis Compositæ alio modo hic deformari, mutando scilicet longitudinem in latitudinem, & latitudinem in longitudinem. Propterea hæc figura tantum spatii occupat, ut eam seorsim à coronice nitida delineare oportuerit.

If you want to compare the thirty-third shape with the current thirty-fourth figure, you'll notice how the trace and height of the Composite crown change here, specifically by swapping the length for the width and the width for the length. Therefore, this shape only occupies as much space as to require it to be outlined separately from the shiny crown.

Divisiones latitudinis in vestigio incipiunt ex V versus R, & sunt eædem cum divisionibus rectæ IG figuræ trigesimæsecundæ. Divisiones longitudinis incipiunt ex V versus S, & sunt eædem cum divisionibus rectæ IP duplicatis. Ex divisionibus latitudinis fiunt visuales ad punctum oculi; ex divisionibus longitudinis fiunt rectæ ad punctum distantiæ; cum reliquis quæ necessaria sunt ad complendum vestigium AVDC.

Latitude divisions start from V towards R, and they are the same as those of the rectangular IG of the thirty-second figure. Longitude divisions start from V towards S, and they are the same as the divisions of the rectangular IP multiplied by two. Latitude divisions create visuals to the point of sight; longitude divisions create lines to the point of distance; along with the other elements necessary to complete the trace AVDC.

Elevatio longitudinis coronicis & fastigii, opticè contrahitur per lineas parallelas ad lineam plani AS; quæ ubi pervenerint ad visualem AC, continuentur cum aliis parallelis ad perpendiculum P, ut diximus figurâ trigesimaprimâ. In idem perpendiculum P transferuntur ex figurâ trigesimasecundâ divisiones rectæ DR; & insuper altitudines, quas puncta KXZ habent supra rectam VA; fientque visuales ad punctum oculi: sectiones autem visualium cum parallelis ad perpendiculum P, dabunt sex puncta simæ fastigii, respondentia punctis KXZ duplicatis, figuræ trigesimæsecundæ; earumque ductu formandus est supremus arcus. Eodem artificio fient reliqui omnes.

The elevation of the length of the coronic and the peak is visually reduced along parallel lines to the plane line AS; when they reach the visual AC, they continue with other parallels to the perpendicular P, as we outlined in figure thirty-one. From figure thirty-two, the straight divisions DR are transferred to the same perpendicular P; along with the heights that the points KXZ have above the line VA; these will create visuals at the eye point: the sections of the visuals with the parallels to the perpendicular P will provide six points of the peak, corresponding to the duplicated points KXZ in figure thirty-two; and a supreme arch is to be formed from their guidance. The same technique will produce all the others.

Faciliùs delineabitur coronix, cujus maximam partem occupant lineæ visuales ad punctum oculi: porrò, membra omnia, exceptâ simâ, communia sunt coronæ & fastigio. Adeoque puncta similia in lineis terminativis membrorum singulorum, ex quibus desumuntur crepidines & ungues figuræ nitidæ, sunt parallela ad perpendiculum P.

The crown will be easier to outline, as the visual lines mostly occupy the point of the eye: furthermore, all the parts, except for the summit, are common to the crown and the apex. Thus, similar points on the end lines of each part, from which the bases and claws of the shining figure are derived, are parallel to the vertical P.

The Thirty-fourth Figure,

Preparatory to the Thirty-fifth.

Preparing for the Thirty-fifth.

If you please to compare the Thirty-third Figure with this Thirty-fourth Figure, you will perceive the Plan and Elevation of this Composite Cornice to be delineated differently from that; to wit, by making the Length of that the Breadth of this, and the Breadth of that the Length of this: On which account, this Figure takes up so much Room, that there was a necessity of drawing the finish’d Cornice on a separate Paper.

If you compare the Thirty-third Figure with this Thirty-fourth Figure, you'll see that the Plan and Elevation of this Composite Cornice are shown differently. Specifically, the Length of that one is the Breadth of this one, and the Breadth of that one is the Length of this one. Because of this, this Figure takes up so much space that we had to draw the finished Cornice on a separate sheet of paper.

The Divisions of Breadth in the Plan begin from V toward R; and are the same with those of the Line IG in the Thirty-second Figure. The Divisions of Length are set from V toward S; and are the same with those of the Line IP in the Thirty-second Figure; which being the Half, is here doubl’d. From the Divisions of Breadth, Lines are drawn to the Point of Sight; and from those of the Length, Lines to the Point of Distance; with the farther Requisites for completing the Plan AVDC in Perspective.

The divisions of width in the plan start from V to R and are the same as those of the line IG in the thirty-second figure. The divisions of length are set from V to S and match those of the line IP in the thirty-second figure, which is halved and then doubled here. Lines are drawn from the divisions of width to the point of sight, and from the divisions of length to the point of distance, along with the additional requirements for completing the plan AVDC in perspective.

The Upright of the Length of the Cornice and Pedament, is made by producing Parallels to the Ground-line AS; till they intersect the Visual AC; and thence continuing Lines parallel to the Perpendicular P, as was directed in the Thirty-first Figure. Into the same Perpendicular P are transferr’d the Divisions of the Line DR in the Thirty-second Figure; and also the Heights which the Points KXZ have above VA in the same Figure. From all which, Visuals are drawn to the Point of Sight; which being intersected by the Perpendiculars, give six Points on the Cima of the Pedament, which answer to the said Points KXZ of the Thirty-second Figure, doubl’d: By these the outward Arch is form’d. And by the same Rule, you find Points for all the others.

The Upright of the Length of the Cornice and Pediment is created by drawing parallels to the Ground-line AS until they meet the Visual AC; then continuing lines parallel to the Perpendicular P, as directed in the Thirty-first Figure. The divisions of the line DR from the Thirty-second Figure are transferred into the same Perpendicular P; as well as the heights that the points KXZ are above VA in the same Figure. From all this, visuals are drawn to the Point of Sight; when these intersect the Perpendiculars, they create six Points on the Cima of the Pediment, corresponding to the points KXZ of the Thirty-second Figure, doubled. This is how the outer arch is formed. Using the same method, you can find points for all the others.

You will more easily draw the Cornice, the greatest Part of it consisting of visual Lines to the Point of Sight: Moreover, all the Members, except the upper Cima, are common both to the Cornice of the Entablature, and to the Pedament; so that the corresponding Points, in the Out-lines of their several Members, from whence the Breaks and Contours of the finish’d Piece are taken, are found in the same Parallels to the Perpendicular P.

You will find it easier to draw the Cornice, as most of it is made up of visual lines leading to the point of sight. Additionally, all the parts, except for the upper Cima, are common to both the Cornice of the Entablature and the Pediment. Therefore, the matching points in the outlines of their various parts, from which the breaks and contours of the finished piece are derived, are located along the same parallels to the vertical P.


FIG. XXXV.

FIG. XXXV.

Figura Trigesimaquinta.

Deformatio coronicis Compositæ, ad latus inspectæ.

Deformatio coronicis Compositæ, ad latus inspectæ.

Artificium nitidæ coronicis, ex vestigio & elevatione figuræ trigesimæquartæ eruendæ, non differt ab eo quod sæpè traditum est. Itaque supposito, quòd linea plani & horizontis, ac puncta oculi ac distantiæ, habeant in hoc schemate situm omnino eundem, quem habent in præcedenti; ope duorum circinorum, invenientur distantiæ, quas anguli necessarii ad integram delineationem coronicis, habent à linea plani, & à linea normali ad ipsam lineam plani. Nam ducendo lineas visuales, aliasque lineas parallelas ad ipsum perpendiculum, cum terminis & flexibus qui conveniunt singulis membris, complebitur delineatio.

The process of creating a smooth crown, based on the shape and elevation of the 34th figure, isn’t different from what has often been taught. Therefore, assuming that the horizontal plane line, eye points, and distances are positioned the same way in this diagram as they are in the previous one; using two compasses, the distances that necessary angles for the complete drawing of the crown have from the plane line and from the line normal to the plane line will be found. By drawing visual lines and other lines parallel to the perpendicular, along with the ends and bends that correspond to each section, the drawing will be completed.

In fastigio visuales sunt penitus occultæ: puncta autem similia H & L, ex quibus fastigium incipit introrsum flecti, incidunt in unam eandemque visualem. Idipsum dico de aliis punctis similibus. Nam lineæ rectæ omnes, quæ in figura trigesimatertia sunt parallelæ ad lineam plani, in figuris trigesimaquarta & trigesimaquinta sunt partes linearum visualium.

In the peaks, the visuals are completely hidden: however, similar points like H and L, from which the peak begins to curve inward, fall into one and the same visual. I say the same about other similar points. For all straight lines that are parallel to the plane line in the thirty-third figure are parts of the visual lines in the thirty-fourth and thirty-fifth figures.

The Thirty-fifth Figure.

A Side-View of the Composite Cornice, in Perspective.

A Side-View of the Composite Cornice, in Perspective.

The Manner of drawing this finish’d Cornice, from the preceding Plan and Elevation, is the same with that so often shewn you. Admitting therefore, that the Lines of the Plan and Horizon, and the Points of Sight and Distance, have the very same Position in this, that they had in the preceding Scheme; all the Angles necessary for delineating the entire Cornice, are readily found by the help of two pair of Compasses; taking their Distances one way from the Ground-line; and the other way from a Line perpendicular to the same: Then drawing the visual and perpendicular Lines, and keeping the Place and Contour of the several Mouldings, you complete your Design.

The way to draw this finished cornice, based on the previous plan and elevation, is the same as what has been shown to you many times. So, if we assume that the lines of the plan and horizon, along with the points of sight and distance, are positioned exactly as they were in the previous scheme, all the angles needed to outline the entire cornice can be easily found using two pairs of compasses. Measure one distance from the ground line and the other from a line perpendicular to it. Then, draw the visual and perpendicular lines while maintaining the placement and shape of the various moldings, and you'll complete your design.

In the Pedament the visual Lines are wholly occult; and the Points H and L, where the Pedament begins to break back, being of like Height, are found in one and the same Visual: And the same may be said of all Points that are of equal Height from the Plan; for all the right Lines, which in the Thirty-third Figure are Parallels to the Ground-line, in the Thirty-fourth and Thirty-fifth Figures are Parts of the visual Lines.

In the Pediment, the visual lines are completely hidden; and the points H and L, where the Pediment starts to recede, are at the same height and can be seen in the same visual. The same applies to all points that are at equal heights from the plan; all the straight lines, which in the Thirty-third Figure are parallel to the ground line, are parts of the visual lines in the Thirty-fourth and Thirty-fifth Figures.


Fig. xxxvi.

Fig. xxxvi.

FIGURA Trigesimasexta.

Præparatio ad figuram trigesimamseptimam.

Preparation for Figure 37.

In vestigio geometrico C, & in ejus elevatione AB, præcipuas tantùm lineas adnotavi, ne figuram confunderem, & ut studiosorum industriæ aliquid relinquerem. Linea plani EG habet divisiones latitudinis P, & longitudinis Q, vestigii geometrici C. Ex punctis latitudinis ducentur more solito visuales ad O punctum oculi; ex punctis longitudinis fient occultæ ad punctum distantiæ, quod extra lineam AB protenditur modulis quatuordecim: & ubi occultæ ex divisionibus longitudinis secant visualem FO fiunt parallelæ ad lineam plani EF, adhibitis sectionibus talium parallelarum cum visualibus, ad complendam deformationem vestigii.

In geometric tracing C, & in its elevation AB, I only noted the main lines to avoid confusion in the figure, & to leave something for the diligence of the students. The plane line EG has width divisions P, & length divisions Q, in the geometric tracing C. From the width points, visual lines are drawn in the usual manner to the O eye point; from the length points, hidden lines will be created to the distance point, which extends beyond the line AB by fourteen modules: & where the hidden lines from the length divisions intersect the visual line FO, they become parallel to the plane line EF, using sections of such parallels with visuals, to complete the deformation of the tracing.

Eædem lineæ quæ in vestigio deformato sunt parallelæ ad EF, prolongantur usque ad visualem EO, & continuantur cum aliis parallelis ad perpendiculum DE. Fiunt quoque visuales ad punctum oculi ex divisionibus elevationis AB translatis in perpendiculum DE; adhibitis sectionibus talium parallelarum cum visualibus, ad complendam deformationem longitudinis elevationis.

The same lines that are distorted in the trace are parallel to EF, extending to the visual EO, and continuing with others parallel to the perpendicular DE. Visuals are also created at the eye point from the divisions of elevation AB shifted to the perpendicular DE; using sections of these parallels with visuals to complete the distortion of the elevation length.

The Six and thirtieth Figure,

Preparatory to the Thirty-seventh.

Preparing for the Thirty-seventh.

In the Geometrical Plan C, and in the Elevation thereof AB, I have only mark’d the principal Lines, as well for avoiding Confusion in the Figure, as that something might be left to the Industry of the Studious. The Line of the Plan EG has the Divisions of Breadth P, and of Length Q, of the Geometrical Plan C. From the Points of Breadth are drawn, as usual, Visuals to the Point of Sight O; From the Points of Length occult Lines are produc’d to the Point of Distance, which lies fourteen Modules without the Line AB: And where the occult Lines from the Divisions of Length cut the Visual FO, Parallels are made to the Ground-Line EF; and from the Intersections of those Parallels with the Visuals, you complete the Delineation of the Plan in Perspective.

In the Geometrical Plan C, and in the Elevation AB, I've only marked the main lines to avoid confusion in the figure and to leave some work for the diligent. The line of the plan EG has the width divisions P and the length divisions Q of Geometrical Plan C. From the width points, visual lines are drawn to the point of sight O; from the length points, hidden lines are extended to the point of distance, which is fourteen modules beyond the line AB. Where the hidden lines from the length divisions intersect the visual line FO, parallels are drawn to the ground line EF; from the intersections of those parallels with the visuals, you complete the perspective drawing of the plan.

The Lines which in the Plan are parallel to EF, being prolong’d to the Visual EO, are then continu’d parallel to the Perpendicular DE. And from the Divisions of AB, produc’d to DE, visual Lines are drawn to the Point of Sight; which intersecting the Perpendiculars aforesaid, you from thence find the Length of the Elevation in Perspective.

The lines in the plan that run parallel to EF, when extended to Visual EO, continue parallel to the perpendicular DE. From the divisions of AB, extended to DE, visual lines are drawn to the point of sight. These lines intersect the aforementioned perpendiculars, allowing you to determine the length of the elevation in perspective.


Fig. xxxvii.

Fig. xxxvii.

FIGURA Trigesimaseptima.

Deformatio columnæ Etruscæ.

Deformation of Etruscan column.

Ex præparatione quam exhibuimus figurâ trigesimasextâ, eruitur columna hæc nitida Ordinis Etrusci, opticè imminuta per latitudines & altitudines partium singularum; quæ accipiuntur ope duorum circinorum, ut sæpiùs dictum est.

From the preparation we presented in figure thirty-six, this shiny column of the Etruscan Order is visually narrowed by the widths and heights of the individual parts; these are measured using two compasses, as mentioned before.

The Thirty-seventh Figure.

A Tuscan Column in Perspective.

A Tuscan Column in Perspective.

From the Preparation exhibited in the Thirty-sixth Figure, is drawn this complete Piece of the Tuscan Order, brought into Perspective by means of the Breadths and Heights of the several Parts, exactly taken off with the Compasses, as has been often said.

From the preparation shown in the Thirty-sixth Figure, this complete piece of the Tuscan Order is rendered in perspective using the widths and heights of the different parts, precisely measured with the compass, as has often been stated.


Fig. xxxviii.

Fig. xxxviii.

FIGURA Trigesimaoctava.

Præparatio ad figuram trigesimamnonam.

Preparation for the thirty-ninth figure.

Hæc figura est simillima figuræ trigesimæsextæ. In vestigio P limes prominentiæ coronicis est R; coronæ verò in stylobatâ est T. soliditas stylobatæ est V. ambitus columnæ in imo est X, in summo Z.

This figure is very similar to the thirty-sixth figure. Right at the foot of the P column, the prominence of the crown is R; however, the crown at the stylobate is T. The solidity of the stylobate is V. The circumference of the column at the bottom is X, and at the top Z.

The Thirty-eighth Figure.

Preparatory to the Thirty-ninth.

Preparing for the Thirty-ninth.

This Figure is very much the same with the Thirty-sixth. In the Plan P, the utmost Projecture of the Cornice is R; that of the Cap of the Pedestal is T; the Trunk of the Pedestal is V; the naked Shaft of the Column at bottom is X, at top is Z.

This Figure is very similar to the Thirty-sixth. In Plan P, the highest point of the Cornice is R; the top of the Pedestal is T; the body of the Pedestal is V; the bare Shaft of the Column at the bottom is X, and at the top is Z.


Fig. XXXIX.

Fig. XXXIX.

FIGURA Trigesimanona.

Deformatio ædificii Dorici.

Doric building deformation.

Habes hoc loco ædificium Doricum, addito statuæ unius ornamento. Velim autem, ut si figuram aliquam ex his desumptam, delineandam assumas, aliquid mutes saltem in loco punctorum oculi aut distantiæ. Hoc modo majores in hac arte progressus facies; & si alicubi cælator aberraverit, ex lapsu illius nullum senties detrimentum.

You've got in this place a Doric building, with the addition of one statue for decoration. However, I would like you to take some figure from these, to sketch it, changing at least something in the position of the eye points or the distance. In this way, you'll make greater progress in this art; and if anywhere the sculptor goes astray, you won’t feel any loss from his mistake.

The Nine and thirtieth Figure.

A Piece of Dorick Architecture in Perspective.

A Piece of Dorick Architecture in Perspective.

In this Plate you have a Dorick Composition, with the additional Ornament of a single Statue; but I would advise, when you undertake to work after any of these Designs, you would at least place the Points of Sight and Distance somewhat differing from those here given; which Practice will both greatly further your Progress in this Art, and prevent any Inconvenience, that may arise from a Mistake of the Engraver.

In this plate, you have a Doric composition, featuring a single statue as an additional ornament. However, I recommend that when you start working on any of these designs, you should adjust the points of sight and distance a bit from what's shown here. This practice will significantly enhance your progress in this art and help avoid any issues that might come from an engraver's mistake.


Fig. xl.

Fig. 41.

FIGURA QUADRAGESIMA.

Vestigium geometricum ædificii Ordinis Dorici.

Doric order building geometry.

Vt studiosorum, qui sedulò se exercuerint in praxibus hucusque traditis, & ad majora inhient, utilitati serviam, delineandam suscepi medietatem arcûs cum tribus columnis, ac totidem statuarum loculamentis. Ad vitandam autem confusionem, ea dumtaxat membra in vestigio adumbrantur, quæ recensuimus figurâ trigesimaoctavâ, & ostendunt characteres A, B, C, D, E.

Vermont for the students who have diligently practiced the methods taught so far and aspire to greater things, I have taken on the task of outlining the midpoint of an arc with three columns and three locations for statues. To avoid confusion, only the parts that we noted in figure thirty-eight will be sketched, showing the characters A, B, C, D, E.

The FORTIETH FIGURE.

The Geometrical Plan of a Design, of the Dorick Order.

The Geometric Plan of a Design, of the Doric style Order.

For the Benefit of the Studious, who, having reduc’d to Practice the Rules hitherto laid down, aim at yet greater Things; I have here undertaken to delineate half an Arch adorn’d with three Columns, and as many Niches for Statues. But to avoid Confusion, I have given full Lines to those Members only, which were mention’d in the Thirty-eighth Figure, and which are here denoted by the Characters A, B, C, D, E.

For the benefit of those who are eager to learn and have already put into practice the rules established so far, I have taken on the task of illustrating half an arch embellished with three columns and three niches for statues. To keep things clear, I have provided complete lines only for the parts mentioned in the Thirty-eighth Figure, which are marked here with the letters A, B, C, D, and E.


Fig. xli.

Fig. xli.

FIGURA Quadragesimaprima.

Elevatio geometrica ædificii Dorici.

Geometric elevation of the Doric building.

Ex vestigio geometrico eruitur hæc elevatio geometrica longitudinis ædificii nostri. Et iccircò figura ista quadragesimaprima, cujus mensuræ omnes desumptæ sunt ex Barozzio, congruit longitudini figuræ quadragesimæ.

This geometric elevation shows the length of our building. And so this figure, the forty-first, whose dimensions are all taken from Barozzi, matches the length of the fortieth figure.

The Forty-first FIGURE.

The Geometrical Elevation of the foregoing Design.

The Geometric Elevation of the previous Design.

This Upright is drawn from the foregoing Geometrical Plan; and therefore all the Parts of this Design, whose Measures are taken from Vignola, exactly answer those of the Fortieth Figure.

This Upright is based on the previous Geometrical Plan; and therefore all the Parts of this Design, whose Measurements are taken from Vignola, perfectly match those of the Fortieth Figure.


Fig. xlii.

Fig. xlii.

FIGURA Quadragesimasecunda.

Modus vitandi confusionem, in contractione vestigiorum, & elevationum.

Modus vitandi confusionem, in contractione vestigiorum, & elevationum.

Contractiones vestigii figuræ quadragesimæ, & elevationis figuræ quadragesimæprimæ, ob nimiam obliquitatem quam habent, valde confusæ sunt. Medebimur tamen incommodo isti, uti fecimus figuris decimâ & undecimâ. Et ostendit chartula, exhibens in parvo tum figuram hanc quadragesimamsecundam, tum quatuor sequentes.

The contractions of the forty-foot shape, and the elevation of the first forty-foot shape, are quite confusing due to their excessive slant. However, we will address this issue as we did with the tenth and eleventh shapes. The chart shows, in a small format, this second forty-foot shape and the four that follow.

The Forty-second FIGURE.

The Manner of avoiding Confusion, in reducing Plans and Elevations into Perspective.

How to Avoid Confusion When Converting Plans and Elevations into Perspective.

The Reducing into Perspective the Plan of the Fortieth Figure, and the Upright of the Forty-first Figure, would become very confus’d, through the great Obliquity of the Rays: We have therefore remedy’d the Inconveniences of both, by the Methods explain’d in the Tenth and Eleventh Figures. And this Plate contains in little, what is more at large describ’d in Parts, as well in this, as the four subsequent Figures.

The Reducing into Perspective the Plan of the Fortieth Figure, and the Upright of the Forty-first Figure, would become very confusing due to the great angle of the Rays. We have therefore fixed the issues of both by the methods explained in the Tenth and Eleventh Figures. This Plate contains a summary of what is described in more detail in this and the four following Figures.


Fig. xliii.

Fig. xliii.

FIGURA Quadragesimatertia.

Contractio vestigii figuræ quadragesimæ.

Contracting the footprint of forty.

Linea plani multò remotior est à lineâ horizontali in hoc schemate, quàm in præcedenti. Ideo istud vestigium vacat omni confusione. Cætera patent ex iis quae sæpiùs dicta sunt, & ex figuræ hujus inspectione. Oportet autem, rectas parallelas ad lineam plani, prolongari usque ad visualem TO, (quæ cadit extra paginam) ut adminiculo parallelarum, fiat elevatio longitudinis nostri ædificii, de quâ dicemus figurâ quadragesimaquartâ.

The aircraft is much further from the horizontal line in this diagram than in the previous one. Thus, this trace avoids any confusion. The rest is clear from what has been mentioned before and from examining this figure. However, it is necessary to extend straight lines parallel to the plane line all the way to the visual TO (which falls outside the page) so that the elevation of the length of our building can be determined, which we will discuss in figure forty-four.

The Forty-third FIGURE.

The Plan of the Fortieth Figure in Perspective.

The Layout of the Fortieth Figure in Perspective.

By placing the Ground-line in this, much more remote from the Horizontal, than it is in the foregoing Figure, all Confusion is here avoided. The rest is evident from what has been often said on this Head, and a bare Inspection of the Figure. Parallels to the Ground-line must nevertheless be continu’d to the Visual TO, which falls without this Page; that from them may be rais’d the Elevation of the Length of this Design, which we shall handle in the next Figure.

By positioning the ground line much farther from the horizontal than in the previous figure, we avoid any confusion here. The rest is clear from what has often been discussed on this topic and a simple look at the figure. However, lines parallel to the ground line must still extend to the visual top, which is off this page; from them, we can establish the elevation of the length of this design, which we will address in the next figure.


Fig. xliv.

Fig. xliv.

FIGURA Quadragesimaquarta.

Contractio elevationis figuræ quadragesimæprimæ.

Contract of the 41st figure.

Rectæ parallelæ ad lineam plani figuræ quadragesimætertiæ, ubi pervenerint ad visualem TO, continuandæ sunt, more solito, cum parallelis ad lineam perpendicularem. In hanc autem transferre oportet omnes divisiones, quas ex Barozzio habet elevatio hujus ordinis; ac ducere visuales. Quomodo autem, adminiculo visualium & parallelarum, compleatur elevatio, constat ex figura, & clarius ex chartula figuræ quadragesimæsecundæ. Numeri 1, 2, 3, 4, geminati, ostendunt centra & altitudines semicirculorum seu arcuum figuræ quadragesimæquintæ; videlicet, numerus inferior designat centrum, superior verò designat altitudinem semicirculi.

Straight parallels to the line of the figure in the forty-third plane, where they reach the visual TO, should be continued, as usual, with parallels to the perpendicular line. Moreover, it is necessary to transfer all divisions from Barozzi that relate to the elevation of this order; and to draw visual lines. The way this elevation is completed with the help of visuals & parallels is evident from the figure and more clearly illustrated in the chart of the forty-second figure. Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, doubled, show the centers & heights of semicircles or arcs of the forty-fifth figure; specifically, the lower number indicates the center, while the upper number indicates the height of the semicircle.

The Forty-fourth FIGURE.

The Elevation of the Forty-first Figure in Perspective.

The Elevation of the 41st Figure in Perspective.

When the Parallels to the Ground-line in the Forty-third Figure, are prolong’d to the Visual TO, they are then, as usual, to be continu’d Parallels to the Perpendicular: On which Perpendicular, those Divisions given by Vignola, for the Proportions of this Order, are to be transferr’d; and Visuals drawn from them to the Point of Sight. How by these Visuals and Parallels the Elevation is rais’d in Perspective, is manifest in part from this Figure, but more clearly from the Forty-second Figure. The Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, which you here see doubl’d, give the Centers and Heights of Semicircles of the Arches in the Forty-fifth Figure; the lower Numbers denoting the Centers, and the upper Numbers the Heights of the Semicircles of the same.

When the parallels to the ground line in the forty-third figure are extended to the visual top, they should then, as usual, continue as parallels to the perpendicular. On this perpendicular, the divisions provided by Vignola for the proportions of this order should be transferred, and visuals should be drawn from them to the point of sight. How these visuals and parallels raise the elevation in perspective is partly shown in this figure, but is clearer in the forty-second figure. The numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, which you see doubled here, represent the centers and heights of semicircles of the arches in the forty-fifth figure; the lower numbers indicate the centers, and the upper numbers indicate the heights of the semicircles of the same.


Fig. xlv.

Fig. xlv.

FIGURA Quadragesimaquinta.

Dimidium ædificii Dorici opticè deformati.

Half of the building is visually distorted.

Huic figuræ delineandæ plures præiverunt, ejusdemque latitudines mutuati sumus ex figura quadragesimatertia, altitudines ex quadragesimaquarta. Superest autem, ut lumina & umbræ scitè inducantur in singulas partes ædificii.

For this purpose figure's drawing, we have borrowed several aspects from the fortieth figure and the heights from the forty-fourth. Now, it's necessary to skillfully add lights and shadows to each part of the building.

The Forty-fifth FIGURE.

One Half of the Dorick Design in Perspective.

One Half of the Dorick Design in Perspective.

The foregoing Figures being preparatory to this, the Breadths are taken from the Forty-third, and the Heights from the Forty-fourth Figure. It only remains, that the Lights and Shades be skilfully dispos’d to each Part of the Work.

The previous figures set the stage for this one, with the widths taken from the forty-third figure and the heights from the forty-fourth figure. All that's left is to skillfully arrange the light and shadows for each part of the work.


FIG. XLVI.

FIG. 46.

FIGURA Quadragesimasexta.

Alterum dimidium ejusdem ædificii.

Other half of the building.

Supersedere poteram delineatione alterius medietatis ædificii nostri. Verùm operæ non peperci, ut ostenderem diversitatem luminum & umbrarum, quæ conveniunt partibus cæteroqui omnino similibus.

Supersede I could outline the other half of our building. But I didn’t hold back in showing the variety of light & shadows that complement parts that are otherwise completely similar.

The Forty-sixth FIGURE.

The other Half of the same Design.

The other half of the same design.

I might very well have omitted this Half of the Design, but that I spar’d no Pains, to shew the Diversity of the Lights and Shadows, that must be given to those Parts of the Work, which in other Respects are alike.

I might be able to. very well have left out this half of the design, but I spared no effort to show the variety of lights and shadows that should be applied to those parts of the work that are similar in other respects.


Fig. xlvii.

Fig. 47.

FIGURA Quadragesimaseptima.

Vestigia ædificii Ionici.

Remnants of Ionic architecture.

Vestigium geometricum A ædificii Ionici, sub se habet suam deformationem B. Hæc autem ut evadat distinctior, lineam plani, quæ in sequentibus figuris habebit distantiam PE ab horizontali OE, deorsum protraximus in CD, ut etiam fecimus figurâ quadragesimasecundâ & quadragesimatertiâ. Linea visualis OM eundem habet usum, quem visualis OT figuræ quadragesimætertiæ; videlicet, ut in ea terminentur parallelæ ad lineam plani ex membris vestigii B, eademque continuentur cum aliis parallelis ad rectam EC, pro deformandâ elevatione quam apponemus figurâ quadragesimanonâ.

Geometric path A of the Ionic building has its deformation B beneath it. To make this clearer, we extended a horizontal line, which will represent the distance PE from the horizontal OE, downwards in CD, as we did in figures forty-two and forty-three. The visual line OM serves the same purpose as the visual line OT in figure forty-three; specifically, it defines the parallels to the horizontal line from the components of the trace B, continuing the same way with other parallels to the line EC, to represent the altered elevation we will show in figure forty-nine.

The Forty-seventh FIGURE.

The Plan of an Ionick Building.

The Plan of an Ionic Building.

The Geometrical Plan of this Ionick Work is A, underneath is its Perspective B; to render which more distinct, the Ground-line that in the following Figures has only the Distance PE from the Horizontal EO, is here remov’d downward to CD, as was done in the Forty-second and Forty-third Figures foregoing. The visual Line OM is of the same use as that of OT in the Forty-third Figure; namely, to terminate the Lines which are drawn from the Members of the Plan B parallel to the Ground-line; from whence they are again continu’d parallel to the Perpendicular EC, for making in Perspective the Elevation inserted in the Forty-ninth Figure.

The geometric layout of this Ionick work is A, with its perspective view shown below as B. To make this clearer, the ground line, which in the following figures only shows the distance PE from the horizontal EO, is moved down to CD, just like it was done in the forty-second and forty-third figures earlier. The visual line OM serves the same purpose as the line OT in the forty-third figure; that is, to complete the lines drawn from the elements of plan B parallel to the ground line. From there, they continue parallel to the perpendicular EC, to create the perspective view for the elevation shown in the forty-ninth figure.


Fig. xlviii.

Fig. 48.

FIGURA Quadragesimaoctava.

Elevatio geometrica ædificii Ionici.

Geometric elevation of Ionic building.

Ex hac elevatione quæ clarè ostendit membra totius ædificii secundum longitudinem dissecti, desumuntur altitudines ac terminationes membrorum singulorum. Peritiores tamen hac figurâ delineandâ supersedere solent, quia terminationes haberi possunt ex vestigio A figuræ quadragesimæseptimæ, altitudines verò ponendæ iterum sunt figurâ sequenti.

From this elevation, which clearly shows the parts of the entire building according to the length dissected, one can derive the heights and terminations of each part. However, more experienced individuals often tend to skip this figure because the terminations can be gathered from the footprint of figure A of the forty-seventh figure, while the heights must once again be established with the next figure.

The Forty-eighth FIGURE.

The Geometrical Upright of the foregoing Ionick Design.

The Geometrical Upright of the previous Ionick Design.

From this Figure (which distinctly shews the Composition of the whole Work, in respect of its Length) are taken the Heights and Terminations of the several Members thereof. But those that are skill’d in this Art, usually omit the delineating these Elevations; because the Terminations may be taken from the Plan A in the Forty-seventh Figure; and the Heights must be repeated in the following Figure.

From this figure (which clearly shows the composition of the entire work regarding its length) are taken the heights and terminations of the different parts. However, those who are skilled in this craft usually skip drawing these elevations because the terminations can be taken from Plan A in the forty-seventh figure, and the heights will be repeated in the next figure.


Fig. xlix.

Fig. 49.

FIGURA Quadragesimanona.

Deformatio elevationis ædificii Ionici.

Deformation of Ionian building elevation.

Hæc figura continens deformationem præcedentis elevationis, perficitur methodo illa, quam ostendimus figurâ quadragesimasecundâ; nimirum, ex vestigio B figuræ quadragesimæseptimæ, ducere oportet parallelas ad lineam plani CD, quæ ubi pervenerint ad visualem OM, continuandæ sunt cum aliis parallelis ad lineam EC. Easdem parallelas in hanc figuram translatas secant visuales ex linea recta AB, in qua positæ sunt altitudines ædificii Ionici, desumpta vel ex figura præcedenti, vel ex Barozzio. Nullum autem est punctum in membris hujus elevationis, quod non inveniatur per sectiones visualium ex linea AB, cum parallelis ad eandem lineam.

This shape, which contains the deformation of the previous elevation, is completed using the method we demonstrated in figure forty-two; specifically, from the trace of B in figure forty-seven, we need to draw parallels to the plane line CD. When these reach the visual OM, they should be extended with other parallels to the line EC. The same parallels transferred into this shape intersect with visuals from the straight line AB, where the heights of the Ionic building are situated, taken either from the previous figure or from Barozzi. However, there is no point in the elements of this elevation that cannot be found through the intersections of visuals from line AB, along with parallels to that same line.

The Forty-ninth FIGURE.

The Elevation of the Ionick Design in Perspective.

The Elevation of the Ionick Design in Perspective.

This Plate containing the Perspective of the foregoing Upright, is drawn by the Method laid down in the Forty-second Figure; to wit, from the Plan B of the Forty-seventh Figure, Parallels to the Ground-line CD are prolong’d to the Visual OM; and thence are continu’d Parallels to the Perpendicular EC. These being transferr’d into this Figure, are intersected by the visual Lines that proceed from AB, which contains the Heights of this Ionick Composition, agreeable to the foregoing Figure, and the Rules deliver’d by Vignola. Now there is no Point in any Member of this Upright, but may be found by the Intersection which the visual Line from AB makes with its respective Perpendicular.

This plate shows the perspective of the upright mentioned earlier, and it's created using the method described in the forty-second figure. Specifically, from the plan B of the forty-seventh figure, parallels to the ground line CD are extended to the visual OM; then, parallel lines are continued to the perpendicular EC. These are transferred into this figure and intersected by the visual lines coming from AB, which represent the heights of this Ionick composition, in accordance with the previous figure and the rules provided by Vignola. Now, there’s no point on any part of this upright that cannot be located by the intersection of the visual line from AB with its corresponding perpendicular.


Fig. l.

Fig. 1.

FIGURA Quinquagesima.

Architectura Ionica.

Ionic Architecture.

Ex vestigio figuræ quadragesimæseptimæ, & ex elevatione figuræ quadragesimænonæ, eruitur hoc ædificium Ionicum, quod esse poterit vel principium alicujus turris campanariæ, aut basis cujuspiam arcûs triumphalis. Vereor ut cælator suam diligentiam in hoc schemate satis probaverit. Ejus tamen errata facilè ipse deteges, & omni studio cavebis.

From the remnants of the forty-seventh figure, and from the elevation of the forty-ninth figure, this Ionic building is derived, which could serve as either the base of a bell tower or the foundation of some triumphal arch. I fear that the sculptor has not sufficiently demonstrated his diligence in this design. However, you will easily uncover his mistakes, and you will carefully avoid them with all your effort.

The Fiftieth FIGURE.

A Design of Ionick Architecture.

A Design of Ionic Architecture.

From the Plan of the Forty-seventh Figure, and from the Upright of the Forty-ninth Figure, is drawn this Ionick Piece; which might well serve for the lower Order of a Turret, or for part of a Triumphal-Arch. I fear the Engraver has not been so exact in this Scheme, as he ought; but you will readily discover his Mistakes, and carefully beware of them.

From the Plan of the 47th Figure, and from the Upright of the 49th Figure, is drawn this Ionick Piece; which could definitely work for the lower part of a Tower, or for part of a Triumphal Arch. I worry the Engraver hasn't been as precise in this design as he should be; but you'll easily notice his mistakes and be careful to avoid them.


FIG. LI.

FIG. LI.

FIGURA Quinquagesimaprima.

Ordo Corinthius.

Corinthian Order.

Complectitur hæc pagina molem contractam Ordinis Corinthii, cum suis præparationibus. Vestigium A exhibet parietem pone columnas cavum instar canalis. Idem vestigium opticè deformatur in D: omissâque elevatione geometricâ, per ejus altitudines notatas in lineâ BC projicitur elevatio; ac methodo consuetâ, ex vestigio & elevatione componitur ædificium, addito statuæ unius ornamento.

This page contains a detailed summary of the structure of the Corinthian Order, along with its preparations. The mark A shows a wall positioned behind the columns like a channel. The same mark is optically distorted in D: with the geometric elevation omitted, the elevation is projected through its heights noted on the line BC; and using the usual method, the building is composed from the mark & elevation, with the addition of one decorative statue.

The Fifty-first FIGURE.

A Corinthian Design in Perspective.

A Corinthian Design in Perspective.

This Plate contains the Perspective of a Corinthian Work, with its Preparations. The Geometrical Plan A shews the Wall wrought hollow behind the Columns. The said Plan in Perspective is D: and leaving out the Geometrical Elevation, the Perspective thereof is describ’d, by transferring the Heights of the former into the Line BC. From the Perspective-Plan and Upright the Design is finish’d after the usual Manner; to which is added the Ornament of a single Statue.

This Plate shows the Perspective of a Corinthian Work, along with its Preparations. The Geometrical Plan A reveals the Wall carved out behind the Columns. The Perspective Plan is D: and omitting the Geometrical Elevation, the Perspective is described by mapping the Heights from the former into the Line BC. The Design is completed in the usual way from the Perspective-Plan and Upright, including the addition of a single Statue as an ornament.


Fig. lii.

Fig. 52.

Figura Quinquagesimasecunda.

Delineatio columnæ spiralis, Ordinis Compositi.

Spiral column layout, Composite Order.

Posita elevatione geometrica columnæ rectæ, ac divisione illius in vigintiquatuor partes æquales, columna spiralis absolvitur per partes circumferentiæ circulorum, quorum diametri sunt æquales diversis latitudinibus columnæ rectæ, ut ostendit figura in A. Ad projectionem opticam elevationis, notandæ sunt quatuor occultæ rectæ, quæ ex terminis convexitatis & concavitatis infimarum spirarum ejusdem elevationis A, descendunt ac desinunt in duos circulos vestigii geometrici B. Vestigium ipsum opticè imminutum habetur in C: eædem autem sunt maximæ hinc inde latitudines, tum in circulo majori, tum in convexitate infimarum columnæ spirarum; eædem sunt maximæ latitudines, tum in circulo minori, tum in concavitate ipsarum spirarum; ut dignosces applicando regulam spiris simul & circulis. Ex quatuor punctis maximæ latitudinis duorum circulorum, incipiunt quatuor lineæ parallelæ ad lineam plani, quæ ubi pervenerint ad visualem ED, continuandæ sunt cum parallelis ad perpendiculum DF. In eandem lineam DF, ex elevatione A transferre oportet vigintiquatuor partes æquales altitudinis columnæ, ac ducere visuales ad O punctum oculi. Per sectionem autem visualium cum prædictis quatuor parallelis ad lineam DF, ducuntur lineæ undulatæ MN, PQ, ex quibus eruuntur lineæ utrinque terminativæ columnæ spiralis nitidæ. Ex linea verò GH habetur facies anterior stylobatæ, columnæ & coronicis; ex linea IL habetur facies eorum posterior.

Posita the geometric elevation of the straight column, and dividing it into twenty-four equal parts, the spiral column is resolved through parts of the circumference of circles, whose diameters are equal at various widths of the straight column, as shown in figure A. For the optical projection of the elevation, four hidden lines must be noted, which descend from the terms of convexity and concavity of the lower spirals of the same elevation A, and end in two circles of geometric tracing B. The tracing itself appears optically reduced in C: these are the maximum widths on both sides, both in the larger circle and in the convexity of the lower spirals of the column; they are the same maximum widths, both in the smaller circle and in the concavity of the spirals; as you can discern by applying the rule to the spirals and circles. From the four points of maximum width of the two circles, four lines parallel to the plane line begin, which, when they reach the visual line ED, should be extended with parallels to the perpendicular line DF. On the same line DF, you must transfer twenty-four equal parts of the height of the column from elevation A, and draw visuals to point O, the observer's eye. Through the intersection of the visuals with the aforementioned four parallels to line DF, wavy lines MN, PQ are drawn, from which the boundary lines of the polished spiral column are obtained on both sides. From line GH the front face of the stylobate, column, and cornice is obtained; from line IL the back face is obtained.

The Fifty-second FIGURE.

The Description of a wreath’d Column, of the Composite Order.

The Description of a Wreathed Column, of the Composite Order.

Having made the Geometrical Elevation of a streight Column, and divided the Height of its Shaft into Four and twenty equal Parts; the Wreathing is describ’d by Parts of the Circumference of Circles, whose Diameters are equal to the several Breadths, or Diameters, of the streight Column; as is shewn in the Figure A. For putting the Upright into Perspective, four streight occult Lines are of use, which descend from the Extent of the Swellings and Sinkings of the lower Wreaths of the Column A; and terminate in two Circles of the Geometrical Plan B. The said Plan laid down in Perspective is C. The utmost Extent of the greater Circle determines that of the Convex Parts of the lower Wreaths: The greatest Breadth of the lesser Circle gives that of the hollow Parts of the said Wreaths; as may be perceiv’d, by applying a Ruler from the Wreaths to the Circles of the Plan. From the four Points of greatest Breadth in those Circles, four Lines parallel to the Ground-line are continu’d to the Visual ED, and thence again continu’d parallel to the Perpendicular DF. From the Elevation A, the Four and twenty equal Parts of the Columns Height are transferr’d into the Line DF, and Visuals drawn from each to the Point of Sight O. By the Intersections of those Visuals with the four Perpendiculars aforesaid, are drawn the wav’d Lines MN, PQ; from which, both the Out-lines of the finish’d Column are describ’d. But the Fore-part of the Pedestal, Column, and Cornice, is taken from the Line GH; the Back-part of the same from the Line IL.

After creating the geometrical elevation of a straight column and dividing the height of its shaft into 24 equal parts, the wreathing is described using parts of the circumference of circles, whose diameters match the various widths or diameters of the straight column, as shown in Figure A. To put the upright in perspective, four straight hidden lines are helpful; these descend from the extent of the bulges and indentations of the lower wreaths of Column A and end at two circles in the geometrical plan B. The plan laid out in perspective is C. The farthest extent of the larger circle determines the convex parts of the lower wreaths, while the widest point of the smaller circle determines the hollow parts of those wreaths, which can be seen by applying a ruler from the wreaths to the circles of the plan. From the four points of greatest width in those circles, four lines parallel to the ground line are extended to the visual ED and then continued parallel to the perpendicular DF. From elevation A, the 24 equal parts of the column's height are transferred to line DF, with visuals drawn from each to the point of sight O. The intersections of those visuals with the aforementioned four perpendiculars create the wavy lines MN and PQ, from which the outlines of the finished column are drawn. However, the front part of the pedestal, column, and cornice is taken from line GH; the back part comes from line IL.


FIG. LIII. A.

FIG. LIII. A.

Fig. Quinquages. tertia A.

Ordines Architecturæ, desumpti ex Palladio & Scamozzio.

Ordines Architecturæ, taken from Palladio & Scamozzio.

De Ordinibus Architecturæ, præter Barozzium, egregiè scripserunt Palladius & Scamozzius; ac singuli, jure merito, suos habent asseclas & patronos. Ut ergò, etiam juxta laudatissimorum Autorum placita, opticas projectiones facere possis, omnes Ordines in hac paginâ exhibere volui, ut in eorum Libris inveniuntur.

On the Orders of Architecture, besides Barozzi, have been excellently written by Palladio and Scamozzi; and each, rightfully, has their followers and patrons. Therefore, in accordance with the principles of the most esteemed Authors, I wanted to showcase all the Orders on this page, as they appear in their Books.

The Fifty-third Figure A.

The Orders of Architecture, taken from Palladio and Scamozzi.

The Orders of Architecture, taken from Palladio and Scamozzi.

Besides Vignola, Palladio and Scamozzi have also written excellently well of the Orders of Architecture; and each of ’em have deservedly their Followers and Admirers. That you might therefore be enabl’d to make Designs in Perspective, after the Proportions of the most celebrated Masters, I have in this Plate given you the Measures of all the Orders, as deliver’d by them in their Books.

Also, Vignola, Palladio, and Scamozzi have also written very well about the Orders of Architecture, and each of them has rightfully earned their Followers and Admirers. To help you create Designs in Perspective, based on the Proportions of the most renowned Masters, I have included in this Plate the Measurements of all the Orders, as presented by them in their Books.


Fig. liii. b.

Fig. liii. b.

Fig. Quinquages. tertia B.

Modus triplex delineandi columnas spirales.

Three methods for outlining spiral columns.

Columnæ figuræ superioris carent ea concinnitate, qua præditæ sunt columnæ spirales æneæ celeberrimi Equitis Bernini ad sepulcrum S. Petri in Vaticano. Itaque methodum triplicem exhibeo ad minuenda spatia totius altitudinis columnæ.

Columns of the upper figure lack the elegance that the famous bronze spiral columns of Sir Bernini have at the tomb of St. Peter in the Vatican. Therefore, I present a threefold method for reducing the height of the entire column.

1. Recta OA sit æqualis altitudini AB columnæ. Fiat autem recta OB, & arcus AP ex centro O, divisus in partes duodecim æquales, ducendo rectas, quæ per puncta divisionum desinant in columnam rectam; ac demum fiant parallelæ ad basim: Spatia inter has parallelas dabunt aperturam circini pro triangulis æquilateris & pro spiris, ut ostendit columna 1.

1. Let line OA be equal to the height of the column AB. Also, let line OB be made, and an arc AP drawn from the center O, divided into twelve equal parts, by drawing lines that end at the vertical column at the division points; and finally, let parallel lines be drawn to the base: The spaces between these parallels will create openings for circles for equilateral triangles and for spirals, as shown in column 1.

2. Translatâ in C tertiâ parte altitudinis columnæ ab ejus imo scapo, habeat circinus aperturam CD; ac posito uno ejus crure prius in D, postea in C, fiant duo parvi arcus ad E: sectio illorum arcuum erit centrum arcûs DC, quem oportet dividere in duodecim partes æquales, & ex punctis divisionum ducere parallelas ad basim. Tum spatiis inter parallelas divisis in quatuor partes æquales, tres ex illis partibus dabunt longitudinem crurum pro triangulis isoscelibus; vertices autem triangulorum erunt centra singularum spirarum, ut ostendit columna 2.

2. Translate from the third part of the height of the column from its base, the compass should have an opening CD; and with one leg initially placed at D, then at C, create two small arcs to E: the intersection of those arcs will be the center of arc DC, which should be divided into twelve equal parts, and from the division points, draw parallels to the base. Then, by dividing the spaces between the parallels into four equal parts, three of those parts will provide the length of the legs for isosceles triangles; the vertices of the triangles will be the centers of individual spirals, as shown in column 2.

3. Ductâ ex medio summitatis G rectâ GF, spatium HF transferatur in I, & fiat recta IL parallela ad basim HF; spatium IL transferatur in N, ac fiat NM, & sic deinceps. In parvis columnis triangula sine sensibili errore duci possunt per diagonales: in columnis tamen grandioribus, alterutrum ex modis antea explicatis adhibere necesse est.

3. Draw a line from the middle of the summit G straight to GF, transfer the distance HF to I, and create a straight line IL that is parallel to the base HF; transfer the distance IL to N, and create NM, and so on. In small columns, triangles can be drawn with negligible error using diagonals: however, in larger columns, it is necessary to use one of the previously explained methods.

The Fifty-third Figure B.

Three different Ways of delineating wreath’d Columns.

Three different ways to outline decorated columns.

The wreath’d Columns describ’d in the Fifty-second Figure, being divided into Twenty-four equal Parts, want very much of that Elegancy of Contour, which is visible in those brass Pillars, made by the famous Cavalier Bernino, for S. Peter’s Sepulcher in the Vatican. Wherefore I here lay before you three several Ways of diminishing the Spaces through the whole Height of the Column.

The decorated columns shown in the Fifty-second Figure, divided into twenty-four equal parts, lack a lot of the elegance in shape seen in the brass pillars created by the famous designer Bernino for St. Peter’s tomb in the Vatican. Therefore, I present to you three different methods for reducing the spaces throughout the entire height of the column.

1. Make the right Line OA equal to AB the Height of the Column; then draw the Line OB, and on the Center O describe at pleasure the Arch AP, which divide into twelve equal Parts, and by the Divisions draw streight Lines from the Center O to the Line of the Column; and lastly continue the same Parallels to the Base. The Spaces between these Parallels, shall be the Sides of equilateral Triangles, wherewith you are to describe the Wreath of the Column, as is seen in Column 1.

1. Make the line OA the same length as AB, which represents the height of the column; then draw the line OB. From the center O, create the arch AP as you wish, dividing it into twelve equal parts. From these divisions, draw straight lines from the center O to the column line, and then extend the same parallels down to the base. The spaces between these parallels will form the sides of equilateral triangles that you will use to create the column's wreath, as shown in Column 1.

2. Having set the third Part of the Columns Height, from the Bottom of the Shaft to the Point C; with the Interval CD, from the Centers D and C, describe the Parts of Arches intersecting at E. On the Center E, with the same Interval, describe the Arch DC, which divide into twelve equal Parts; and from the Points of those Divisions, draw Parallels to the Base. Then dividing each Space between the Parallels into four equal Parts; three of those Parts shall be the Sides of the Isosceles Triangle; whose Vertex is the Center whereon to describe each Wreath of Column 2.

2. After establishing the height of the column's third part, from the bottom of the shaft to point C, use the distance CD from centers D and C to outline the arches that meet at E. At center E, using the same distance, create the arch DC, dividing it into twelve equal sections. From the points of those divisions, draw parallel lines to the base. Then, divide each space between the parallels into four equal parts; three of those parts will form the sides of the isosceles triangle, with the vertex being the center where each wreath of column 2 will be drawn.

3. Having drawn from the midst of the Columns top G, the Line GF, make HI equal to HF, and draw IL parallel to the Base HF: Again, make IN equal to IL, and draw NM also parallel, and so on. In small Pillars, the Centers of the Diagonals of these Spaces may, without sensible Errour, serve for describing the Wreaths; but in greater Columns, either of the other two Methods is rather to be chosen.

3. From the top of Column G, draw line GF, then make HI the same length as HF and draw IL parallel to the base HF. Next, make IN the same length as IL and draw NM parallel as well, and continue this process. For smaller pillars, the centers of the diagonals in these spaces can be used to outline the wreaths without significant error, but for larger columns, one of the other two methods is preferable.


Fig. liv.

Fig. liv.

FIGURA Quinquagesimaquarta.

Vestigia ædificii Ordinis Corinthii.

Remnants of the Corinthian Order.

Descripturi ædificium Corinthium octangulare, ponimus hic vestigia unius ex quatuor partibus pilarum, quibus imponetur fornix in modum tholi, ut constabit in figurâ quinquagesimaoctava. Ad faciliorem descriptionem, in parte inferiori paginæ posui vestigium geometricum stylobatæ, in superiori vestigium geometricum coronicis, cum latitudinibus & longitudinibus membrorum singulorum; ut eas transferendo in lineam plani more consueto, utrumque vestigium opticè deformetur. Ad vitandam confusionem, prius notare oportebit puncta quæ spectant ad membra propinquiora solido parieti, deinde alia.

Description of the octagonal Corinthian building, we present here the footprint of one of the four columns that will support the arch in the style of a dome, so it will take the form of the fifty-eighth figure. For easier description, I placed the geometric footprint of the stylobate at the bottom of the page, and the geometric footprint of the cornice at the top, along with the widths and lengths of each individual element; so that by transferring them to the plane line in the usual manner, both footprints will be optically distorted. To avoid confusion, it will first be necessary to note the points related to the elements closest to the solid wall, and then the others.

The Fifty-fourth FIGURE.

The Plan of a Design of the Corinthian Order.

The Plan of a Design of the Corinthian style Order.

Being to describe an Octangular Corinthian Work, I have here inserted the Plan of one Quarter of the Composition; which is vaulted in Form of a Cupola, as is seen in the Fifty-eighth Figure. To render the Plan less confus’d, I have, in the lower part of the Plate, given the Geometrical Plan of the Pedestal; and in the upper part, that of the Cornice; with the Breadths and Lengths of each Member: so that by transferring the same into the Ground-line, after the usual Manner; you delineate each Plan in Perspective. For avoiding Confusion, ’twill be requisite first, to transfer the Points of those Members that are next the Solidity of the Wall; and then proceed to the others.

To describe an Octangular Corinthian Work, I've included the Plan of one Quarter of the Composition, which has a vaulted structure in the shape of a Cupola, as shown in the Fifty-eighth Figure. To make the Plan clearer, I've provided the Geometrical Plan of the Pedestal at the bottom of the Plate, and at the top, that of the Cornice, along with the Widths and Lengths of each Component. By transferring these into the Ground-line, in the usual way, you can draw each Plan in Perspective. To avoid confusion, it's essential first to transfer the Points of those Components that are closest to the Wall's solidity, then proceed to the others.


Fig. lv.

Fig. 55.

FIGURA Quinquagesimaquinta.

Elevatio ædificii Ordinis Corinthii.

Elevation of the Corinthian building.

Elevatio geometrica ædificii octangularis congruit cum duobus ejus vestigiis figuræ antecedentis. Quia verò elevatio parietis abscondit secundam ex quatuor columnis, eademque in ædificio deformato conspicua futura est; iccircò eam lineis occultis designare oportuit.

The geometric height of the octagonal building aligns with its two previous shapes. However, since the elevation of the wall hides the second of the four columns, which will be visible in the deformed building; therefore, it was necessary to represent it with hidden lines.

The Fifty-fifth FIGURE.

The Geometrical Elevation of a Corinthian Work.

The Geometric Elevation of a Corinthian Work.

The Geometrical Elevation of this Octangular Design, is wholly correspondent to the two Plans of the foregoing Figure: But because the Wall in this Upright takes off the Sight from the second of the four Columns, which is notwithstanding visible in the finish’d Perspective that follows; ’tis requisite to delineate the same with occult Lines, as in the Figure.

The Geometrical Elevation of this Octagonal Design completely matches the two Plans of the previous Figure: However, since the Wall in this Upright obscures the view of the second of the four Columns, which is still visible in the finished Perspective that follows, it’s necessary to illustrate it using hidden Lines, as shown in the Figure.


Fig. lvi.

Fig. lvi.

FIGURA Quinquagesimasexta.

Deformatio vestigiorum & elevationis ædificii Corinthii.

Deformation of footprints & elevation of the Corinthian building.

In hac figurâ, lineam plani coincidere volui cum linea horizontis. Itaque videri non posset vestigium inferius, nisi ut alias deorsum protraxi lineam plani, hic è converso sursum promovissem lineam horizontis, quam constitui mediam inter lineas plani utriusque vestigii, ut ambæ projectiones essent æquè distinctæ. In elevatione, columna secunda, quam, ut dixi, paries abscondit, lineis occultis designanda est.

In this figure, I wanted the plane line to align with the horizontal line. Therefore, the lower trace couldn't be seen unless I otherwise drew the plane line downward, while here I would raise the horizontal line upward, which I set as the midpoint between the plane lines of both traces, so that both projections would be equally distinct. In the elevation, the second column, which, as I mentioned, is hidden by the wall, should be indicated with hidden lines.

The Fifty-sixth FIGURE.

The Perspective Plans and Upright of the Corinthian Design foregoing.

The Perspective Plans and Structure of the Corinthian style Design previously mentioned.

In this Figure, I have made the Ground-line coincident with that of the Horizon, in which case the lower Plan can’t be seen, unless the Ground-line be sunk lower, as before intimated; or contrariwise, the Point of Sight rais’d higher, as I have here done, keeping it in the midst between the Ground-lines of the two Plans, that the Perspective of both might be equally distinct. In the Elevation, the second Column, which I mention’d to be hidden by the Wall, should be design’d with occult Lines.

In this figure, I made the ground line match up with the horizon, which means the lower plan can’t be seen unless the ground line is lowered, as mentioned earlier; or on the other hand, the point of sight is raised higher, as I have done here, keeping it in the middle between the ground lines of the two plans so that the perspective of both is equally clear. In the elevation, the second column, which I said would be hidden by the wall, should be drawn with dashed lines.


Fig. lvii.

Fig. 57.

FIGURA Quinquagesimaseptima.

Adumbratio figuræ sequentis.

Overview of the following figure.

Figuram hanc seorsim delineavi, ut videas quomodo facienda sit operis totius adumbratio, accipiendo altitudines membrorum singulorum ex elevatione; latitudines & longitudines ex vestigiis. Quæ omnia ex diagrammatis inspectione clarissimè apparent.

I created this outline separately so you can see how to make the overall depiction by using the heights of each limb from the elevation and the widths and lengths from the footprints. All of this is clearly shown in the diagrams.

The Fifty-seventh FIGURE.

The rough Draught of the following Figure.

The rough draft of the following figure.

I have drawn this Figure apart, that you may see the Manner of describing the Out-line of the whole Work, by taking the Heights of the several Members from the Elevation, and their Breadths and Lengths from the Plans; all which is very plain, upon Inspection of the Figure.

I’ve got separated this Figure so you can see how to outline the entire Work by measuring the Heights of the different parts from the Elevation, and their Widths and Lengths from the Plans; all of which is very clear upon looking at the Figure.


Fig. lviii.

Fig. 58.

FIGURA Quinquagesimaoctava.

Ædificium Ordinis Corinthii octangulare.

Corinthian octagonal building.

Hucusque descripsimus pilas anticas sinistras ædificii Corinthii. En hoc loco medietatem dexteram totius Operis. Integrum verò ædificium habebis figurâ sexagesimâ.

So far we have described the ancient piles on the left side of the Corinthian building. Here is the right half of the entire structure. You will have the complete building shaped like a sixty-sided figure.

The Fifty-eighth FIGURE.

Part of an Octangular Work of the Corinthian Order.

Part of an Eight-Sided Work of the Corinthian Style.

Hitherto the nearest left-hand Quarter of this Corinthian Design has been describ’d. In this Plate you have the right-hand Half of the whole Work; and in the Sixtieth Figure, the entire Perspective compleat.

So far the closest left side of this Corinthian design has been described. In this plate, you can see the right side of the whole work; and in the sixtieth figure, the complete perspective.


Fig. lix.

Fig. 59.

FIGURA Quinquagesimanona.

Vestigia tabernaculi octangularis.

Remnants of the octagonal tent.

Projectiones rerum octangularium sunt quadratis difficiliores: ideò in eis explicandis diligentiæ non peperci. Moles cujus vestigia vides in A & B, convenit in multis cum eâ quam ereximus figurâ quinquagesimaoctavâ. Visualis CD recipit sectiones perpendicularium, quæ deserviunt pro elevatione figuræ sequentis, ut sæpius dictum est. Si facies interior delineanda sit seorsim à facie anteriori, illam perficies ope linearum CE, istam ope linearum FD.

Predictions of octagonal shapes are more complex than squares: therefore, I didn't hold back on the details in explaining them. The mass whose traces you see in A & B shares many similarities with the figure we created in the fifty-eighth. The visual CD captures the perpendicular sections, which serve as the basis for the elevation of the next figure, as has been mentioned before. If the inner face needs to be drawn separately from the front face, you'll complete it using lines CE, and this one using lines FD.

The Fifty-ninth FIGURE.

The Plans of an Octangular Tabernacle.

The Plans of an Eight-Sided Tabernacle.

Octangular Figures being more difficult to be put in Perspective, than the Square; I shall use my best Endeavours to render the Method as plain as possible. The Composition whose Plans you see in A and B, has much Affinity with that describ’d in the Fifty-eighth Figure. The Visual CD receives the Sections, from which Perpendiculars are rais’d for the Elevation and Profile of the following Figure, as has been often said. If you would delineate the Back-part separate from the Fore-part, you may do the former by means of the Line CE, and the latter by that of FD.

Eight-sided figures are harder to put in perspective than squares; I'll do my best to make the method as clear as possible. The design shown in A and B is similar to the one described in the Fifty-eighth figure. The visual CD receives the sections, from which perpendiculars are drawn for the elevation and profile of the next figure, as has often been mentioned. If you want to draw the back part separately from the front part, you can do the back part using line CE, and the front part using line FD.


Fig. lx.

Fig. lx.

FIGURA SEXAGESIMA.

Tabernaculum octangulare.

Octagonal tabernacle.

Hoc tabernaculo aliquoties usus fui pro expositione quadraginta horarum. Si colores scitè inducti fuerint in duos ordines telariorum, resectis omnibus quæ ad molem ipsam non pertinent, spectatoribus imponet, & solida videbitur. Oportebit autem exemplar externæ faciei eruere ex parte DF vestigii & elevationis; exemplar interioris faciei eruere ex parte EC, servando in omnibus regulas quas hucusque tradidimus.

I have used this structure multiple times for the presentation of forty hours. If the colors are applied skillfully in two rows of fabric, while cutting away everything that doesn't relate to the structure itself, it will impress the viewers and appear solid. However, it will be necessary to extract the model of the outer face from the section DF of the footprint and elevation; the model of the inner face should be extracted from the section EC, following all the rules we have discussed so far.

The SIXTIETH FIGURE.

An Octangular Tabernacle in Perspective.

An Octagonal Tabernacle in Perspective.

I have sometimes made use of this Tabernacle for the Exposition of the Forty Hours. If the Colours are laid by a skilful Hand, on two Ranges of Cloth, and the Frame cut away according to the Out-line of the Work, they will wonderfully deceive the Eye, and appear as solid; but then the outer Range must be drawn after the Plan and Elevation of the Part DF in the foregoing Figure; and the inner Range after that of EC; in all things observing the Rules hitherto deliver’d.

I’ve got sometimes used this Tabernacle for the Exposition of the Forty Hours. If the colors are applied by a skilled hand, on two layers of fabric, and the frame is cut away according to the outline of the work, they will remarkably deceive the eye and look solid; but then the outer layer must be drawn according to the plan and elevation of the part DF in the previous figure; and the inner layer after that of EC; always following the rules given so far.


Fig. lxi.

Fig. 61.

FIGURA Sexagesimaprima.

Modus erigendi machinas, quæ constant pluribus ordinibus telariorum.

Modus of setting up machines that consist of multiple levels of looms.

Ex figuræ inspectione addisces modum erigendi machinas quæ constant pluribus ordinibus telariorum. Tabernaculum hoc nostrum indiget duobus tantum ordinibus; nam telaria propinquiora oculo exprimunt faciem externam, remotiora exhibent faciem internam. Ne autem lateant stipites quibus telaria sustinentur, medietatem telariorum adumbrare omisimus. Recta LS est linea plani, recta DG est linea horizontalis; ac punctum distantiæ quod cadit extra paginam in recta CG prolongatâ, debet esse remotum à puncto C, quantum in superiori parte figuræ quinquagesimænonæ, punctum distantiæ est remotum à puncto oculi. Eadem horizontalis DG secatur normaliter in C à recta EF, quæ est sectio externæ faciei tabernaculi, & ex C incipiunt divisiones in partes æquales pro reticulatione anterioris faciei telariorum, ut dicemus figurâ sexagesimasecunda. Recta IL quæ est sectio internæ faciei tabernaculi, distat ad libitum à recta EF cui est parallela. Porrò, per divisiones rectæ EF (ut vides in M, N, O) ex puncto distantiæ ducendæ sunt visuales ad rectam IL pro reticulatione aliorum telariorum: distantia enim DC facit ut augere oporteat ea quæ in telariis pinguntur, alioquin justo minora viderentur. Atque hinc dignosces, cur arcus qui in telariis anterioribus pertingeret solum ad B, in posterioribus elevetur usque ad H.

From inspecting the figures, you’ll learn how to set up machines that consist of multiple layers of fabric. Our tent only needs two layers; the closer fabrics depict the outer appearance, while the farther ones show the inner look. To avoid hiding the poles that support the fabric, we've omitted half of the fabrics. The line LS is a straight plane line, while DG is a horizontal line; the distance point that falls outside the page along the extended line CG should be set back from point C, just like, at the top of the figure for the fifty-ninth, the distance point is set back from the eye point. The same horizontal line DG is intersected normally at C by the line EF, which is the section of the tent's outer face, and from C, the divisions into equal parts for the front fabric’s network begin, as we will show in the sixty-second figure. The line IL, which is the section of the tent's inner face, can be spaced freely from the line EF to which it is parallel. Furthermore, through the divisions on line EF (as you see in M, N, O), visual lines should be drawn from the distance point to the line IL for the network of other fabrics: the distance DC requires an increase in what is painted on the fabrics, otherwise, they would appear too small. Thus, you’ll understand why the arc that reaches the front fabrics only goes to B, while in the back, it rises up to H.

Figura sequenti proponemus modum delineandi faciem internam telariorum, adhibita reticulatione externæ faciei: ad intelligentiam verò illius methodi, fiat in hac figurâ recta HP parallela ad DC, ac recta BC dividatur in totidem partes æquales, in quot partes divisa fuerit recta PC.

In the following figure, we will show how to sketch the inner surface of the fabric using the grid from the outer surface. To understand this method, draw a straight line HP parallel to DC, and divide the line BC into the same number of equal parts as the line desktop computer has been divided.

The Sixty-first FIGURE.

The Manner of erecting Machines, that consist of several Ranges of Frames.

How to build machines that consist of multiple rows of frames.

By casting your Eye on the Figure, you’ll readily apprehend the Manner of erecting the several Ranges of Frames. This Tabernacle last describ’d needs only two of them; the Frame next the Eye represents the outer Face, and the hinder Frame the inner Face thereof. I have here describ’d but the Half-Breadth of the said Frames, that you might have a Sight of the Poles and Braces which support them. The Line LS is the Line of the Plan, or Ground-line; the Line DG is that of the Horizon; and the Point of Distance, which falls without the Page CG prolong’d, is as far from the Point C, as the Point of Distance is from the Point of Sight in the upper Part of the Fifty-ninth Figure. The Horizontal DG is cut perpendicularly in C by the Line EF, which is the Section of the outer Face of the Tabernacle; and from the Point C begin the equal Divisions for the Net-work of the foremost Frame, as is shewn in the Sixty-second Figure. The Line IL, which is the Section of the inner Face of the Tabernacle, may at pleasure be set nearer or farther from the Line EF, to which it is parallel. By the Divisions of the Line EF (as M, N, O) Lines are drawn from the Point of Distance to the Perpendicular IL, for the Net-work of that Frame; for the Distance DC obliges the Parts of D to be painted larger, otherwise they will appear less than they really ought. And from hence you may discern, why the Arch, which in the foremost Frame would reach only to B, does in the hindmost rise up to H.

By looking at the diagram, you'll quickly understand how to set up the different rows of frames. This tabernacle I've just described only needs two of them; the frame closest to you shows the outer face, while the frame behind represents the inner face. I've only shown half the width of these frames so you can see the poles and braces that support them. The line LS is the plan line or ground line; the line DG represents the horizon; and the point of distance, which is outside the page along CG extended, is as far from point C as the point of distance is from the point of sight at the top of figure fifty-nine. The horizontal line DG is intersected perpendicularly at C by line EF, which indicates the section of the outer face of the tabernacle. From point C, the equal divisions for the netting of the front frame begin, as shown in figure sixty-two. The line IL, which is the section of the inner face of the tabernacle, can be positioned closer to or farther from line EF, to which it runs parallel. Using the divisions of line EF (like M, N, O), lines are drawn from the point of distance to the perpendicular IL for the netting of that frame; this is because the distance DC requires the parts of D to be painted larger; otherwise, they will look smaller than they should. And from this, you can understand why the arch, which in the front frame reaches only to B, rises up to H in the back frame.

In the following Figure is shewn the Manner of delineating the inner Frame, from the Net-work of the outer Face; for the better understanding of which, make the Line HP in this Figure parallel to DC, and let the Line BC be divided into as many equal Parts, as the Line PC was.

In the following figure, the method of outlining the inner frame from the outer face's network is shown. To better understand this, make the line HP in this figure parallel to DC, and divide the line BC into as many equal parts as the line PC was.


Fig. lxii.

Fig. 62.

FIGURA Sexagesimasecunda.

De reticulandis telariis, quæ repræsentent ædificia solida.

De reticulandis telariis, quæ repræsentant ædificia solida.

Duo exemplaria tabernaculi quæ seorsim delineanda sunt, conjunctim habes in A. Utrisque deservit eadem reticulatio, quam suis numeris insignivimus. Postquam ergo designaveris amplitudinem totius ædificii, cum proportione ad ipsam reticulabis pavimentum B aulæ cujuspiam quod capiat rem totam, ascriptis eisdem numeris quos habet exemplar: ejusque retis ope, ducentur in pavimento lineæ terminativæ totidem membrorum, quot futura sunt telaria exprimentia faciem externam tabernaculi. Ubi hæc parata fuerint, singula disponentur exactè suis locis in ipsomet pavimento; ac funiculis colore nigro imbutis, repetetur in telariis eadem reticulatio, additis ad libitum pluribus visualibus; quarum adjumento dum seorsim pinguntur telaria, duci queant rectæ tendentes ad punctum oculi seu perspectivæ. Alia quoque reticulatio super pavimento necessaria est pro internâ facie tabernaculi: ac duæ reticulationes pavimenti eam inter se proportionem habebunt, quam habent divisiones rectarum IL, EF, figuræ sexagesimæprimæ. Hujus retis ductu fient lineæ terminativæ telariorum cum reliquis, ut jam indicavimus.

You’ve got two models of the tabernacle that need to be outlined separately, which you can find together in A. Both share the same grid, which we have marked with their respective numbers. Once you've defined the size of the entire structure, you can layout the flooring in B in a way that fits the entire design, using the same numbers as the model: and with the help of this grid, there will be guideline lines on the flooring corresponding to how many panels will represent the outer appearance of the tabernacle. When these are prepared, each piece will be arranged precisely in its designated spot on the flooring; and with black-dyed strings, the same grid will be repeated in the panels, adding as many visual elements as needed. As the panels are painted separately, straight lines can be drawn leading to the vanishing point or perspective. Another grid is also necessary on the flooring for the inner face of the tabernacle: and the two flooring grids will maintain the same proportions as the divisions of the lines IL, EF, of the sixtieth figures. Following this grid will create the guideline lines for the panels along with the others, as we've indicated before.

Juxta hanc methodum nequeunt duci lineæ terminativæ interioris faciei, nisi fiat in pavimento aliud rete deleto priori, quod esset valdè laboriosum. Postquam ergo ex vestigio figuræ quinquagesimænonæ eruta sint duo exemplaria, in exemplar faciei externæ transferatur recta PC figuræ sexagesimæprimæ, in exemplar faciei internæ transferatur recta BC. Si autem recta PC divisa fuerit in quindecim partes æquales, dividetur BC in quindecim partes æquales, atque ope harum divisionum reticulare oportebit utrumque exemplar. Porrò licet quadrata in reti exemplaris faciei externæ sint majora quadratis exemplaris internæ faciei, nihilominus idem rete pavimenti deserviet pro ducendis lineis terminativis utriusque faciei. Quæ dicta sunt de duobus exemplaribus, valent de aliis quotcunque. Exempli gratiâ; si construere placeat quinque ordines telariorum, fient quinque exemplaria in papyro. Si in omnibus exemplaribus usurpetur eadem reticulatio, in pavimento facere oportet quinque diversas reticulationes. Si autem in exemplaribus fiant quinque diversæ reticulationes, in pavimento sufficit una reticulatio.

Following this method, you can't draw the boundary lines of the inner face unless you create a new net on the floor, replacing the old one, which would be quite labor-intensive. Once you have extracted two copies from the shape of the 50-sided figure, transfer the line PC to the external face copy, and transfer the line BC to the internal face copy. If the line computer is divided into fifteen equal parts, then BC should also be divided into fifteen equal parts, and both copies will need to be gridded accordingly. Furthermore, although the squares in the grid of the external face copy may be larger than those in the internal face copy, the same grid will still be used to guide the boundary lines of both faces. What has been said about the two copies applies to any number of others. For example, if you want to create five rows of weavers, you will need five copies on paper. If the same grid is used in all copies, you will need to create five different grids on the floor. However, if there are five different grids in the copies, then a single grid on the floor will be sufficient.

Curandum est ut singula retis quadrata in telariis sint exacta, omnesque illorum anguli sint recti. Modus expeditissimus faciendi angulos rectos est hujusmodi. Posito uno crure circini in puncto F lineæ rectæ EF, alioque crure posito ubilibet in O, fiet circulus GFI, & ex puncto G diameter GI. Si recta HF transeat per puncta I & F, est normalis ad EF.

It is important that the squares you create on your grid are precise, and that all their corners are right angles. The fastest way to make right angles is as follows. Place one leg of a compass at point F on the straight line EF, and the other leg anywhere at O, which will create the circle GFI, and from point G, draw the diameter GI. If line HF passes through points I and F, it is perpendicular to EF.

The Sixty-second FIGURE.

Of making the Net-work on Frames, for representing the Architecture as solid.

On creating the network on frames to represent the architecture as solid.

You have jointly in A, the two Designs of a Tabernacle, which are to be drawn separately; the same Net-work serving for both, which is also mark’d with Numbers. When you have therefore resolv’d on the Size of your Work, on the Pavement of some Room capacious enough make a Net-work answerable, and affix thereto the Numbers, as in your Copy: By the Help of which, you may on the Pavement describe the Out-line of all those Members that are requisite to the outer Frame of the Tabernacle. This being done, let the Frame be laid exactly in its place on the said Pavement, and with a black Line strike thereon the same Net-work; adding as many visual Lines as you please, which will be of Use for drawing Lines to the Point of Sight, when you come to paint the Frames asunder. Another Net-work on the Pavement is also necessary for the inner Face of the Tabernacle, which should bear such Proportion to this, as the Divisions of the Line IL do to those of EF in the Sixty-first Figure; and by this means the Out-lines of the inner Frame, &c. may be drawn, as has been shewn already.

You have together in A, the two designs of a Tabernacle, which should be drawn separately; the same network can be used for both, marked with numbers. Once you have decided on the size of your work, create a network on the floor of a room large enough to accommodate it, and label it with the numbers as in your reference. With this, you can outline all the components needed for the outer frame of the Tabernacle on the floor. After that, place the frame exactly where it should go on the floor and draw the same network with a black line; you can add as many visual lines as you want, which will be helpful for drawing lines to the vanishing point when you come to paint the frames separately. Another network on the floor is also necessary for the inner face of the Tabernacle, which should be proportionate to this one, similar to how the divisions of line IL relate to those of EF in the sixty-first figure; this way, the outlines of the inner frame, &c. can be drawn, as has already been shown.

Thus the Out-line of the inner Face can’t be describ’d, without rubbing out the first Net-work, and making a second on the Pavement; which would be very troublesom. Wherefore, from the Plan of the Fifty-ninth Figure, take the two Designs, and transfer the Line PC of the Sixty-first Figure on the outer Face, and the Line BC on the inner Face. Then if PC were divided into fifteen equal Parts, BC shall be divided in the same manner, and by these Divisions make the Net-work on each Design. And although the Squares of the outer Face be larger than those of the inner one, the same Net-work may nevertheless serve for giving the Out-line of both. What has been said of these two Designs, may be understood of many. For Instance; if five Ranges of Frames were requir’d, five Designs must be made in Paper. If in all the Designs the same Net-work be us’d, then five several Net-works must be made on the Pavement; but if the Designs have five different, then one Net-work on the Pavement will suffice.

Thus, the outline of the inner face can't be described without erasing the first network and creating a second one on the pavement, which would be very troublesome. Therefore, from the plan of the fifty-ninth figure, take the two designs and transfer line PC from the sixty-first figure on the outer face and line BC on the inner face. Then, if PC is divided into fifteen equal parts, BC should be divided in the same way, and use these divisions to create the network on each design. Although the squares on the outer face are larger than those on the inner face, the same network can still serve to outline both. What has been stated about these two designs can also apply to many others. For instance, if five rows of frames are required, five designs must be created on paper. If the same network is used in all the designs, then five separate networks must be created on the pavement; however, if the designs are different, then one network on the pavement will be enough.

You must be very careful that all the Squares of the Net-work be exactly divided, and at right Angles. The ready way of making a right Angle is thus: Placing one Foot of the Compasses in the Point F of the Line EF, and the other at pleasure in O, describe the Circle GFI; and from the Point G draw the Diameter GI. The Line FH drawn by the Points FI, shall be perpendicular to FE.

You need to be very careful that all the squares in the grid are divided perfectly and at right angles. A simple way to create a right angle is as follows: Place one end of the compass at point F on line EF and the other end anywhere at point O to draw circle GFI; then draw the diameter GI from point G. The line FH drawn from points FI will be perpendicular to line FE.


Fig. lxiii.

Fig. 63.

FIGURA Sexagesimatertia.

Vestigia ædificii quadrati.

Square building remnants.

Vestigium geometricum A hujus ædificii habet in B suam deformationem. Discrimen inter pilas C & D oritur ex eo, quòd in C posita sint vestigia stylobatarum, in D autem posita sint vestigia coronicum.

The geometric path of this building has its deformation in B. The difference between columns C & D arises from the fact that column C has traces of the stylobate, while column D has traces of the cornice.

The Sixty-third FIGURE.

The Plan of a square Design.

The Plan of a square Design.

The Geometrical Plan of this Design A, is brought into Perspective in B. The Difference between the Parts C and D arises from hence, that the Plan of the Pedestals is plac’d in C, and that of the Cornice in D.

The geometric layout of this Design A is shown in perspective in B. The difference between parts C and D comes from the fact that the plan of the pedestals is situated in C, while that of the cornice is in D.


Fig. lxiv.

Fig. 64.

FIGURA Sexagesimaquarta.

Ædificium quadratum.

Square building.

Ex deformatione vestigii & elevationis, methodo consuetâ eruitur imago totius ædificii, quæ potest esse exemplar aræ maximæ alicujus Ecclesiæ. Hanc machinam, non sine communi approbatione, aliquoties adhibui, in apparatu quadraginta horarum; locum in medio vacuum occupantibus Angelis cum nubibus, additâ figurarum aliquot copiâ in parte inferiori. Modus faciendi in telariis remotioribus ab oculo partem tholi rotundi quam hic vides, deducitur ex iis quæ tradidimus in projectione circulorum.

From the deformation of the footprint and elevation, the traditional method produces an image of the entire building, which can serve as a model for the high altar of any church. I have used this device, not without common approval, several times in the setup for the forty hours; it occupies a place in the middle of the empty area filled with Angels and clouds, adding several figures in the lower part. The method for creating in more remote weavings from the eye is derived from what we have shared regarding the projection of circles.

The Sixty-fourth FIGURE.

A square Design in Perspective.

A square design in perspective.

From the Plan and Upright in Perspective, this finish’d Piece of the whole Work is delineated after the usual Manner, and may serve for the Design of a great Altar in a Church. I have sometimes, for the Solemnity of the Forty Hours, expos’d this painted on a Machine, with an universal Satisfaction; Angels with Clouds possessing the higher part of the Hemisphere within, and Groups of Figures the lower part. The Manner of designing on the inner Frame, that part of the said Cupola which you here see, is deduc’d from what has been before said of putting Circles into Perspective.

From the plan and upright perspective, this finished piece of the entire work is depicted in the usual way and can serve as the design for a grand altar in a church. Sometimes, for the solemnity of the Forty Hours, I have displayed this painted on a frame, receiving general admiration; angels with clouds occupy the upper part of the hemisphere, and groups of figures are in the lower part. The way of designing on the inner frame, that part of the said dome which you see here, is based on what has been previously mentioned about placing circles in perspective.


Fig. lxv.

Fig. 65.

FIGURA Sexagesimaquinta.

Vestigium ædificii rotundi opticè imminutum.

Imminent optical reduction of the round building.

Qui sedulam operam in circulis deformandis non posuerint, eosque minimo negotio ex usu describere nequiverint, frustra conabuntur projicere vestigia ædificiorum rotundorum. Ad vitandam confusionem, proderit in vestigio notare primùm lineas occultas membrorum præcipuorum; iisque translatis in elevationem, addere sensim reliquas. Hac industriâ ego ipse in hoc schemate usus sum. Quum autem experimento didicerim summam arduitatem harum descriptionum, aliam regulam adhibere jamdiu cœpi, quam, ut suprà diximus, in aliud Opus reservamus.

Those who have not put diligent effort into shaping circles and have failed to describe them with minimal work will struggle in vain to discard the remnants of round buildings. To avoid confusion, it will help to first mark the hidden lines of the main components; by transferring these into elevation, you can gradually add the remaining parts. I have personally used this method in this plan. However, after I learned through experience how intense these descriptions can be, I have long started applying another rule, which we mentioned above and reserve for another work.

The Sixty-fifth FIGURE.

The Plan of a Circular Work in Perspective.

The Plan of a Circular Work in Perspective.

They that have not diligently apply’d themselves to the putting Circles into Perspective, and, by a constant Practice, render’d the Work familiar to them, will in vain attempt that of the Plans of round Buildings. To prevent Confusion, you’ll do well, first to mark the occult Lines of the principal Members; and after those are transferr’d into the Upright, then proceed to the rest, as I myself did in this Figure. But having found by Experience, the great Difficulty of describing these round things, I have long since made use of another Method, which, as I said before, is reserv’d for another Volume.

Those who haven’t put in the effort to understand how to put circles into perspective, and who haven’t practiced consistently to make the task second nature, will struggle to create plans for round buildings. To avoid confusion, it’s a good idea to first mark the hidden lines of the main components; once those are transferred to the vertical view, you can move on to the rest, just as I did in this illustration. However, after experiencing the challenges of depicting these round forms, I’ve since adopted a different method, which, as I mentioned before, is saved for another book.


FIG. LXVI.

FIG. 66.

FIGURA Sexagesimasexta.

Projectio ædificii rotundi.

Design of a circular building.

Mirifice oculis imponunt imagines rerum rotundarum, si omnibus resectis quæ ad eas non pertinent, exactè delineatæ ac depictæ fuerint. Hanc figuram ex vestigio eruere oportebit methodo consuetâ, eamque in Templo S. Ignatii Collegii Romani construxi pro feriâ V & VI Hebdomadæ sanctioris. Intra arcum, super altari, locus erat urnæ sepulcrali, cum Venerabili Sacramento. Sub altari visebatur simulacrum Christi Domini è Cruce depositi: in medio columnarum, imago Beatæ Virginis dolentis; super balaustiis Angeli lugentes, cum instrumentis cruciatuum Salvatoris.

Awesome images of round objects captivate the eyes if all unrelated elements are precisely outlined and depicted. This design must be worked out using the usual method, and I constructed it in the Church of St. Ignatius at the Roman College for the holy days of the 5th and 6th weeks of Lent. Inside the arch, above the altar, there was a place for a burial urn, along with the Blessed Sacrament. Under the altar, there was a statue of Christ taken down from the Cross; in the middle of the columns, the image of the Sorrowful Virgin; above the balustrades, angels mourning, holding instruments of the Savior's torment.

The Sixty-sixth FIGURE.

A Circular Design in Perspective.

A Circular Design in Perspective.

The Appearance of round things, if well design’d, masterly painted, and the Frame cut away to the Out-line of the Work, do wonderfully deceive the Eye. This Figure is drawn from the Plan, as usual; and was put in execution by me, in the Church of S. Ignatius of the Roman College, for the Thursday and Friday of the Holy Week. Within the Arch, on the Altar, was plac’d a sepulchral Urn containing the Holy Sacrament. Beneath the Altar was laid a Figure of our Saviour Christ taken down from the Cross. In the midst of the Tambour, was a Picture of the Blessed Virgin in extreme Sorrow; and on the Ballustrade, Angels mourning, bearing the Instruments of the Passion.

The appearance of round objects, when designed well, skillfully painted, and framed to match the shape of the artwork, can really trick the eye. This figure is based on the usual plan and was created by me in the Church of S. Ignatius of the Roman College for the Thursday and Friday of Holy Week. Above the altar, there was a sepulchral urn holding the Holy Sacrament. Beneath the altar, a figure of our Savior Christ was displayed as if taken down from the cross. In the center of the tambour, there was a picture of the Blessed Virgin in deep sorrow, and on the balustrade, angels were mourning, holding the instruments of the Passion.


Fig. lxvii.

Fig. 67.

FIGURA Sexagesimaseptima.

Vestigium geometricum, ac prima præparatio ad figuram septuagesimamprimam.

Vestigium geometricum, and the first preparation for the seventy-first figure.

Egregiam adeò speciem præsetulit, atque oculis adeò imposuit machina quam construxi anno 1685, pro supplicatione quadraginta horarum, in Templo Urbis Farnesiano, ut decreverim satisfacere Studiosis, publici juris faciendo non modò imaginem totius ædificii, sed etiam illius vestigia & elevationes: quæ omnia eâ diligentiâ delineavimus, veluti Opus ipsum non pennicillo colorandum, sed lapidibus extruendum fuisset. Spatia nigrantia soliditatem designant parietum & columnarum. Cæteræ lineæ sunt crepidines stylobatarum & coronicum. Initium delineationis fiet ab iis membris, ex quibus oriuntur lineæ occultæ positæ in A, (quæ autem dicuntur de hac medietate, intelligi debent de aliâ) ne multitudo linearum confusionem pariat. In B lineæ curvæ occultæ sunt vestigium tholi qui complet summitatem ædificii. Vestigium C exhibet ambulacrum interius. Omisimus autem vestigium theatri, quia paginæ angustia illud non capit.

I gave a presentation a remarkable structure and created such an impressive machine back in 1685 for a 40-hour prayer session at the Farnese Temple that I decided to make it accessible to scholars by making the image of the entire building public. I’ve included the footprints and elevations, all drawn with such care as if the work wasn’t meant to be colored with a brush, but built with stones. The dark areas represent the solidity of the walls and columns. The other lines show the bases of the stylobates and the crowns. The drawing will start from those parts from which the hidden lines originate in A, (and those discussed here should be understood as pertaining to another set) so that the multitude of lines doesn’t cause confusion. In B, the hidden curved lines represent the trace of the dome that completes the top of the structure. The trace in C shows the interior corridor. However, we omitted the trace of the theater because the page’s narrowness doesn’t accommodate it.

The Sixty-seventh FIGURE.

The Geometrical Plan, and first Preparation to the Seventy-first Figure.

The Geometrical Plan, and first Preparation for the Seventy-first Figure.

The Machine which I erected in the Year 1685, in the Church Farneze, or Jesuits Church at Rome, for the Devotions of the Forty Hours; had so admirable an Effect, and so pleasantly deceiv’d the Eye, that I resolv’d to gratify the Studious, not only with a general View, but with the Plan and Elevation thereof; all which was perform’d with such Exactness, that the Work itself seem’d rather to consist of solid Stones, than to be wrought by the Painter’s Hand. The hatch’d Part denotes the Solidity of the Walls and Columns. The other shews the Breaks and Projectures of the Pedestals and Cornices. Lest many Lines should cause Confusion, begin with those Members, which produce the occult Lines on the Side A; understanding the same also of the other half. In B the occult curv’d Lines are the Plan of the Cupola which crowns this Structure. The Plan C is that of the inner Vestibule, but that of the Theater is here omitted, through Want of Room in the Page.

The Machine I built in 1685, in the Church Farneze, or Jesuits Church at Rome, for the Devotions of the Forty Hours; had such an amazing effect and deceived the eye so well, that I decided to satisfy those who study this by providing not just a general view, but also the plans and elevation of it; all done with such precision that the work itself seemed to be made of solid stones rather than created by a painter's hand. The shaded part indicates the solidity of the walls and columns. The other shows the breaks and projections of the pedestals and cornices. To avoid confusion from too many lines, start with those parts that create the hidden lines on Side A; this also applies to the other half. In B, the hidden curved lines are the plan of the Cupola that tops this structure. Plan C is for the inner vestibule, but the plan for the theater is omitted here due to lack of space on the page.


FIG. LXVIII.

FIG. 68.

FIGURA Sexagesimaoctava.

Elevatio geometrica vestigii præcedentis, & secunda præparatio ad figuram septuagesimamprimam.

Elevating the geometric outline of the previous mark, and the second preparation for the seventieth figure.

In hoc schemate habes elevationem ædificii sectam in longum, quam figurâ septuagesimâ opticè projiciemus: eisdemque membris constare videbis elevationem deformatam, quibus constat elevatio geometrica. Hinc disces ad excogitandas hujusmodi machinas, eandem Architecturæ scientiam in Pictore necessariam esse, quæ ad construenda solida ædificia exigitur in Architecto.

In this diagram, you have the building's elevation drawn out in length, which we will project optically in a seventy-degree angle: you will also see that the distorted elevation is made up of the same components as the geometric elevation. From this, you will learn to design such machines, understanding that the knowledge of architecture is just as necessary for a painter as it is for an architect building solid structures.

The Sixty-eighth FIGURE.

The Geometrical Elevation of the foregoing Plan, and second Preparation to the Seventy-first Figure.

The Geometric Elevation of the above Plan, and the second Preparation for the Seventy-first Figure.

In this Figure you have the Elevation of the aforesaid Structure dissected lengthwise; the Perspective thereof is describ’d in the Seventieth Figure; and you may observe that both of them consist of the same Members: whence you may perceive, that for designing things of this kind, the Painter ought to have no less Skill in Architecture, than is requir’d for the Execution of solid Works.

In this figure, you can see the elevation of the structure displayed lengthwise; the perspective is shown in the seventieth figure. You’ll notice that both representations consist of the same components. This shows that when designing these types of structures, the artist should have just as much skill in architecture as is needed for the construction of solid works.


Fig. lxix.

Fig. 69.

FIGURA Sexagesimanona.

Deformatio vestigii figuræ sexagesimæseptimæ, & præparatio tertia ad figuram septuagesimamprimam.

Deformation of the figure of the sixty-seventh and preparation for the figure of the seventy-first.

Artificium projectionis vestigii hujus, explicatum à nobis est figurâ quadragesimasecundâ. Nimirum, ut parallelæ sint invicem distantiores, lineam plani deorsum protraximus, ut ex intuitu figuræ statim cognosces.

The display of this artifact has been explained by us in the figure of the forty-second square. Clearly, to keep the parallels spaced apart, we’ve extended a line down the plane so that you can immediately recognize it from the figure.

The Sixty-ninth FIGURE.

The Plan of the Sixty-seventh Figure in Perspective, and third Preparation to the Seventy-first Figure.

The Plan of the 67th Figure in Perspective, and the third Preparation for the 71st Figure.

The Artifice us’d in projecting the Perspective of this Plan, has been already shewn in the Forty-second Figure; namely, that for giving the greater Distance between the Parallels, the Ground-line is drawn much lower than its true Place; as is manifest on Inspection of the Figure.

The technique used to create the perspective of this plan has already been shown in the forty-second figure; specifically, to give the appearance of greater distance between the parallels, the ground line is drawn much lower than its actual position, which is clear upon looking at the figure.


Fig. lxx.

Fig. lxx.

FIGURA SEPTUAGESIMA.

Deformatio elevationis figuræ sexagesimæoctavæ, & præparatio quarta ad figuram septuagesimamprimam.

Deformation of the elevation of the thirty-eighth figure, and the fourth preparation for the seventy-first figure.

Quæ dicta sunt de projectione vestigii nostri ædificii, habent locum in elevatione. Nimirum, ut parallelæ invicem notabiliter distarent, usi sumus industriâ quam declaravimus figurâ quadragesimasecundâ.

What has been said about the projection of our building's footprint applies to the elevation. Indeed, to keep them notably separated in parallel, we used the technique we outlined in figure forty-two.

The Seventieth FIGURE.

The Perspective of the Elevation of the Sixty-eighth Figure, and the fourth Preparation to the Seventy-first Figure.

The View of the Rise of the Sixty-eighth Figure, and the fourth Preparation for the Seventy-first Figure.

What has been said of the Perspective-Plan of this Structure, is also here practis’d in the Elevation; namely, that the Parallels might be sufficiently distinct, the Perpendiculars are drawn more remote from the Point of Sight, as was shewn in the Forty-second Figure.

What has been said about the Perspective-Plan of this Structure is also applied here in the Elevation; that is, to ensure the Parallels are clearly defined, the Perpendiculars are drawn farther away from the Point of Sight, as demonstrated in the Forty-second Figure.


Fig. lxxi.

Fig. 71.

FIGURA Septuagesimaprima.

Theatrum repræsentans Nuptias Canæ Galilææ, constructum Romæ, anno 1685. in expositione Ven. Sacramenti in Templo Farnesiano Societatis JESU.

Theater representing the Wedding at Cana in Galilee, built in Rome, in the year 1685, during the exposition of the Venerable Sacrament in the Farnese Temple of the Society of Jesus.

Ex antecedentibus præparationibus eruimus projectionem nobilis hujus Architecturæ, quæ oculos implebat tum ad lucem solis diurnam, tum præcipuè ad lumen candelarum; ex quibus multæ palam erant expositæ, aliæ omnino latebant, ut illuminarent sex diversos ordines telariorum quibus tota machina constabat, non computando in hoc numero telaria, quæ in medio arcûs maximi exprimebant nubes refertas Angelis adorantibus Venerabile Sacramentum. Nubes istas omisimus, ne absconderentur partes interiorum ædificiorum. In disponendis autem ordinibus telariorum, servatus est modus quem declaravi figurâ sexagesimaprima & sexagesimasecunda; ac præterea in eligenda eorum distantia curatum fuit, ut candelæ in parte postica telariorum collocatæ, illuminarent faciem telariorum interiorum. Porrò quot membra præcipua in duabus faciebus majoribus, totidem distincta telaria numerabantur, quorum proinde connexiones discerni vix poterant; eorumque aliquot paria ferreis hamulis copulata erant, ut explicari ac replicari possent, ad faciliorem tractationem diuturnioremque conservationem.

From the earlier preparations, we developed the design of this noble Architecture, which captivated the eyes with both the daylight and especially the light of candles; many were openly displayed, while others were entirely hidden, illuminating six different levels of the tapestry that made up the entire structure, not including the tapestries depicting clouds filled with angels worshiping the Venerable Sacrament in the center of the main arch. We omitted these clouds to avoid obscuring parts of the interior buildings. In organizing the tapestry layers, we followed the method I illustrated with the figures sixty-one and sixty-two; moreover, in choosing their spacing, care was taken to position the candles at the back of the tapestries, ensuring they illuminated the front of the inner tapestries. Furthermore, the number of main components in the two major facades matched the number of distinct tapestries, making it difficult to discern their connections; some pairs of these were joined with iron hooks, allowing them to be unfolded and folded for easier handling and longer-lasting maintenance.

Qui hucusque sequuti me fuerint, nihil dubito quin suum iter felicissimè sint prosequuturi; atque Opera his nostris majora melioraque inventuri.

Those who have followed me this far can be sure that they will continue on their journey successfully; and in our work, they will discover greater and better things.

The Seventy-first FIGURE.

A Theater representing the Marriage of Cana in Galilee, erected in the Jesuits Church at Rome, in the Year 1685; for the Solemnity of exposing the Holy Sacrament.

A theater showcasing the Wedding at Cana in Galilee, built in the Jesuits Church in Rome, in the year 1685; for the special occasion of displaying the Holy Sacrament.

From the foregoing Preparations, is drawn the Perspective of this noble Piece of Architecture; which struck the Eye when seen by Day-light, but was more especially surprizing by Candle-light; many of the Candles being expos’d to Sight, and others altogether hidden, to illuminate the six different Ranges of Scenes, of which the whole Work consisted, without reckoning that in the midst of the great Arch, representing Clouds fill’d with Angels adoring the blessed Sacrament. Those Clouds are here omitted, that the inner Parts of the Work might be the better seen. In disposing the several Ranges of Scenes, the same Method was observ’d, which was deliver’d in the Sixty-first and Sixty-second Figures; and great Care was also taken in their Distances, that the Candles plac’d on the Back of one of them might illuminate the Face of the other behind it. Moreover, each Scene consisted of as many parts, as there were principal Members in the two greater Façades; so that the Joints were scarcely discernible: and some Pairs of them being coupl’d with Hinges, folded and unfolded, for the more easy managing and preserving them.

From the preparations mentioned above, the perspective of this impressive piece of architecture comes to life. It catches the eye in daylight, but is especially striking by candlelight; several candles are visible, while others remain hidden, illuminating the six different ranges of scenes that make up the entire work. Not to mention, in the center of the grand arch are clouds filled with angels worshipping the blessed Sacrament. Those clouds are left out here so that the inner parts of the work can be more easily seen. In arranging the various ranges of scenes, the same method was used as described in the sixty-first and sixty-second figures. Great care was also taken with their distances, ensuring that the candles placed at the back of one illuminated the front of the one behind it. Additionally, each scene was made up of as many parts as there were main elements in the two larger façades, making the joints nearly invisible. Some pairs were connected with hinges, allowing them to fold and unfold for easier handling and maintenance.

I doubt not but those who have follow’d me thus far, will be encourag’d so to prosecute their Studies, as to be able to design even greater and more noble Works, than these of mine.

I have no doubt that those who have followed me this far will be encouraged to continue their studies so they can create even greater and more impressive works than mine.


Fig. lxxii.

Fig. 72.

FIGURA Septuagesimasecunda.

De theatris scenicis.

In theater settings.

Theatris quæ jam delineavimus affinia sunt theatra scenica: in his tamen non adeò facilè reperitur punctum oculi seu perspectivæ. Præterea, quia ex obliquitate canalium intra quos moventur scenæ, oritur ut lineæ rectæ quæ videri debent parallelæ ad lineam plani, non debeant esse parallelæ sed obliquæ, harum delineatio difficultate non caret. Incommodum istud vitari posset adhibendo canales parallelos ad poscenium, ut alicubi fieri solet, præsertim in Germaniâ. Nihilominus usus Italicus affert hoc adjumentum, ut illi quibus incumbit suggerere actoribus, vel scenas movere, aliisque similibus præesse, facilius lateant & liberius fungantur munere suo.

Theaters that we have outlined are similar to stage theaters: however, it is not so easy to find the focal point or perspective in these. Furthermore, due to the angle of the channels in which the scenes move, the straight lines that should appear parallel to the plane line need to be slanted rather than parallel, making their depiction quite challenging. This issue could be avoided by using parallel channels to the stage, as is sometimes done, especially in Germany. Nevertheless, the Italian method provides this advantage, allowing those responsible for suggesting to the actors, moving the scenes, and overseeing other similar tasks to blend in more easily and perform their roles more freely.

Ut brevem summam habeas eorum quæ deinde latius declaraturi sumus, hanc figuram contemplare. 1, 2, 3, 4, est vestigium aulæ quæ habet in longitudine centumviginti palmos Romanos, in latitudine sexaginta palmos; ut ostendit scala S triginta palmorum. Medietatem loci occupat theatrum, medietatem obtinent podia & loca spectatorum. O punctum in quo uniuntur lineæ visuales, D locus pro apparentiis rerum magis ac magis distantium. BC locus poscenii. HH sunt canales obliqui, quorum latitudo est dupla latitudinis scenarum. FG frons & facies theatri. AO ejus profunditas aut longitudo. E locus pro psaltibus, tibicinibus, & fistulatoribus. K spatium pro spectatoribus. I vestigium podiorum. L scalæ podiorum. N ipsorum elevatio. M declivitas tabulati, cum sectione & elevatione theatri, & scenis ex latere inspectis, quæ cum suis canalibus congruunt, ut demonstrant lineæ occultæ. OO linea normalis ad lineam horizontalem. P & Q elevatio scenarum coram inspectarum, quæ introrsum flectuntur; & in latitudine congruunt cum canalibus vestigii B, in altitudine cum sectionibus elevationis M; ut constat ex lineis occultis. In eâdem elevatione M pars altitudinis tribuenda est scenis, pars laquearibus R, per quæ jungitur unumquodque par telariorum. VV lineæ ad explorandum an detur vacuum inter scenas & laquearia, vel inter scenas, vel inter laquearia. In quibusdam autem scenis, loco laquearium pinguntur nubes & aer.

To give you a brief summary of what we will explain more thoroughly later, take a look at this diagram. 1, 2, 3, 4 illustrates a space that is 120 Roman palms in length and 60 palms in width; this is shown by the scale S of 30 palms. The theater occupies half of the area, while platforms and audience spaces take up the other half. O is the point where the visual lines converge, D is the location for apparent things that are farther away. BC indicates the spot for the stage. HH are the angled channels, whose width is double that of the stages. FG is the front and face of the theater. AO denotes its depth or length. E is the space for singers, pipers, and musicians. K is the area for spectators. I shows the trace of the platforms. L represents the steps of the platforms. N indicates their elevation. M refers to the slope of the flooring, along with the layout and elevation of the theater and the scenes seen from the side, which align with their channels, as shown by the hidden lines. OO is the normal line to the horizontal line. P & Q show the elevation of the observed stages, which curve inward; they align in width with the channels indicated by B, and in height with the sections of elevation M; as demonstrated by the hidden lines. In the same elevation M, part of the height is assigned to the stages, and part to the ceilings R, through which each pair of curtains is joined. VV are the lines used to check if there is a gap between the stages and ceilings, or between the stages, or between the ceilings. In some scenes, instead of ceilings, clouds and air are painted.

The Seventy-second FIGURE.

Of Scenes for the Stage.

Stage Scene Ideas.

Scenes for the Stage have very much Affinity with those lately describ’d, but the Point of Sight is not so easily found in these; and from the Obliquity of the Grooves in which the Scenes run, it comes to pass, that the right Lines which ought to appear parallel to the Line of the Plan, must not be drawn parallel thereto, but oblique; which is a Work of some Difficulty. This indeed may be avoided, by fixing the Grooves parallel to the Poscene; as is usual in some Places, especially in Germany. Nevertheless, the Italian Manner has this Advantage; That those who are employ’d to prompt the Actors, and shift the Scenes, &c. are less expos’d to Sight, in the Performance of their Business.

Stage scenes have a lot in common with those described recently, but finding the right perspective in these isn't as straightforward. Because the tracks where the scenes move are angled, the lines that should look parallel to the plan must actually be drawn at an angle, which can be tricky. This can be avoided by making the tracks parallel to the backdrop, as is common in some places, especially in Germany. However, the Italian style has the advantage that those responsible for prompting the actors and changing the scenes, & c., are less visible while doing their jobs.

In this Figure I have given you an Abridgment of those things, which shall hereafter be more enlarg’d on. The Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, denote the Area of a Hall an hundred and twenty Roman Palms in Length, and sixty in Breadth; as is manifest from the Scale of thirty Palms mark’d S. Half this Space is taken up by the Stage, the other half by the Spectators. O is the Point in which the visual Lines concenter. D is the Place of those things that are to appear most remote. BC is the Place of the Poscene. HH are the oblique Grooves, whose Lengths are double the Breadth of the Scenes. FG is the Front of the Stage. AO is its Depth or Length. E is the Place for the Musick. K is the Room for Spectators. I is the Plan of the Galleries. L the Stairs to the same. N is the Elevation of the Galleries. M shews the Declivity of the Floor, with the Section and Elevation of the Stage and Scenes view’d on the Side; answering their respective Grooves, as the occult Lines demonstrate. OO is a Line perpendicular to that of the Horizon. P and Q are the Elevation of the Scenes view’d in Front, turning inwards, in Breadth agreeing with the Length of the Grooves of the Plan B; and in Height answering that of the Sections of the Elevation M; as is evident from the occult Lines. In this Profile M, part of the Height belongs to the Scenes, and part to their Soffites, or Ceilings, R; where each Pair of these Frames are join’d. VV are the Lines by which is espy’d what Vacancy there is either between the Scenes and their Ceilings, between the Scenes themselves, or between their respective Ceilings; though in some Scenes the Place of these last is supply’d by painting therein the Air with Clouds, &c.

In this figure, I've provided a summary of the details that will be explained further later on. The numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 indicate the area of a hall that's 120 Roman palms long and 60 palms wide, as shown on the scale marked S with a measurement of 30 palms. Half of this space is occupied by the stage, while the other half is for the audience. O is the point where the visual lines converge. D is where things intended to seem most distant are placed. BC is the positioning of the backdrop. HH are the angled grooves, which are twice the width of the scenes. FG is the front of the stage, and AO is its depth or length. E is where the musicians are. K refers to the area for spectators. I shows the layout of the galleries, and L indicates the stairs to them. N represents the height of the galleries. M illustrates the slope of the floor, with side views of the stage and scenes, corresponding to their respective grooves, as the hidden lines show. OO is a line that is vertical to the horizon line. P and Q show the height of the scenes viewed from the front, curling inward, with widths matching the lengths of the grooves in plan B and heights that correspond to the sections in elevation M, as shown by the hidden lines. In this profile M, part of the height is attributed to the scenes and part to their soffits or ceilings, R; where each pair of these frames are connected. VV are the lines used to identify any gaps between the scenes and their ceilings, between the scenes themselves, or between their respective ceilings; although in some scenes, the place of the latter is filled by painting the sky with clouds, &c.


Fig. lxxiii.

Fig. 73.

FIGURA Septuagesimatertia.

Aliud vestigium theatri, ubi de modo inveniendi ejus punctum.

Aliud vestigium theatri, ubi de modo inveniendi ejus punctum.

Si pingendæ sint scenæ theatri alicujus antea constructi, delineare oportebit vestigium geometricum ex ipso erutum, (ad formam vestigii quod cernis in hac paginâ) ut inveniatur longitudo theatri, seu distantia quam ejus punctum habet à puncto A: id autem nullo negotio fiet, accipiendo distantias BC inter primos canales, & DE inter ultimos, ac ducendo visuales MO, NO: nam theatrum habebit longitudinem AO, ac punctum perspectivæ in vestigio theatri erit O. Præterea scire oportebit longitudinem & latitudinem canalium, eorumque numerum, distantias, & flexus; ac præcipuè curandum est, ut licet sint obliqui ad lineam MN, sint invicem paralleli in unoquoque latere, ac singuli tangant lineas MO, NO. Jam si rectæ AO fiat æqualis recta FA, in F erit punctum distantiæ: adeoque si theatrum juxta methodum à nobis tradendam depictum fuerit, spectatori qui consistat in F apparebit veluti tabula picta juxta leges perspectivæ, posita in A.

If the scenery of an already built theater is to be rendered, it will need to outline a geometric footprint taken directly from it (like the footprint you see on this page), to determine the length of the theater, or the distance from its point to point A: this can be done easily by taking the distances BC between the front channels and DE between the back, and drawing visual lines MO, NO: for the theater will have a length of AO, and the perspective point on the theater's footprint will be O. Additionally, you need to know the length and width of the channels, their number, distances, and bends; and it is especially important that although they may be slanted to the line MN, they remain parallel to each other on each side, and each touches the lines MO, NO. Now, if the straight line AO is made equal to the straight line FA, point F will be the distance point: therefore, if the theater has been depicted according to our method, it will appear to the observer standing at F as if it were a painted picture according to the laws of perspective, placed at A.

The Seventy-third FIGURE.

Another Plan of a Theater, with the Method of finding the Point of Sight therein.

Another layout of a theater, with the way to determine the viewpoint within it.

If it be requir’d to paint the Scenes of some Theater already built, the Geometrical Plan thereof must first be carefully drawn, (as you see, for Example, in this Plate) that the Length of the Theater may be found; or the Distance of its Point from that of A; which is easily done, by taking the Interval BC of the first Grooves, and DE of the latter; and drawing the Visuals MO, NO: for AO is the Length of the Theater, and the Point of Sight, or Perspective, therein, is O. Moreover the Length and Breadth of the Grooves must be known, as also their Numbers, Distance, and Obliquity; and especial Care must be taken, that though they be oblique to the Line MN, that on each Side they be Parallels between themselves, and that they all touch the Lines MO, NO. If you then make AO equal to FA, the Point of Distance will be F; and if the Theater be painted according to the Rules hereafter given, it will appear to him that views it from F, as a regular Piece of Perspective plac’d in A.

If you need to paint the scenes of a theater that's already built, you must first carefully draw its geometric plan (as shown in this plate) to determine the theater's length or the distance from its point to point A. You can easily find this by measuring the interval BC of the first grooves and DE of the latter, then drawing the visuals MO and NO. In this case, AO represents the length of the theater, and the point of sight, or perspective, is O. Additionally, you need to know the length and width of the grooves, as well as their numbers, spacing, and angles. Be especially careful to ensure that, even if they are angled relative to line MN, each side remains parallel to itself and that they all touch lines MO and NO. If you make AO equal to FA, the point of distance will be F; and if you paint the theater according to the rules provided later, it will appear to the viewer at F as a regular piece of perspective placed at A.


Fig. lxxiv.

Fig. 74.

Figura Septuages. quarta.

Sectio Scenarum Theatri.

Theater Scene Section.

Præter vestigium Theatri delineanda est sectio scenarum. Itaque si acceptis mensuris altitudinis, quam punctum A unde incipit tabulatum, ac punctum D poscenii, habent supra planum horizontale FV, fiant ex perpendiculo NV tum recta ADO ex qua innotescit declivitas tabulati, tum recta NO, quæ sit parallela ad FV & æqualis rectæ AO figuræ septuagesimætertiæ; punctum theatri in elevatione est O; in poscenio verò punctum theatri est Q. Si maxima scenarum altitudo sit EB, recta OE dat altitudinem omnium reliquarum. Vera tamen altitudo cujuslibet scenæ est illa quam habet linea major, ex minori autem dignoscitur quantum obliquitas cujusque scenæ apparenter minuat altitudinem extremæ illius lineæ. Porro excessus quo linea major superat minorem tum in summo tum in imo, diligenter notandus est, hinc enim pendet intelligentia figuræ septuagesimæquintæ. Punctum M quod est remotum ab N quantum in figura septuagesimatertia punctum F est remotum ab A, designat locum unde Theatrum spectari oporteat, ut ibidem notavimus.

Beyond the outline of the theater lies the section of the stage. Therefore, if we take the measurements of the height from point A, where the stage starts, and point D of the proscenium, which are above the horizontal plane FV, let there be drawn from the vertical NV both the line ADO, which reveals the inclination of the stage, and the line NO, which is parallel to FV and equal to the line AO of the seventy-third figure; the point of the theater at elevation is O; in the proscenium, however, the point of the theater is Q. If the maximum height of the stages is EB, the line OE gives the height of all the others. However, the true height of any stage is that of the major line, while from the minor one it can be seen how much the inclination of each stage appears to reduce the height of that extreme line. Furthermore, the excess by which the major line surpasses the minor one at both the top and the bottom must be carefully noted, for this is essential for understanding the seventy-fifth figure. The point M, which is as far from N as point F in the seventy-third figure is from A, indicates the location from which the theater should be observed, as we noted there.

In construendo tabulato solet servari hæc regula, ut altitudo puncti O sit æqualis altitudini oculi, & elevatio ex A usque ad D sit nona circiter vel decima pars ipsius longitudinis AD. Expediret autem ad scenas facilius movendas, pavimentum F esse profundius pavimento G, ut erecto corpore sub tabulato ambulari possit.

When constructing a floor, the following rule is usually followed: the height of point O should be equal to the height of the eyes, and the elevation from A to D should be about one-ninth or one-tenth of the length of AD. It would also help to move the scenes more easily if the floor F is lower than the floor G, allowing someone to walk upright under the platform.

Seventy-fourth Figure.

The Section or Profile of Scenes for Theaters.

The Section or Profile of Scenes for Theaters.

Besides the Plan of the Theater, the Section of the Scenes is also to be delineated, for finding the Point of the Theater in the Elevation. Wherefore, setting the Measures of the Heights which the Point A, where the Floor of the Stage begins, and the Point D of the Poscene, have above the Level of the Horizontal FV; from the Perpendicular NV draw the right Line ADO, which gives the Declivity of the Stage; then make NO parallel to FV, and equal to AO of the Seventy-third Figure: The Point of the Theater in Elevation is O; the Point of the same on the Poscene is Q. If EB be the greatest Height of the first Scene, the Line OE determines the Height of all the others. The longest of the two Lines gives the true Height of each Scene; and the shorter discovers how much of that Height the Sight loses on the Out-line, by the oblique Position of the Scenes. Moreover, the Excess of the longer Line above the shorter, as well at top as at bottom, is to be well observ’d; for on this depends the right Understanding of the Seventy-fifth Figure. The Point M, which is as far distant from N, as that of F is from A in the Seventy-third Figure, denotes the Place from whence the Stage ought to be view’d; as is there mention’d.

Additionally to the Theater Plan, the Scene Section also needs to be mapped out to find the Theater's Point in Elevation. Therefore, by setting the heights of Point A, where the Stage Floor begins, and Point D of the Poscene, in relation to the Level of the Horizontal FV; from the Perpendicular NV, draw the straight Line ADO, which shows the Stage's slope; then make NO parallel to FV, equal to AO from the seventy-third figure: The Theater's Point in Elevation is O; the corresponding Point on the Poscene is Q. If EB is the highest point of the first Scene, the Line OE establishes the Height for all the others. The longer of the two Lines indicates the true Height of each Scene, while the shorter shows how much Height is lost from the Sight on the Out-line due to the angled Position of the Scenes. Additionally, pay close attention to the difference between the longer Line and the shorter, both at the top and bottom, as this is crucial for correctly understanding the seventy-fifth figure. The Point M, which is the same distance from N as F is from A in the seventy-third figure, marks where the Stage should be viewed, as mentioned there.

In laying the Floor of the Stage, this Rule is commonly observ’d, That the Height of the Point O be made equal to the Height of the Eye, and that the Rise of the Floor from A to D, be about a Ninth or Tenth Part of the Length AD. ’Tis also requisite, for the better shifting the Scenes, that the Pavement F be sunk lower than that of G, that a Man may walk upright under the Floor thereof.

In setting up the Stage Floor, this rule is usually followed: the Height of Point O should match Eye Level, and the Rise of the Floor from A to D should be around one-ninth or one-tenth of the Length AD. It’s also necessary, for easier scene changes, that the Pavement F is lower than G so that a person can walk upright beneath the Floor.


Fig. lxxv.

Fig. 75.

FIGURA Septuagesimaquinta.

Elevatio scenarum coram inspectarum: ubi docetur artificium ut scenæ obliquæ appareant rectæ.

Elevatio scenarum coram inspectarum: where it teaches the technique so that slanted scenery appears straight.

Scenæ quas vides in S, habent suam latitudinem à vestigio figuræ septuagesimætertiæ, altitudinem ab elevatione figuræ septuagesimæquartæ, ac censentur erectæ & canalibus insertæ, quæ omnia repræsentantur etiam figurâ septuagesimasecunda in P & Q. Velim observes quantum elevetur tabulatum in principio A, in poscenio D, & in puncto theatri O. Similiter notare oportet elevationem singularum scenarum, quæ propter obliquitatem canalium flectuntur introrsum: iccirco lineæ BL, KI, partis C, non videntur parallelæ ad lineam plani, ut reipsa sunt; ac visualis LF non tendit ad punctum oculi O, sed ad punctum F. Si autem excessus apparens, quem recta BK habet in summo & imo supra rectam LI transferatur in partem E scenarum, (iidem excessus desumi etiam possunt ex figura septuagesimaquarta) ac ducantur rectæ LG, IH, habebuntur lineæ apparenter parallelæ ad lineam plani. Si fiat recta LO, quæ cum LG faciat angulum GLO æqualem angulo BLF, eadem LO tendet exactissimè ad punctum O oculi, eâque utendum erit ut visuali.

The clips you see in S have their width from the trace of the figure seventy-third, height from the elevation of the figure seventy-fourth, and are considered upright and inserted into the channels, all of which are also represented by the figure seventy-second in P & Q. Please note how much the floor is raised at the beginning of A, in the proscenium D, & at the theater point O. Similarly, one must observe the elevation of individual scenes, which are inclined inward due to the slant of the channels: therefore, the lines BL, AI, part C, do not appear parallel to the line of the plane, as they actually are; and the visual LF does not extend to the eye point O, but to point F. If the apparent excess that the straight line BK has at the top & bottom above the line LI is transferred to the side E of the scenes, (the same excess can also be derived from the figure seventy-fourth) and straight lines LG, IH are drawn, those lines will appear parallel to the line of the plane. If line LO is drawn, which, in conjunction with LG, makes angle GLO equal to angle BLF, the same LO will extend precisely to the eye point O, and it will be used as the visual one.

In P supponimus scenas M & N jacere super pavimento unas super aliis, ac duas lineas RT habere distantiam eandem cum duabus LI, & ita in reliquis scenis. Ubi notandum est, lineas RS, TV, easdem esse cum lineis LG, IH, scenarum E: nihilominus lineas RS, TV, non esse parallelas, quum tamen LG, IH, videantur parallelæ. Proinde, si fiat recta RL, & anguli SRL, GLO, sint æquales, rectâ RL utendum erit tanquam visuali, in L erit punctum accidentale oculi pro pingendis scenis N, ac lineæ RS, TV, habebuntur ut parallelæ: id autem quod superest in telario ultra tales lineas, pro nihilo computabitur, ibique pingetur aer aut aliquid aliud. Punctum accidentale oculi pro pingendis scenis M erit in I.

In P, we assume the scenes M & N are laid out on the floor one on top of the other, and that the two lines RT have the same distance as the two LI, and this applies to the other scenes as well. It should be noted that the lines RS and Television are the same as the lines LG and IH of scene E; however, the lines RS and Television are not parallel, while LG and IH appear to be parallel. Therefore, if a straight line RL is drawn and angles SRL and GLO are equal, the straight line RL will serve as a visual reference point for scene L, which will be the accidental eye point for painting scenes N. The lines RS and Television will be treated as parallel: anything beyond those lines on the canvas will be considered negligible and will be painted as sky or something else. The accidental eye point for painting scenes M will be at I.

The Seventy-fifth FIGURE.

The Elevation of Scenes in Front, and how the oblique Scenes are made to appear direct.

The Elevation of Scenes in Front, and how the angled Scenes are made to look straight-on.

The Scenes in S have their Breadth from the Plan of the Seventy-third Figure, and their Height from the Elevation of the Seventy-fourth Figure; and are suppos’d to stand perpendicularly in their Grooves; all which is also represented in P and Q of the Seventy-second Figure. I would have you observe, how much the Floor rises, from its Edge A, to the Poscene D, and to the Point of the Theater O. You should also note the Elevation of each Scene, which, by reason of the Obliquity of the Grooves, turn inward: Wherefore the Lines BL, KI, of the Part C, do not seem Parallels to the Ground-line, as they really are; and the Visual LF tends not to the Point of Sight O, but to the Point F. But if the seeming Excess, which the Line BK has at top and at bottom, above the Line LI, be transferr’d on the Side of the Scenes E, (which Excess may also be taken from the Seventy-fourth Figure) and you draw the Lines LG, IH; these Lines will appear Parallels to the Line of the Plan. Then drawing the Line LO, so as to make the Angle GLO equal to the Angle BLF, the said LO shall tend directly to the Point of Sight O; and serve for a visual Line.

The scenes in S get their width from the layout of the seventy-third figure and their height from the elevation of the seventy-fourth figure; they are supposed to stand straight in their grooves. This is also shown in P and Q of the seventy-second figure. I want you to notice how much the floor rises from its edge A to the position D and to the theater point O. Also, pay attention to the height of each scene, which, because of the angle of the grooves, tilts inward. As a result, the lines BL and KI of part C don’t appear parallel to the ground line, even though they actually are. The visual line LF doesn’t point to the point of sight O, but to point F instead. However, if you take the apparent excess that the line BK has at the top and bottom above the line LI and transfer it to the side of the scenes E (this excess can also be taken from the seventy-fourth figure), and then draw the lines LG and IH, those lines will look parallel to the plan line. Then, by drawing the line LO so that angle GLO is equal to angle BLF, LO will point directly to the point of sight O, serving as a visual line.

In P, I suppose the Scenes M and N to lie one upon another on the Floor, and the two Lines RT to have the same Distance as the Lines LI; and so of the others. Where you are to take Notice, that the Lines RS, TV, are the same with the Lines LG, IH, of the Scenes E: and that the Lines RS, TV, are not Parallels; altho’ LG, IH, seem to be so. Therefore, if you draw the Line RL, so that the Angles SRL, and GLO, be equal; the Line RL shall serve as a Visual, and L shall be the accidental Point of Sight, for painting the Scenes of the Side N; and the Lines RS, TV, shall be us’d as Parallels. What remains on the Frame, beyond those Lines, is to be reckon’d as nothing; but you may paint there Air, or what you please. The accidental Point of Sight for painting the Scenes of the Side M, is I.

In P, I assume that Scenes M and N are stacked on top of each other on the floor, and that the two lines RT are the same distance apart as the lines LI; and the same goes for the others. Please note that the lines RS and TV are the same as the lines LG and IH of Scene E; however, the lines RS and TV are not parallel, even though LG and IH appear to be. Therefore, if you draw the line RL so that angles SRL and GLO are equal, the line RL will act as a visual line, with L representing the accidental point of sight for painting the scenes on the side N; and the lines RS and TV will be used as parallels. Anything beyond those lines in the frame is considered irrelevant; you can paint it with air or whatever you like. The accidental point of sight for painting the scenes on the side M is I.


Fig. lxxvi.

Fig. 76.

FIGURA Septuagesimasexta.

Modus delineandi exemplar scenarum.

Method for outlining scenarios.

Iterum delineavimus scenas erectas super tabulato; in B nudas, in A depictas, additis projecturis coronicum & aliorum ornamentorum. Deformatio scenarum A eruitur methodo consuetâ ex vestigio C, in quo videbis lineam plani deorsum protractam. Vestigium autem geometricum est in D.

Again we have outlined the scenes set up on the stage; in B naked, in A depicted, with added projections of crowns & other decorations. The deformation of the scenes A is revealed through the usual method from the trace C, where you will see the line of the plane extended downward. The geometric trace is in D.

The Seventy-sixth FIGURE.

The Manner of delineating the Designs of Scenes.

The Way to Outline the Designs of Scenes.

In this Plate you have another Design of Scenes erected on the Floor; the naked Scenes are B; the painted ones A; with the additional Projectures of Cornices and other Ornaments. The Draught of the Scenes A is produc’d from the Plan C, after the usual Manner; in which you may observe the Ground-line to be lower than its true place, for the greater Distinction of the Parallels. The Geometrical Plan is D.

In this Plate, you have another design of scenes set up on the floor; the bare scenes are B; the painted ones are A; along with the added projections of cornices and other decorations. The draft of the scenes A is created from the plan C, following the usual method; in which you can see the ground line is lower than its actual position, for the better distinction of the parallels. The geometrical plan is D.


Fig. lxxvii.

Fig. 77.

FIGURA Septuagesimaseptima.

Modus reticulandi & pingendi scenas theatri.

Modus reticulandi & pingendi scenas theatri.

Postquam in pavimento exactissimè disposueris tum poscenium, tum ex ordine scenas reliquas, unam alteri incumbentem, ut figurâ septuagesimaquintâ declaravimus, fiet linea horizontalis, in qua notanda sunt tria puncta perspectivæ, unum in O usui futurum in pingendo poscenio, ac duo reliqua hinc inde, singula videlicet pro scenis partis oppositæ. Jam supponendo quòd in parvo exemplari A primæ scenæ facta fuerit reticulatio per quadrata perfecta; proportionalis divisio fiet tum in recta HI primæ scenæ B, tum in recta CD. Postea ex puncto E, per singula puncta divisionum rectæ HI, fient visuales, adhibendo funiculum colore nigro imbutum; earumque ope, ut figura ostendit, reticulare oportebit scenam B, tum remotâ ea scenam illi subjectam, & eodem modo aliam & aliam; ac demum per divisiones quas in recta LM faciunt visuales ex puncto E, absolvetur reticulatio poscenii, cujus quadrata esse debent perfecta, secus quadrata scenarum. In parte inferiori paginæ, duæ scenæ G & F ostendunt ornamenta quæ in scenis depingi possunt. Velim autem observes, tum lineas transversas coronicum, quæ non sunt invicem parallelæ, tum visuales, quæ tendunt ad puncta opposita. Nam ejusmodi lineæ continent duas peculiares difficultates projectionum theatralium; easque ut superes, exactè servandæ sunt regulæ quas declaravimus.

After you accurately arrange the stage and the other scenes in order, each one overlapping the next as we've shown in figure seventy-five, you'll create a horizontal line where three perspective points need to be marked: one in O for painting the stage and two others on either side, specifically for the scenes on the opposite side. Now, assuming that in a small model A, there is a grid created through perfect squares; the proportional division will happen both in the line Hi of the first scene B and in the line CDs. Then, from point E, using each point of division on line Hey, you'll create visuals by using a string dipped in black dye; with these, as the figure shows, you'll need to grid scene B and then move it to the scene beneath it, and in the same way, continue to do this for additional scenes; finally, by the divisions made in line LM from point E, you'll complete the grid of the stage, which should consist of perfect squares, unlike the squares of the scenes. At the bottom of the page, the two scenes G & F show the decorations that can be painted in the scenes. However, I want you to note both the cross lines of the crown, which are not parallel to each other, and the visuals which extend to the opposite points. For such lines contain two specific difficulties in theatrical projections; to overcome them, the rules we've outlined must be precisely followed.

The Seventy-seventh FIGURE.

The Manner of making the Net-work or Squares, and painting the Scenes of Theaters.

How to create the network or squares and paint the scenes of theaters.

After you have with great Exactness dispos’d the Poscene on the Pavement, and the others in order one upon another, as was mention’d in the Seventy-fifth Figure; draw the horizontal Line, and mark therein three Points of Sight: That in O, for the Use of the Poscene; and the Points on the Sides, for the Service of the opposite Scenes respectively. Then, supposing that the Net-work of the small Draught of the first Scene A, consists of perfect Squares; transport the same Divisions both on the Lines HI and CD of the first Scene B; and with a black Line strike the Visuals from the Point E, by the Points of the Divisions of HI; and by the Help of those Visuals make the Net-work of the Scene B, as is done in the Figure. When that’s done, lay it aside; and do the next in the same manner; and so of the others. Lastly, by the Divisions, which the Visuals from the Point E make on the Perpendicular LM, finish the Net-work on the Poscene, which consists of perfect Squares, though that of the Scenes does not. The two Scenes of the lower part of the Plate, G and F, shew what Diversity of Ornament the Painter may introduce. I would have you also take particular Notice, both of the transverse Lines of the Cornice, which are not Parallels to each other; and of the Visuals which are directed to their opposite Points: because in these two Particulars lies the greatest Difficulty of describing Theatrical Designs; for the surmounting which, it’s absolutely necessary, that you carefully regard the Rules hitherto deliver’d.

After you have arranged the backdrop on the ground with great precision, placing the other elements one on top of the other as mentioned in the Seventy-fifth Figure, draw a horizontal line and mark three points of view: the point at O for the backdrop's use, and the points on the sides for the respective opposite scenes. Next, assuming that the grid of the small drawing of the first scene A consists of perfect squares, transfer those same divisions along the lines HI and CD of the first scene B. Then, using a black line, draw the visual lines from point E through the division points of HI; with the help of these visual lines, create the grid for scene B as shown in the figure. Once that’s done, set it aside and repeat the process for the next scene and so on. Finally, using the divisions made by the visual lines from point E on the perpendicular LM, complete the grid on the backdrop, which consists of perfect squares, even though the grids of the other scenes do not. The two scenes at the bottom of the plate, G and F, show what variety of ornamentation the painter can incorporate. I also want you to pay special attention to the transverse lines of the cornice, which are not parallel to one another, and to the visuals directed toward their opposite points: because the greatest challenge in describing theatrical designs lies in these two aspects; to overcome this, it is crucial that you carefully follow the rules already provided.


FIG. LXXVIII.

FIG. 78.

FIGURA Septuagesimaoctava.

De projectionibus horizontalibus.

On horizontal projections.

Quemadmodum facilior est deformatio columnarum jacentium, quàm columnarum erectarum; (nam lineæ quæ in istis sunt perpendiculares, in illis sunt visuales, ac nullus circulus amittit suam formam) ita projectiones horizontales, quas in laquearibus delineare necesse est, contra quàm Pictores imaginantur, expeditiores & faciliores sunt verticalibus, quas hucusque tractavimus. Nam ut stylobatæ & columnæ appareant erectæ, pingendæ sunt veluti jacentes.

Just like it's easier to shape the tops of lying columns than standing ones; (because the lines in the former are vertical, while in the latter they are visual, and no circle loses its shape) horizontal projections, which we need to draw on ceilings, are actually quicker and easier than the vertical ones we've covered so far. In order for the bases and columns to appear upright, they should be painted as if they are lying down.

Deformationes horizontales auspicamur à mutulis, quia columnæ ac stylobatæ identidem iis imponuntur, ut magis in prospectu sint. Ob diversitatem verò quam habet latus mutuli à sua facie, utriusque delineationem geometricam seorsim in hac figura exhibemus.

We anticipate horizontal deformations from the arches, as the columns and bases are repeatedly placed on them to enhance their visibility. However, due to the difference in appearance between the side of the arch and its front, we present separate geometric representations of both in this figure.

The Seventy-eighth FIGURE.

Of horizontal Perspective.

Of horizontal perspective.

As it is easier to describe in Perspective Columns lying on the ground, than those that are erect, (the Lines in these last being Perpendiculars, which in the former are Visuals, wherein no Circle loses its Form) so the horizontal Projections of Perspective, proper for Ceilings, contrary to the Judgment Painters usually make, are perform’d with more Ease and Expedition, than the vertical, which we have hitherto treated of; forasmuch as the Pedestals and Columns that must appear erect, are painted as if lying on the ground.

Since it's easier to describe Perspective Columns that are lying flat on the ground than those that are standing up (the lines in the latter being perpendicular, whereas in the former they are visuals, where no circle loses its shape), the horizontal projections of perspective that are suitable for ceilings, contrary to what painters usually think, are done with more ease and speed than the vertical ones we’ve discussed so far. This is because the pedestals and columns that need to look upright are painted as if they're lying on the ground.

I have usher’d in these horizontal Designs with those of Corbels, because, for setting the Pedestals and Columns more in View, they generally seem to be supported by them. And the Side of this Corbel being different from its Face, I have here inserted a Geometrical Description of each distinct.

I have introduced these horizontal designs alongside the corbels because they typically appear to support the pedestals and columns, making them more visible. Since the side of this corbel differs from its front, I have included a geometric description of each one separately.


FIG. LXXIX.

FIG. 79.

FIGURA Septuagesimanona.

Projectiones vestigii & elevationis mutuli.

Trace and elevation projections of the mound.

Facies mutuli quam delineavimus figurâ septuagesimaoctavâ, gerit hic munus vestigii; latus verò gerit munus elevationis; ut ostendunt lineæ occultæ, quæ ex divisionibus faciei tendunt ad punctum oculi, ex divisionibus lateris tendunt ad punctum distantiæ (puncta oculi ac distantiæ in hac & sequentibus figuris cadunt extra paginam.) Per sectiones harum linearum ducuntur lineæ quæ terminant singulas partes vestigii deformati; hujusque adjumento ducitur elevatio lateris, ac methodo consuetâ latitudines & longitudines mutuli solidi eruuntur ex vestigio, altitudines ex elevatione. Hic & deinceps nomina longitudinis & altitudinis usurpamus, veluti planum cujuslibet perspectivæ esset verticale; in quâ suppositione, IL esset latitudo mutuli, SR altitudo, RL longitudo: quum SR reverà sit longitudo, RL altitudo. Ad faciliorem descriptionem hujus figuræ observandum est, rectis IL, LM, GH, hujus paginæ inesse divisiones rectarum DC, FE, AB, figuræ septuagesimæoctavæ.

Facial features mutuli that we outlined in the 78th figure shows the feature of the footprint here; the side shows the feature of elevation. This is demonstrated by the hidden lines that extend from the facial divisions to the eye point and from the side divisions to the distance point (the eye and distance points in this and following figures are located outside the page). Lines are drawn from the intersections of these lines that define each part of the distorted footprint; using this, the elevation of the side is determined, and with the usual method, the widths and lengths of the solid mass are derived from the footprint, with heights coming from the elevation. Here and onward, we will use terms of length and height as if the plane of any perspective were vertical; in this assumption, IL would be the width of the mass, SR the height, and RL the length: when SR is truly the length, RL is the height. For a clearer description of this figure, it is important to note that the straight lines IL, LM, GH on this page contain divisions of the straight lines DC, FE, AB, in the 78th figure.

The Seventy-ninth FIGURE.

The Plan and Elevation of a Corbel in Perspective.

The Plan and View of a Corbel in Perspective.

The Face of the Corbel describ’d in the Seventy-eighth Figure, in this does the Office of a Plan; and the Side serves here for the Elevation; as is plain from the occult Lines, which from the Divisions of the Face tend to the Point of Sight, and from those of the Side tend to the Point of Distance; both which Points, in this and the succeeding Figure, fall without the Plate. From the Intersections of these Lines are drawn others, that determine each Part of the Perspective-Plan; by means of which, the Elevation of the Side being also form’d, the Breadths and Lengths of the solid Corbel are taken, as usual, from the Plan, and the Heights from the Elevation. Here and henceforward, the Terms of Length and Height are made use of, as though the Plan of each Perspective were vertical; according to which Supposition, IL is the Breadth of the Corbel, SR the Height, and RL the Length; whereas in reality SR is the Length, and RL the Height. For the more ready Description of this Figure you will do well to observe, that the Lines IL, LM, GH, of this Plate, bear the same Divisions as DC, FE, AB, of the Seventy-eighth Figure.

The Face of the Corbel shown in the Seventy-eighth Figure acts as a Plan, while the Side functions as the Elevation; this is clear from the hidden Lines that extend from the Divisions of the Face toward the Point of Sight, and from those of the Side toward the Point of Distance; both Points, in this and the following Figure, are located outside the Plate. From the Intersections of these Lines, additional lines are drawn that define each part of the Perspective-Plan; using this method, the Elevation of the Side is also created, and the Widths and Lengths of the solid Corbel are derived, as usual, from the Plan, with the Heights taken from the Elevation. From this point forward, the terms Length and Height will be used as if the Plan of each Perspective is vertical; under this assumption, IL represents the Width of the Corbel, SR the Height, and RL the Length; although, in reality, SR is the Length and RL is the Height. To better understand this Figure, note that the Lines IL, LM, GH in this Plate have the same Divisions as DC, FE, AB in the Seventy-eighth Figure.


FIG. LXXX.

FIG. LXXX.

FIGURA OCTOGESIMA.

Horizontalis projectio mutuli inumbrati.

Horizontal projection of shaded vault.

In hac figurâ suas umbras mutulo addidimus: eumque si in altum supra oculum elevaveris, & ex distantiâ quam ipsi dedimus suspexeris; miraberis profectò, in alium longè concinniorem subitò mutatum fuisse.

In this form, we added our shadows to it: and if you lift it high above your eye, and look at it from the distance we gave it; you'll definitely be amazed at how it suddenly transformed into something much more beautiful.

The EIGHTIETH FIGURE.

The Horizontal Projection of a shaded Corbel.

The Horizontal Projection of a shaded Corbel.

In this Figure you have the Corbel finish’d with its proper Shades; which, if plac’d above the Eye, and beheld from the Distance here assign’d it; you’ll be strangely surpriz’d at the sudden and most agreeable Alteration you’ll find therein.

In this figure, you have the corbel finished with its proper shades; if placed above eye level and viewed from the distance indicated here, you'll be quite surprised by the sudden and very pleasant change you’ll notice.


Fig. lxxxi.

Fig. 81.

Figura Octogesimaprima.

Stylobatæ Corinthii horizontaliter contracti.

Stylobates of Corinth contracted horizontally.

In deformandis hisce stylobatis, usi sumus projectione vestigii & elevationis, quam exhibet figura duodecima; ut figuram illam cum istâ conferenti manifestissimè constabit. Porrò stylobatas pingi solere incumbentes mutulis, diximus figurâ septuagesimaoctavâ.

In shaping these stylobates, we used the projection of footprints & elevation, as shown in figure twelve; this will clearly show that figure when compared with that one. Moreover, we mentioned that stylobates are usually depicted leaning on mules, as seen in figure seventy-eight.

The Eighty-first Figure.

Corinthian Pedestals in an Horizontal Perspective.

Corinthian Pedestals in a Horizontal View.

In delineating these Pedestals, I have made use of the Plan and Upright put into Perspective in the Twelfth Figure; as will evidently appear, by comparing that Figure with this. I have already mention’d, in the Seventy-eighth Figure, that in painting these Pedestals, they are generally suppos’d to be upheld by Corbels.

In outlining these Pedestals, I used the Plan and Upright shown in the Twelfth Figure; this will become clear when you compare that Figure with this one. I already mentioned, in the Seventy-eighth Figure, that when painting these Pedestals, they are generally thought to be supported by Corbels.


Fig. lxxxii.

Fig. 82.

Figura Octoges. secunda.

Columna Corinthia horizontaliter deformata.

Corinthian column horizontally distorted.

Vestigium & elevatio stylobatæ, quem delineavimus figurâ duodecimâ, suppeditat mensuras pilarum hoc loco deformandarum, ut ex iis eruatur contractio columnæ. Huic autem soli suas umbras addidimus, ut clariùs appareat modus & artificium totius operationis. Ex his vides, quadrata & circulos in perspectivâ horizontali omninò retinere suam figuram, eamque dumtaxat restringi paulatim & coarctari: quicquid in contrarium & verbis & pennicillo docuerint Pictores nonnulli.

Trace & elevation of the stylobate, which we illustrated in figure twelve, provides the dimensions for the pillars being altered here, allowing us to determine the contraction of the column. We have also added its own shadows so that the method & craftsmanship of the entire operation can be more clearly seen. From these, you can see that squares & circles maintain their shape in the horizontal perspective, only gradually being confined & constricted: anything contrary to this, as some painters have taught, both in words & with their brushes.

Eighty-second FIGURE.

A Corinthian Column in Horizontal Perspective.

A Corinthian Column in Side View.

The Plan and Elevation of the Pedestal delineated in the Twelfth Figure, gives also the Measures for reducing these Pilasters into Perspective; from which the Contraction of the Column is taken. I have shadow’d only this last, that the Manner of the whole Work might be the more conspicuous. By this you see the Squares and Circles in Horizontal Perspective always retain their Figures, without any Alteration, save that of being gradually diminish’d and made less; notwithstanding what some Painters have taught and practis’d to the contrary.

The Plan and Elevation of the Pedestal shown in the Twelfth Figure also provides the measurements for creating a perspective of these Pilasters; this is where the shortening of the Column comes from. I’ve only shaded this last element so that the overall design stands out more clearly. From this, you can see that Squares and Circles in Horizontal Perspective always keep their shapes, with no changes except for gradually becoming smaller; despite what some painters have taught and practiced to the contrary.


Fig. lxxxiii.

Fig. 83.

Figura Octogesimatertia.

Capitella Corinthia horizontaliter contracta.

Capitella Corinthia contracted horizontally.

Habes in hac paginâ deformationes vestigii & elevationis capitelli Corinthii, quas desumpsimus ex delineationibus geometricis, transferendo mensuras earum in lineas plani AB, & elevationis AC, ita ut facillimè dignosci possit unde nascantur singulæ partes capitellorum nitidorum. Nihil dubito quin deformationes horizontales sis experturus faciliores verticalibus quas dedimus figurâ vigesimaquartâ. Nam in horizontalibus gyrus foliorum circulis clauditur, quorum centra mutuantur latitudines à suis vestigiis in punctis 1, 2, 3, 4; altitudines verò à capitellis elevationis in punctis 5, 6, 7, 8.

You’ve got on this page the deformations of the footprint & elevation of the Corinthian capital, which we took from geometric drawings, transferring their measurements to the horizontal lines AB and elevation AC, so that it can be easily recognized where each part of the elegant capitals originates. I have no doubt that you will find horizontal deformations easier to understand than the vertical ones we've shown in figure twenty-four. For in the horizontal views, the circles of leaves are enclosed, whose centers change their latitudes from their footprints at points 1, 2, 3, 4; while the heights come from the capitals’ elevation at points 5, 6, 7, 8.

Eighty-third FIGURE.

A Corinthian Capital horizontally contracted in Perspective.

A Corinthian Capital in Perspective.

You have in this Plate the Perspective both of the Plan and Elevation of the Corinthian Capital, drawn from the Geometrical Descriptions, by transferring their Measures into the Ground-line AB, and into that of the Elevation AC; so that you may readily discover from whence every part of the finish’d Capital is produc’d. I don’t doubt but you’ll experience these horizontal Perspectives to be much less difficult than the vertical propos’d in the Twenty-fourth Figure. For in these the Circuit of the Leaves is determin’d by perfect Circles, whose Centers take their Breadths from the Plan at the Points 1, 2, 3, 4; and their Heights from the Capitals of the Elevation, at the Points 5, 6, 7, 8.

You have in this plate both the plan and elevation of the Corinthian capital, created from the geometrical descriptions, by transferring their measurements onto the ground line AB and the elevation line AC. This way, you can easily see where each part of the finished capital comes from. I have no doubt you'll find these horizontal perspectives much easier than the vertical one presented in the twenty-fourth figure. In these, the outline of the leaves is defined by perfect circles, with their centers measured from the plan at points 1, 2, 3, 4, and their heights taken from the capitals of the elevation at points 5, 6, 7, 8.


Fig. lxxxiv.

Fig. 84.

Figura Octogesimaquarta.

Coronix Corinthia.

Coronix Corinthia.

Si faciendæ sint coronices quæ habeant angulos, elevatio geometrica A repræsentabit unum latus, alterum sectio B. Curandum est autem, ut crepidines partium, quas fingere volumus incumbere columnis, non obsint concinnæ distributioni mutulorum. Ad contractionem elevationis A & sectionis B, in lineam plani EF & elevationis EG transferre oportet puncta diversarum latitudinum, quas habent in elevatione A ungues epistylii, zophori, & coronæ, ducendo ex iis lineas ad punctum oculi; in partem verò FH lineæ FE transferre oportet puncta longitudinis, ducendo lineas ad punctum distantiæ. Hac industriâ perficies utramque deformationem, quarum una geret munus vestigii, altera elevationis. Utrobique autem designabis lineas terminativas partium coronicis, ac sectionum C & D.

If you are making crowns that have corners, the geometric elevation A will represent one side, while the section will represent the other side, B. However, you must ensure that the edges of the parts we want to shape do not interfere with the neat arrangement of the brackets. To reduce the elevation of A and section B, you need to transfer the points of different widths that they have in elevation A from the caps of the beam, frieze, and crown by drawing lines to the eye point; on the other hand, for section FH, you need to transfer the points of length by drawing lines to the distance point. With this effort, you will accomplish both deformations, one serving as a footprint and the other as elevation. In both cases, you will mark the boundary lines of the crown parts, as well as sections C & D.

Eighty-fourth FIGURE.

A Corinthian Cornice.

A Corinthian Cornice.

If you are to describe Cornices having Angles, admit the Elevation A to represent one Side, and the Section B the other. But Care is to be taken, that the Breaks of those Parts which are suppos’d to be set directly over the Columns, do not obstruct the regular Distribution of the Modillions. For contracting into Perspective the Elevation A, and the Section B, you must transfer into the Ground-line EF, and into that of the Elevation EG, the Points of the several Breadths made by the Projectures of the Architrave, Freeze, and Cornice of the Elevation A; and from them draw Lines to the Point of Sight: Then on the Part FH of the Line FE, you must note the Points of Length, and draw Lines from them to the Point of Distance. By this Practice you complete these two Contractions, one of which does the Office of a Plan, the other that of an Elevation. It’s also requisite, that you draw the Out-line of the Members of the Cornice on each side the Angle, & the Sections C and D.

If you want to describe cornices with angles, consider Elevation A to represent one side and Section B the other. However, be careful that the breaks in these parts, which are supposed to be positioned directly over the columns, do not interfere with the proper arrangement of the modillions. To create a perspective view of Elevation A and Section B, you need to transfer the points of the various widths created by the projections of the architrave, frieze, and cornice from Elevation A to the ground line EF and the elevation line EG; then draw lines to the vanishing point. On the segment FH of the line FE, mark the points of length, and draw lines from these points to the vanishing point. This process allows you to complete both contractions, where one serves as a plan and the other as an elevation. It's also necessary to draw the outline of the cornice members on each side of the angle, along with Sections C and D.


FIG. LXXXV.

FIG. 85.

Figura Octogesimaquinta.

Coronix Corinthia horizontaliter contracta.

Coronix Corinthia shortened horizontally.

Soliditas coronicis cum omnibus projecturis eruta est ex vestigio & elevatione figuræ octogesimæquartæ. Hic autem finem imponimus partibus rerum, ad integra ædificia gradum facturi.

The power of the crown is established through the study and elevation of the eighty-fourth figure. Here, however, we set a limit on the aspects of things in order to prepare for the construction of complete buildings.

The Eighty-fifth Figure.

A Corinthian Cornice in Horizontal Perspective.

A Corinthian cornice in horizontal view.

The Solidity of this Cornice, with all its Projectures, is deduc’d from the Plan and Elevation of the foregoing Figure. With this therefore I shall conclude the Description of Parts of things, and proceed to that of entire Structures.

The strength of this cornice, along with all its projections, is derived from the plan and elevation of the earlier figure. With this, I will wrap up the description of individual parts and move on to the discussion of complete structures.


Fig. lxxxvi.

Fig. 86.

Figura Octogesimasexta.

Horizontalis projectio columnæ.

Horizontal projection of column.

Postquam sigillatim descripsimus mutulum, stylobatam, columnam & coronicem, omnia ista conjungere placuit: ita clariùs apparebit quomodo disponere oporteat delineationes geometricas, ut ex iis eruantur projectiones horizontales.

After we have individually described the base, the stylobate, the column, and the cornice, it seemed right to bring all these together: this way, it will be clearer how to arrange the geometric drawings so that horizontal projections can be derived from them.

Linea plani est CD, perpendicularis CI. In A est elevatio geometrica longitudinis columnæ, (supponimus columnam delineari veluti jacentem humi.) In B ejus vestigium geometricum, cum divisionibus latitudinis in lineâ ER. Puncta longitudinis transferentur in lineam plani CG, puncta altitudinis EC transferentur in CF, ducendo rectas ex divisionibus CG ad punctum distantiæ, ex divisionibus CF ad punctum oculi. Per sectiones verò visualis CO erigentur perpendicula, & complebitur elevatio H, ex quâ eruetur columna nitida L.

The plane line is CD, and the perpendicular is CI. At A is the geometric elevation of the column length, (we assume the column is drawn as if lying on the ground.) At B is its geometric footprint, with divisions of width on the line ER. Length points will be transferred to the plane line CG, and height points EC will be transferred to CF, drawing straight lines from divisions CG to the distance point and from divisions CF to the eye point. Through the visual section CO, perpendiculars will be raised, and the elevation H will be completed, from which the shiny column L will emerge.

Si super vestigio M formare placeat aliam columnam, ejus latitudines accipiendæ sunt ex columna B; ac sectio projicienda est in N, ut ex hac tamquam ex elevatione eruatur columna P. Si aliam columnam in angulo addere libitum fuerit, ope sectionum HN facilè illam complebis.

If you want to shape another column based on the footprint of column M, you should take its width from column B; and the section should extend into N, so that column P can be derived from this as if from an elevation. If you wish to add another column at the corner, you can easily complete it using sections HN.

The Eighty-sixth Figure.

A Column in horizontal Perspective.

A Column in Horizontal View.

After the separate Description of a Corbel, Pedestal, Column, and Cornice; I have here conjoin’d them all, that you might the better perceive how to dispose Geometrical Elevations for the Business of horizontal Perspective.

After the individual descriptions of a corbel, pedestal, column, and cornice, I've combined them all here so you can better understand how to arrange geometric elevations for the purpose of horizontal perspective.

The Line of the Plan is CD, the Perpendicular CI; the Geometrical Elevation of the Length of the Column, suppos’d to be lying on the Ground, is A. The Geometrical Plan thereof is B, with the Divisions of its Breadth on the Line ER. The Points of Length being transferr’d on the Line of the Plan CG, and the Points of Height EC into CF; from the Divisions of CG Lines are drawn to the Point of Distance; and from those of CF to the Point of Sight. From the Sections of the Visual CO, Perpendiculars are erected, and the Elevation H completed, from whence is taken the finish’d Column L.

The line of the plan is CD, the perpendicular is CI; the geometric elevation of the length of the column, assumed to be lying on the ground, is A. The geometric plan is B, with the divisions of its width on the line ER. The length points are transferred to the plan line CG, and the height points EC into CF; from the divisions of CG, lines are drawn to the point of distance, and from those of CF to the point of sight. From the sections of the visual CO, perpendiculars are raised, and the elevation H is completed, from which the finished column L is derived.

If upon the Plan M you would delineate another Column, the Breadths thereof must be taken from the Column B, and another Profile design’d in N, which serves as an Elevation for making the Column P. If another Column were requir’d in the Angle, the Profiles HN assist you in the ready Performance thereof.

If you want to outline another column on Plan M, the widths must be taken from Column B, and you should design another profile in N, which acts as an elevation for creating Column P. If another column is needed at the angle, the profiles HN will help you accomplish that easily.


Fig. lxxxvii.

Fig. 87.

FIGURA Octogesimaseptima.

Præparatio necessaria ad sequentem figuram, & ad projectiones horizontales in laquearibus vel testudinibus.

Practical preparation needed for the following shape and for horizontal projections on ceilings or domes.

Exhibet hæc figura in AA unum ex quatuor parietibus aulæ, cujus altitudinem veram IH velis attollere apparenter usque in L, pingendo in laqueari, vel in testudine, seriem balaustiorum. In B est vestigium geometricum quartæ partis laquearis. In C habetur elevatio medietatis latitudinis. In D est sectio coronicis & mutulorum. In E posita est elevatio medietatis longitudinis. In F est punctum oculi, in G punctum distantiæ: adeóque tota distantia est GF.

This figure in AA shows one of the four walls of the hall, whose true height IH you can seemingly raise up to L, by painting on the ceiling or dome a series of balusters. In B is the geometric mark of a quarter of the ceiling. In C, there's the elevation of half the width. In D is the section of the crown and mutules. In E is the elevation of half the length. In F is the eye point, and in G is the distance point; thus the total distance is GF.

The Eighty-seventh FIGURE.

The Preparation necessary to the following Figure, and to all other horizontal Perspectives, whether on flat or vaulted Ceilings.

The preparation needed for the following figure, and for all other horizontal perspectives, whether on flat or vaulted ceilings.

The Figure AA represents one of the four Walls of a Hall, whose true Height IH you would have appear rais’d to L, by painting a Ballustrade in the Ceiling thereof. B is the Geometrical Plan of the fourth part of the said Ceiling; C is the Elevation of half the Breadth; D is the Section of the Cornice and Corbels; E is the Elevation of half the Length. In F is the Point of Sight, in G the Point of Distance; so that the Distance itself is FG.

The Figure AA shows one of the four walls of a hall, which you would want to look raised to L by painting a balustrade on the ceiling. B is the geometric plan of the fourth section of that ceiling; C is the elevation of half the width; D is the section of the cornice and corbels; E is the elevation of half the length. F marks the point of sight, and G marks the point of distance; thus, the distance itself is FG.


Fig. lxxxviii.

Fig. 88.

Figura Octogesimaoctava.

Horizontalis projectio balaustiorum figuræ octogesimæseptimæ, cum brevi distantia.

Horizontal projection of the pomegranates in figure seventy-eight, with a short distance.

Claritatis gratiâ totum laquear divisum est in quatuor partes. Prima continet contractionem vestigii & elevationis, quæ perficiuntur methodo consueta. Nam linea AOV est horizontalis, BC est linea plani. Punctum oculi est O, distantiæ E. Secunda pars continet sectionem L, quæ dat projecturas mutulorum aliarumque partium, desumendas ex sectione D figuræ octogesimæseptimæ, deformando eam in angulis B & C. Tertia pars complectitur delineationem integram sine umbris: ultima pars eandem complectitur cum umbris.

For clarity, the entire layout is divided into four parts. The first includes the contraction of the footprint and elevation, which are completed using the standard method. The line AOV is horizontal, and Before Christ is the plane line. The eye point is O, at a distance of E. The second part includes section L, which provides projections of the beams and other parts, derived from section D of the seventy-eighth figure, distorting it at angles B & C. The third part includes the complete drawing without shadows: the final part includes the same drawing with shadows.

Ob punctum distantiæ parum remotum à puncto oculi, nimiam amplitudinem ac deformem apparentiam habere videtur hæc delineatio. Nihilominus, si ex distantia EO figuram suspexeris, omnis deformitas evanescet.

Due to the angle of view being slightly away from the eye, this drawing seems overly large and oddly shaped. However, if you look at the figure from the distance EO, all awkwardness will disappear.

Ut fucus imperitis fiat, industrii Pictoris interest parare sibi geminum exemplar suorum Operum, in quibus distantia sit nimis brevis; unum videlicet palam ostendendum, in quo punctum distantiæ sit remotum à puncto oculi, quantum necesse est ad vitandam omnem deformitatem. Alterum verò, in ipsomet Opere clam usurpandum.

To avoid confusion for the inexperienced, it's important for a skilled painter to create two copies of their works, where the differences are minimal; one is clearly displayed, where the distance point is far enough from the viewer's eye to avoid any unpleasantness. The other, however, is to be used in secret within the work itself.

Si pingendæ sint testudines, oportet prius facere in eis reticulationem peculiarem; quæ quia difficilis est, & paucis explicari nequit, in aliud Opus reservatur.

If turtles are to be trapped, a special net must first be made for them; since this is difficult and cannot be easily explained to a few, it is reserved for another work.

Eighty-eighth Figure.

The horizontal Projection of the Ballustrade of the Eighty-seventh Figure, view’d at a small Distance.

The horizontal projection of the balustrade of the eighty-seventh figure, viewed from a short distance.

For the better Illustration of this Figure, I have divided the whole Ceiling into Four Parts. The first contains the Plan and Elevation in Perspective, after the usual manner; AOV being the horizontal Line, BC that of the Plan; the Point of Sight O, and that of Distance E. The second Part contains the Section L, which gives the Projectures of the Corbels and other Parts taken from the Section D of the Eighty-seventh Figure, by drawing it in the Angles B and C. The third Part comprehends the Delineation of the Perspective without Shadows. The fourth Part contains the same wholly shadow’d and finish’d.

To better illustrate this figure, I’ve divided the entire ceiling into four parts. The first part shows the plan and elevation in perspective, using the standard approach; AOV represents the horizontal line, BC shows the plan line, O is the point of sight, and E is the distance point. The second part includes section L, which displays the projections of the corbels and other elements taken from section D of the eighty-seventh figure, drawn at angles B and C. The third part outlines the perspective without shadows, while the fourth part presents the same view completely shaded and finished.

Through the near Approach of the Point of Distance to the Point of Sight, you may perhaps imagine this Draught will appear too wide, and so have an ill Effect: But when once you view it from its due Distance EO, you will find all such Doubts vanish and come to nothing.

Through the close approach of the Point of Distance to the Point of Sight, you might think this drawing looks too wide and might have a negative effect. But once you see it from the proper distance EO, you'll find that all those doubts disappear.

When you have to deal with Persons unskill’d in these things, and are to paint for so small a Distance; your best way is to make two Draughts; one for publick Shew, in which you may place the Point of Distance so far from the Point of Sight, as is necessary for preventing Deformity; and the other you may privately make use of in performing your Work.

When you're working with people who aren't experienced in these matters and need to create something for a short distance, your best option is to create two sketches: one for public display, where you can set the vanishing point further from the viewer's eye to avoid distortion; and the other you can use privately while doing your work.

If you are to paint arch’d or vaulted Ceilings, a particular kind of Net or Lattice-work must first be made therein; the Performance whereof being difficult, and not capable of being explain’d in few words, I have reserv’d it for another Volume.

If you're going to paint arched or vaulted ceilings, you first need to create a specific type of net or lattice work in them. This task is complicated and can't be explained in just a few words, so I will cover it in another volume.


Fig. lxxxix.

Fig. 89.

Figura Octogesimanona.

Horizontalis projectio architecturæ in laqueari quadrato.

Horizontal projection of architecture in a square ceiling.

Si laquear sit quadratum, & valde distans ab oculo, architecturam huic similem in eo depingere licebit. A est elevatio geometrica; eadem verò deformata in B & C, gerit munus vestigii & elevationis. Medietas unius ex quatuor partibus, usui esse potest in toto opere, aut premendo chartam, aut eâ perforatâ, immittendo per foramina carbonem minutissimè contusum.

If the square is distant from the eye, it will be possible to depict an architecture similar to it. A is the geometric elevation; however, it is distorted in B and C, taking on the role of a trace and elevation. Half of one of the four parts can be useful in the entire work, either by pressing the paper or by perforating it, allowing finely ground charcoal to be inserted through the holes.

Eighty-ninth FIGURE.

An horizontal Projection of Architecture in a square Ceiling.

A horizontal projection of architecture on a square ceiling.

If the Ceiling be square, and very remote from the Eye, you may paint in it some such Piece of Architecture as this. A is the geometrical Elevation; the same reduc’d into Perspective in B and C does the Office of a Plan and Elevation. The Half of one of the four Parts may suffice for the Draught of the whole Work, either by tracing over the Lines of the Paper, or by pricking small Holes therein, and pouncing them through with Charcole finely powder’d.

If the ceiling is square and far from your view, you can paint something like this architecture in it. A shows the geometric elevation; the same design reduced into perspective in B and C serves as a plan and elevation. Half of one of the four parts may be enough for the draft of the entire work, either by tracing over the lines on the paper or by poking small holes in it and applying finely powdered charcoal through them.


Fig. xc.

Fig. xc.

FIGURA Nonagesima.

Horizontalis projectio tholi.

Horizontal projection of the dome.

Initium hujus rei fiet à vestigio geometrico, in quo duæ series circulorum designant columnas; aliæ lineæ designant stylobatas, ac projecturas & ungues basium & coronicum. Linea plani est AB, horizontalis CD, perpendicularis AD. Punctum oculi est O, distantiæ D; adeóque figura hæc debet habere supra oculum altitudinem DO. Punctum oculi positum fuit extra ipsum tholum, ut qui eum aspiciunt, minus defatigentur, ac plus appareat de architectura & de artificio; secus verò contingeret si punctum oculi esset in medio. Itaque puncta lineæ EF transferentur in partem AG lineæ AD. Centrum I vestigii transferetur in H & ex omnibus his punctis fient visuales ad O. Deinde altitudine tholi, ac divisionibus partium singularum tum ipsius, tum laternæ, translatis in lineam AB, ex punctis divisionum fient rectæ ad punctum distantiæ D. Ubi autem hæ secant visualem AO, erigentur perpendicula, quorum sectiones cum visuali HO dabunt centra pro singulis circulis. Inter visuales AG ducere oportet lineas terminativas columnarum & coronicum; quemadmodum fieret, si ex vestigio eruta fuisset elevatio geometrica. His positis, aggredieris delineationem opticam ipsius tholi, translatis in perpendicularem EO centris ope parallelarum HI, LN; ac semidiametro LM fiet circulus NP pro simâ coronicis: semidiametro ST fiet circulus QR, & sic de reliquis. Quomodo autem per rectas ex angulis vestigii ad punctum oculi, habeantur ungues coronicis, ostendunt numeri 1, 2, 3, 4; lineæ verò laterales unguium tendunt ad centra suorum circulorum, ut videre est in N 3, 4. In vestigio, ne nimium occupetur, mutulos omisimus.

The start of this process will start with a geometric outline, where two series of circles represent the columns; other lines represent the stylobates, projections, bases, and the crown. The baseline is AB, the horizontal line is CD, and the vertical is AD. The eye point is O, at a distance of D; therefore, this figure should have a height of Do above the eye. The eye point is placed outside the dome so that those observing it are less fatigued and can see more of the architecture and craftsmanship; it would be the opposite if the eye point were in the middle. Thus, the points on line EF will be transferred to part AG of line AD. The center I of the outline will be transferred to H, and from all these points, visual lines will be drawn to O. Then, using the height of the dome and the divisions of its individual parts and the lantern, transferred to line AB, straight lines will be drawn to the distance point D. Where these intersect with the visual line AO, vertical lines will rise, and their intersections with the visual HO will provide the centers for each circle. From the visuals AG, it is necessary to draw the limit lines for the columns and the crown; as would be the case if the outline had a geometric elevation extracted. With this established, you will proceed to the optical delineation of the dome, transferring into the perpendicular EO using centers with the help of the parallels Hey, LN; and with a radius of LM, a circle NP will be created for the top of the crown: with a radius of ST, circle QR Code will be made, and so forth for the others. How the crown's tops are related to the eye point through straight lines from the angles of the outline is shown by numbers 1, 2, 3, 4; the side lines of the tops extend towards their respective circle centers, as seen in N 3, 4. In the outline, to avoid taking too much space, we have omitted minor details.

Ex his patet necessitas faciendi vestigium geometricum totius tholi, ac non sufficere vestigium unius columnæ; quum singulæ peculiares exigant deformationes. Quum autem Opus ipsum delineandum ac pingendum fuerit, ipsum desumere non poteris ex parvo exemplari, ope reticulationis; Quinimo suis locis ducere oportebit lineas visuales, & invenire centra omnium circulorum. Figendo autem funiculum in singulis centris, ipsius adjumento facillimè absolves omnes circumferentias.

From this, it’s clear that it’s necessary to create a geometric outline of the entire dome, and it’s not enough to just outline a single column, since each one requires its own specific adjustments. When the actual work is being drawn and painted, you won’t be able to take it from a small model using a grid. Instead, you will need to lead visual lines to their respective positions and find the centers of all the circles. By marking a string at each center, you can easily complete all the circumferences.

The Ninetieth Figure.

A Cupola in horizontal Perspective.

A Cupola in horizontal view.

In the Execution of this Work, you are to begin with the Geometrical Plan; in which the two Ranges of Circles denote the Columns, the other Lines shew the Pedestals, with the Projectures and Breaks of the Bases and Cornices. The Line of the Plan is AB, that of the Horizon CD, the perpendicular Line is AD. The Point of Sight is O, that of Distance D; wherefore this Figure ought to be plac’d as much above the Eye, as the Height DO. I have set the Point of Sight something without the Cupola, that the Eye might be less weary’d in viewing the Work, and embrace more of the Architecture, than it could have done, had the Point of Sight been in the midst. The Points of the Line EF are transferr’d into AG, part of the Line AD. The Center of the Plan I is continu’d to H, and from all these Points visual Lines are drawn to O. Then placing the Heights of every part both of the Cupola and Lantern on the Line AB, from the Points of those Divisions draw Lines to the Point of Distance D; and where they cut the Visual AO, erect Perpendiculars intersecting the Line HO; which Points are the Centers of the several Circles. On the Visuals, between AG, must be describ’d the Out-lines of the Columns and Cornices, in like manner as when a Geometrical Upright is rais’d from a Plan. This done, you proceed to the Delineation of the Cupola itself in Perspective, by transferring into the Perpendicular EO the several Centers of HO, by Parallels to HI, as LN, &c. On the Center, with the Interval LM, describe the Circle NP, for the Nose of the Cornice; and with the Semidiameter ST describe the Circle QR, and so of the rest. The Numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, shew how the Breaks of the Cornice are determin’d by Lines from the Angles of the Geometrical Plan tending to the Point of Sight, till they intersect the Circle: The Returns of which Breaks are made by Lines tending to the Centers of their respective Circles; as is plain from N 3, and N 4. In this Plan I have omitted the Corbels, lest I should too much encumber the Work.

In carrying out this work, you should start with the geometric plan; in which the two rows of circles represent the columns, and the other lines indicate the pedestals, along with the projections and breaks of the bases and cornices. The line of the plan is AB, the horizon line is CD, and the perpendicular line is AD. The point of sight is O, and the point of distance is D; therefore, this figure should be placed as high above the eye as the height DO. I positioned the point of sight slightly outside the dome to reduce eye strain when viewing the work, allowing for a broader perspective of the architecture than if the point of sight were in the center. The points on line EF are transferred to AG, which is part of line AD. The center of plan I is extended to H, and visual lines are drawn from all these points to O. Then, position the heights of each part of the dome and lantern on line AB; from those division points, draw lines to the point of distance D, and where they intersect the visual line AO, erect perpendiculars that meet line HO; these points become the centers of the various circles. On the visuals, between AG, outline the columns and cornices just as you would when lifting a geometric upright from a plan. Once that's done, you can begin illustrating the dome itself in perspective by transferring the various centers of HO into the perpendicular EO, using parallels to HI, such as LN, &c. At the center, with the interval LM, draw the circle NP for the nose of the cornice, and with the semi-diameter ST draw the circle QR, and so on for the rest. The numbers 1, 2, 3, 4 indicate how the breaks of the cornice are determined by lines extending from the corners of the geometric plan toward the point of sight until they intersect the circle. The returns of these breaks are made by lines pointing to the centers of their respective circles, as evident from N 3 and N 4. In this plan, I have left out the corbels so as not to overcrowd the work.

Hence appears the Necessity of making the Geometrical Plan of the whole Cupola, the Plan of a single Column not being sufficient; by reason each requires its particular Delineation. And when the Work itself is to be drawn for painting, you can’t well take it from a small Draught by way of Net-work or Squares, but the visual Lines should be drawn in their proper places, and the several Centers found; in which, by fixing Strings, you may readily describe the Circumferences of all the Circles.

Hence, there's a need to create a complete geometric plan of the entire dome, as a plan of a single column isn't enough; each one needs its specific outline. When you're preparing the actual work for painting, you can't just rely on a small sketch made with a grid or net; instead, the visual lines should be accurately placed, and the various centers determined. By securing strings, you can easily outline the circumferences of all the circles.


Fig. xci.

Fig. xci.

Figura Nonagesimaprima.

Tholus figuræ nonagesimæ, cum luminibus & umbris.

Tholus figure ninety, with lights and shadows.

Tholus quem vides in hac paginâ, pollicetur sibi vitam diuturniorem illo, quem super telario plano insignis amplitudinis, depinxi anno 1685. in Templo S. Ignatii Collegii Romani. Proinde si casus aliquis illum absumat, non deerunt qui ex isto eundem in melius reficiant. Mirati fuerunt Architecti nonnulli, quòd columnas anteriores mutulis imposuerim, id enim in solidis ædificiis ipsi non facerent. Verùm eos metu omni liberavit amicissimus mihi Pictor, ac pro me spopondit, damnum omne se statim reparaturum, si fatiscentibus mutulis, columnas in præceps ruere contingat.

The framework you see on this page promises itself a longer life than the one I painted on the flat canvas of significant size in 1685 at the Church of St. Ignatius at the Roman College. Therefore, if some misfortune should take it away, there will be those who will restore it to a better state. Some architects were amazed that I placed the front columns on the brackets, as they wouldn’t do that in solid buildings. However, my dear friend the Painter freed them from all worry and pledged for me that he would immediately repair any damage if the brackets were to weaken and cause the columns to collapse.

The Ninety-first Figure.

The Cupola of the Ninetieth Figure, with its Lights and Shades.

The Dome of the Ninetieth Figure, with its Lights and Shadows.

The Cupola in this Plate will in all Likelihood be of longer Duration, than that which I painted on a very large Table, for the flat Ceiling of the Church of S. Ignatius of the Roman College, anno 1685. For if that suffer by any Accident, with the help of this its place may be supply’d by a better. Some Architects dislik’d my setting the advanc’d Columns upon Corbels, as being a thing not practis’d in solid Structures; but a certain Painter, a Friend of mine, remov’d all their Scruples, by answering for me, That if at any time the Corbels should be so much surcharg’d with the Weight of the Columns, as to endanger their Fall, he was ready to repair the Damage at his own Cost.

The Cupola in this Plate will likely last longer than the one I painted on a very large Table for the flat Ceiling of the Church of S. Ignatius of the Roman College, anno 1685. If that one gets damaged for any reason, this one can serve as a better replacement. Some Architects didn’t like my idea of placing the advanced Columns on Corbels, claiming it’s not something done in solid Structures; however, a certain Painter, who is a Friend of mine, put their concerns to rest by saying that if at any point the Corbels became overloaded with the weight of the Columns and risked collapsing, he would cover the repair costs himself.


Fig. xcii.

Fig. xcii.

Figura Nonages. secunda.

Tholus octangularis.

Tholus octangularis.

Ex circulo fiet octagonum, accipiendo medietatem quadrantis circuli, ut habeantur singula latera octagoni. In eisdem lateribus distribuetur vestigium geometricum totius architecturæ, cum projecturis omnium membrorum, juxta modum quem servavimus in limbo circulari figuræ nonagesimæ. Utiliter etiam fieret elevatio geometrica totius Operis; quamvis ob spatii angustias ego eam omiserim. Deinde positâ una cuspide circini in centro circuli, extendetur alia cuspis ad altitudinem singularum projecturarum inter spatium A & B, ut hic vides: atque ope parallelarum, omnia transferentur in lineam CD, ut fiat optica deformatio, quam poscit sectio elevationis, cum aliis præparationibus, ut in figura præcedenti. Nam hic quoque ope circulorum invenire oportet puncta extrema in prominentiis membrorum singulorum architecturæ: ut conjungendo puncta per lineas rectas, quæ forment facies octagoni, compleatur totum Opus.

From the circle, an octagon will be formed by taking half of the quadrant of the circle, so that each side of the octagon is obtained. On these sides, the geometric outline of the entire architecture will be distributed, with the projections of all the parts, according to the method we maintained in the circular boundary of the ninetieth figure. It would also be useful to elevate the geometry of the entire Work; although due to space constraints, I have overlooked it. Then, with one point of the compass placed at the center of the circle, the other point will stretch to the height of the individual projections between the space A & B, as you see here: and with the help of parallels, everything will be transferred onto line CD, to create the optical distortion that the elevation section requires, along with other preparations, as shown in the previous figure. Here too, using circles, we need to find the extreme points in the protrusions of each architectural part: so that by connecting the points with straight lines, which will shape the faces of the octagon, the entire Work will be completed.

Ninety-second Figure.

An Octangular Cupola.

An Octagonal Cupola.

From the Circle describe the Octagon, by taking half the Quadrant of the former for each Side of the latter. On these Sides the Geometrical Plan of the whole Architecture is to be dispos’d, with the Projectures of all the Members thereof, in the same manner as was done in the circular Border of the Ninetieth Figure. It will also be expedient, to make the Geometrical Elevation of the whole Work, tho’ thro’ Want of Room I have here omitted it. Then placing one Point of the Compasses in the Center of the Circle, extend the other to the Height of the several Projectures between A and B, as you see in the Figure; and by help of the Parallels transfer them all into the Line CD, for putting the Profile of the Upright into Perspective, and drawing the other Requisites, as in the foregoing Figure. For here also, by means of the Circles, are found the extreme Points of the Projectures of the several Members of the Architecture; and by conjoining these Points with strait Lines agreeable to the Shape of the Octagon, the whole Work is completed.

From the Circle, outline the Octagon by taking half the Quadrant of the Circle for each Side of the Octagon. On these Sides, the entire Geometric Plan of the Architecture should be laid out, with the Projections of all its Parts, just like in the circular Border of the Ninetieth Figure. It would also be helpful to create the Geometric Elevation of the entire Project, although I've left it out here due to space constraints. Next, place one Point of the Compass in the Center of the Circle and extend the other to the Height of the various Projections between A and B, as illustrated in the Figure; then, using Parallel Lines, transfer them all into the Line CD, to put the Profile of the Upright into Perspective, and draw the other Necessary Elements, as shown in the previous Figure. In this case, too, the Circles reveal the extreme Points of the Projections of the different Parts of the Architecture; by connecting these Points with straight Lines that match the Shape of the Octagon, the entire Work is finished.


Fig. xciii.

Fig. xciii.

FIGURA Nonagesimatertia.

Vestigium templi Ludovisiani S. Ignatii almæ urbis.

Vestige of the Temple of St. Ignatius in the city of Louis.

Constitueram huic Libro finem imponere figurâ nonagesimasecunda; nihilominus ut satisfaciam precibus amicorum, cupientium addiscere modum reticulationis opticæ, quæ adhibetur in superficiebus irregularibus, ejusque memini figurâ octogesima octava, publici juris facere decrevi ejus construendæ methodum. Ipsiusmet retis ope delineavi non solùm ædificium mox repræsentandum, sed etiam figuras omnes testudinis templi Ludovisiani, in qua pingenda nunc occupor. Eademque reticulatione, quæ erit ultima figura hujus Libri, dabimus Operi nostro suum complementum; quum nulla sit superficies, in qua suas delineationes juxta Perspectivæ regulas, earum rerum Studiosi absolvere nequeant.

I've decided to conclude this book with the figure of ninety-two; however, to satisfy the requests of friends who wish to learn the method of optical networks used on irregular surfaces, I have decided to make public the method of constructing it with the figure eighty-eight. By means of this very network, I have outlined not only the building that will soon be represented but also all the figures of the turtle of the Louisian temple, which I am currently working on illustrating. This same network, which will be the final figure of this book, will give our work its completion; for there is no surface where those studying can’t complete their outlines according to the rules of Perspective.

Exhibet hæc figura vestigium totius templi. Quamvis enim non indigeam nisi testudine inter januam maximam & tholum; proderit nihilominus Architecturæ Studiosis, universi Operis elegantiam ac symmetriam per otium contemplari.

This figure shows the outline of the entire temple. Even though I only need the turtle between the main entrance and the dome, it will still benefit those interested in architecture to contemplate the elegance and symmetry of the whole work at their leisure.

The Ninety-third FIGURE.

The Geometrical Plan of the Church of S. Ignatius at Rome.

The Geometric Layout of the Church of St. Ignatius in Rome.

I had once determin’d to end this Book with the Ninety-second Figure; but at the Request of some Friends, who were desirous to learn the Making of Perspective Net-work for irregular Surfaces, as was hinted in the Eighty-eighth Figure; I resolv’d to publish the Manner of performing the same. By the Help of this Net-work, I delineated not only the Architecture now to be treated of; but also each Figure in the Vault of the Church of S. Ignatius, which I am at present employ’d in painting. The Method is laid down in the last Figure of this Book, and entirely completes the same; there being no Superficies, how irregular soever, but the Studious may thereon describe, by these Rules, whatever Perspective he has occasion for.

I have once decided to finish this book with the Ninety-second Figure, but at the request of some friends who wanted to learn how to create perspective networks for irregular surfaces, as mentioned in the Eighty-eighth Figure, I decided to share how to do that. With this network, I was able to illustrate not only the architecture we're discussing but also every figure in the vault of the Church of S. Ignatius, which I'm currently painting. The method is explained in the last figure of this book, fully completing it; there is no surface, no matter how irregular, that a dedicated person can’t describe using these rules for any perspective they need.

This Figure contains the Plan of the whole Church; for though my present Design requir’d no more than the Vault of the Nave, between the great Door and the Cupola; I thought it might be nevertheless acceptable to the Curious in Architecture, to have a View of the whole Design, so celebrated for the Elegancy and Proportion of its Parts.

This figure shows the entire layout of the church. Although my current plan only required the vault of the nave, spanning from the main entrance to the dome, I thought it would still be interesting for architecture enthusiasts to see the complete design, which is well-known for its elegance and proportion.


Fig. xciv.

Fig. xciv.

Figura Nonages. quarta.

Orthographia templi Ludovisiani.

Orthography of the Louisian Temple.

Vt magis tibi gratificer, orthographiam seu elevationem templi Ludovisiani in longum dissecti delineavi, cum omnibus mensuris quæ vestigio sunt communes; addito tholo juxta ideam Autoris. Ejus autem nondum constructi loco, positum est in A & B telarium cum tholo depicto, de quo supra in figuris nonagesimâ & nonagesimaprimâ.

Vermont I'm more pleased to present to you the detailed drawings of the architecture or elevation of the Ludovician temple, along with all the measurements that are commonly referenced; I've added the dome based on the author's idea. However, in place of it, I've placed a tapestry in A & B featuring the depicted dome, as mentioned earlier in figures ninety and ninety-one.

Ninety-fourth FIGURE.

The Orthography, or Geometrical Elevation of the Inside of S. Ignatius’s Church.

The Spelling, or Geometric Layout of the Interior of S. Ignatius’s Church.

For your greater Satisfaction, I have here given the Geometrical Upright of the Church dissected lengthwise, with all its Measures agreeable to those of the Plan; as also the Cupola design’d by the Author: Which not being yet built, instead thereof is plac’d between A and B, the painted Cupola before describ’d in the Ninetieth and Ninety-first Figures.

To enhance your understanding, I’ve provided a lengthwise section of the Church’s geometric structure along with all its measurements that match the design plan. I’ve also included the cupola designed by the author. Since it hasn’t been constructed yet, you’ll find the painted cupola mentioned earlier between A and B in the ninetieth and ninety-first figures.


Fig. xcv.

Fig. xcv.

Figura Nonages. quinta.

Aliæ præparationes ad figuras nonagesimamoctavam & nonagesimamnonam.

Aliæ præparationes ad figuras 98. & 99.

Ex hac figura in quatuor partes divisa, disces ex uno intuitu methodum qua sum auspicatus opticam delineationem templi Ludovisiani. Prima pars exhibet latus dextrum testudinis inter januam templi ac tholum. Secunda pars continet vestigium ejusdem testudinis, arcubus ac lunulis distinctæ. Tertia pars continet latus dextrum testudinis usque ad summitatem fenestrarum, unde incipit Architectura quam pingimus in fornice. Quarta pars est vestigium geometricum fornicis, cum prominentia quam habent arcus in summitate jam dicta fenestrarum. Fingimus autem eandem esse soliditatem, tum ædificii depicti, tum navis templi; solæ enim columnæ, quæ respondent pilis templi, prominent extra ædificium.

From this figure divided into four parts, you will learn from one glance the method I used to depict the optical representation of the Louisian temple. The first part shows the right side of the dome between the temple entrance and the vault. The second part contains the outline of the same dome, marked by arches and crescent shapes. The third part includes the right side of the dome up to the top of the windows, where the architecture we illustrate in the arch begins. The fourth part represents the geometric outline of the arch, highlighting the projection of the arches at the top of the previously mentioned windows. We assume that the solidity is the same for both the depicted building and the temple's nave; only the columns that correspond to the temple's pillars extend outside the building.

The Ninety-fifth Figure.

Other Preparations to the Ninety-eighth and Ninety-ninth Figures.

Other Preparations for the Ninety-eighth and Ninety-ninth Figures.

By this Figure divided into four Parts, you will at first Sight perceive the Method I observ’d in beginning the Perspective Design of this Church of S. Ignatius. The first Part shews the right-hand Side of the Vault between the Door and the Cupola. The second contains the Plan of the same Vault, with its Arches and Lunettes. The third Part represents the same right-hand Side, to the top of the Windows; where begins the Architecture painted in the Vault. The fourth Part contains the Geometrical Plan of that part of the Vault which is painted; with the Lunettes made by the Arches above the Heads of the aforesaid Windows. The Disposition of the painted Architecture above, is the same with that of the Nave of the Church; save that, answerable to the Pilasters below, I have suppos’d Columns projecting over the Work.

By this figure divided into four parts, you will quickly notice the method I used to start the perspective design of this Church of S. Ignatius. The first part shows the right-hand side of the vault between the door and the dome. The second contains the plan of the same vault, with its arches and lunettes. The third part represents the same right-hand side, up to the top of the windows, where the architecture painted on the vault begins. The fourth part contains the geometrical plan of the painted section of the vault, along with the lunettes created by the arches above the heads of the mentioned windows. The arrangement of the painted architecture above is the same as that of the nave of the church, except that, corresponding to the pilasters below, I have imagined columns projecting over the work.


Fig. xcvi.

Fig. 96.

Figura Nonagesimasexta.

Aliæ præparationes ad figuras nonagesimamoctavam & nonagesimamnonam.

Aliæ præparationes ad figuras 98 & 99.

Prima pars figuræ hujus trifariam divisæ, repræsentat elevationem geometricam lateris templi supra coronicem, & ædificii in testudine pingendi. Secunda pars complectitur arcum testudinis maximum, & elevationem geometricam faciei ejusdem ædificii. Tertia pars exhibet vestigium totius ædificii pingendi in testudine, cujus amplitudo eadem est cum amplitudine navis, ut antea dicebamus. Porrò vestigium geometricum non minus necessarium est ad pingendum ædificium, quàm ad ipsum ex materiâ solidâ extruendum, ut alibi monuimus.

The first part of this figure is divided into three sections, representing the geometric elevation of the temple's side above the cornice, and the building in the dome painting. The second part includes the largest dome arch and the geometric elevation of its facade. The third part shows the outline of the entire building to be painted in the dome, which is the same size as the width of the nave, as we mentioned earlier. Furthermore, the geometric outline is just as essential for painting the building as it is for constructing it from solid materials, as we noted elsewhere.

The Ninety-sixth Figure.

Other Preparations to the Ninety-eighth and Ninety-ninth Figures.

Other Preparations for the Ninety-eighth and Ninety-ninth Figures.

In this Figure, which consists of three parts, the first represents the Geometrical Elevation of the Right-side of the Nave above the Cornice, and of the Design painted in the Vault. The second contains the great Arch of the Vault, and the Geometrical Elevation of the Front of the said Design. The third part shews the Plan of the whole Work painted on the Vault, the Extent and Disposition of which is the same with that of the Nave, as beforemention’d. The Geometrical Plan, as I have formerly hinted, is no less necessary for the painting a Design in Perspective, than it is for raising a Structure with solid Materials.

In this figure, which has three parts, the first shows the geometric elevation of the right side of the nave above the cornice and the design painted on the vault. The second includes the large arch of the vault and the geometric elevation of the front of that design. The third part displays the overall plan of the work painted on the vault, which has the same extent and layout as that of the nave, as mentioned earlier. The geometric plan, as I mentioned before, is just as essential for painting a design in perspective as it is for constructing a solid structure.


Fig. xcvii.

Fig. xcvii.

Figura Nonages. septima.

Alia præparatio ad figuras nonagesimamoctavam & nonagesimamnonam.

Alia preparation for figures eighty-eight and eighty-nine.

Ut optica projectio vestigii & elevationis quartæ partis totius Operis distinctior evaderet, mensuras partium singularum quadruplicavi, eandemque methodum in hac delineatione tenui, quæ figuris octogesimasextâ, octogesimaseptimâ, octogesimaoctavâ, & octogesimanonâ, explicata fuit. Punctum oculi positum est in medio navis Ecclesiæ; punctum distantiæ est in lineâ ex quâ incipit arcus testudinis.

To make the optical projection of the outline and elevation of the fourth part of the entire work clearer, I quadrupled the measurements of each individual part, maintaining the same method in this drawing, which was explained in figures eighty-six, eighty-seven, eighty-eight, and eighty-nine. The eye point is located in the center of the church nave; the distance point is on the line from which the arch of the dome begins.

Ninety-seventh Figure.

Another Preparation to the Ninety-eighth and Ninety-ninth Figures.

Another Preparation for the Ninety-eighth and Ninety-ninth Figures.

That the Perspective of the fourth part of the Plan and Elevation of this Work might be more distinct, I have in this Figure made the Measures of each part four times as big as in the former; and have kept the same Method in this Delineation, as was deliver’d in the Eighty-sixth, Eighty-seventh, Eighty-eighth, and Eighty-ninth Figures foregoing. I have set the Point of Sight in the midst of the Nave of the Church; and the Point of Distance is in the Line from which the Arch of the Vault springs.

To make the perspective of the fourth part of the plan and elevation of this work clearer, I've made the measurements of each part four times larger than before; and I've used the same method in this depiction as described in the eighty-sixth, eighty-seventh, eighty-eighth, and eighty-ninth figures above. I've placed the viewpoint in the center of the church nave, and the point of distance is on the line from which the arch of the vault starts.


Fig. xcviii.

Fig. xcviii.

Figura Nonages. octava.

Quadrans Architecturæ horizontalis in fornice, cum luminibus & umbris.

Quadrants of horizontal architecture in the arch, with lights and shadows.

Habes in hac paginâ quadrantem totius Operis, modo consueto erutum ex præcedenti: nimirùm, cuspide circini ex angulis vestigii accipiuntur lineæ perpendiculares; ex angulis verò elevationis desumuntur lineæ parallelæ, ac lineæ visuales ad punctum oculi.

You got on this page a diagram of the entire work, extracted in the usual manner from the previous one: namely, perpendicular lines are taken from the angles of the outline using a compass; meanwhile, parallel lines are drawn from the angles of elevation, along with visual lines to the eye point.

Ninety-eighth Figure.

A fourth Part of the Architectonical Design, painted on the Vault of S. Ignatius’s Church; with its Lights and Shadows.

A fourth part of the architectural design, painted on the vault of St. Ignatius's Church; featuring its lights and shadows.

In this Figure you have a Quarter of the whole Work, drawn from the foregoing Figure, after the usual Manner; namely, by taking with the Compasses the perpendicular Lines from the Angles of the Plan; and the parallel Lines from those of the Elevation, as also the visual Lines to the Point of Sight.

In this figure, you have a quarter of the entire work, created based on the previous figure, in the usual way; specifically, by using the compass to take the vertical lines from the corners of the plan, the horizontal lines from the elevation, and the sight lines to the viewpoint.


Fig. xcix.

Fig. 99.

Figura Nonagesimanona.

Alter quadrans totius Operis.

Change the whole project.

Ob diversitatem duorum quadrantum, tum in longitudine, tum in luminibus & umbris, seorsim apponendum utrumque censui; ut in eis delineandis omnem difficultatem tibi adimerem.

Thinking about the differences between the two quadrants, both in length and in light & shadows, I thought it best to treat each separately; that way, I could remove any difficulty you might have in illustrating them.

The Ninety-ninth Figure.

Another Quarter of the whole Design.

Another part of the entire design.

By reason of the Difference of the two Quarters, as well in Length, as in their Lights and Shadows, I resolv’d to describe them separately, that you might find no Difficulty in designing the whole Work.

Due to the difference between the two parts, both in length and in their lights and shadows, I decided to describe them separately so that you would have no trouble understanding the entire work.


Fig. c.

Fig. c.

FIGURA Centesima.

Modus reticulationis faciendæ in testudinibus.

Tortoise networking methods.

Opera quæ fiunt in planis, contenta sunt duplici reticulatione, ut notum est. Nam una earum fit in exemplari, altera fit in superficie in quâ ipsum Opus pingendum est. At verò testudines exigunt tres reticulationes. Prima fit in exemplari, quod supponimus delineatum esse juxta regulas Perspectivæ horizontalis. Secunda reticulatio constat ex funiculis, & est pensilis; cujus formam geometricam habes in M. Locum ubi figendi sunt clavi qui sustineant funiculos, exhibent rectæ AB, EF: optica verò deformatio retis est in N. Punctum oculi est O, distantiæ est LO. Itaque si imagineris, tempore nocturno, lumen candelæ aut lucernæ existere in O, atque à reti ex funiculis projici lineas umbrosas in testudinem, eædemque lineæ pennicillo colorentur, habebitur tertia reticulatio ad pingendam testudinem necessaria.

In sketches made on flat surfaces, there are two grids, as is well known. One is drawn on a template, and the other is on the surface where the actual work is to be painted. However, turtles require three grids. The first is on the template, which we assume has been drawn according to the rules of horizontal perspective. The second grid consists of strings and is suspended; you can see its geometric shape in M. The spots where the pegs that hold the strings are to be placed are represented by the straight lines AB, EF: the optical distortion of the grid is in N. The point of view is O, with a distance of LO. Therefore, if you imagine, during nighttime, the light of a candle or lamp existing at O, and from the grid of strings, shadows are cast onto the turtle, then those same lines will be colored with a brush, and this will provide the third grid necessary for painting the turtle.

Dixi si imagineris, quia in testudinem obductam tabulato, ac remotam à reti, & multò magis à lumine, vel projici nequeunt umbræ, vel nequeunt esse vividæ ac distinctæ, ut oportet. Itaque ubi nimia fuerit distantia, figes in O extremitatem fili; eóque usque ad testudinem extenso, utéris veluti radio ac lumine candelæ, ad notandum umbræ locum. Proderit etiam, ut super tabulato motum fili obsecundes lumine alicujus candelæ, quod ipsi filo proximè admoveas. Atque his aliisque adminiculis, tuâque industriâ, colores induces super lineis umbrosis, ac tertiam reticulationem absolves. Posset etiam rete ex filis figi in parvâ distantiâ à coronice, puta in GH, unde incipit basis ædificii: tunc autem umbræ in fornice sunt magis distinctæ ac visibiles.

I said, imagine that in a covered shell on a surface, far from the net and even more from the light, shadows cannot be cast or appear clear and defined as they should. So, where the distance is too great, place the end of the line at point O; from there, extend it towards the shell, using it like a ray and the light from a candle to mark the location of the shadow. It will also help if you move the line close to the light of a candle that you hold near it. With these and other supports, along with your effort, you will bring colors to the shadowy lines, and thirdly, you will complete the network. You could also stretch a net of threads at a small distance from the crown, say at GH, where the base of the building begins; that way, the shadows in the arch are more distinct and visible.

Diligentissimè curabis, ne mensuræ exemplaris discrepent ullatenus à mensuris testudinis: ut rete incidens in angulos, arcus, aut lunulas testudinis, exactè respondeat reti exemplaris. Demum si in vitia quæ emendari nequeant, incidere nolis; scito, regulas omnes Perspectivæ horizontalis, æquè in hominibus aut animalibus, ac in columnis aut coronicibus pingendis, omnino servari oportere.

You will carefully ensure that the sample measurements don't differ at all from the turtle's measurements: that the net intersects at angles, arcs, or the turtle's crevices, precisely matching the sample net. Lastly, if there are flaws that can't be fixed, you shouldn't worry about them; just know that all the rules of horizontal perspective must be strictly followed, whether in painting humans or animals, or in columns or crowns.

The Hundredth Figure.

The Method of drawing the Net or Lattice-Work on Vaults.

The method for drawing the grid or lattice work on vaults.

For Works on a flat Superficies, two Net-works are sufficient; as has been already intimated: One drawn on the Copy; the other on the Table to be painted. But for arch’d Surfaces, or Vaults, three are requir’d: One made on the Copy, which I suppose drawn according to Rules of horizontal Perspective. The second consists of a Frame of small Cords or Threads, to be hung up; the Geometrical Form of which is M. The Lines AB, EF, shew the Place where this Frame is to be fix’d, in the same manner as the Perspective N. The Point of Sight is O; of Distance, LO. Therefore, if you imagine a Lamp or Candle fix’d in the Night-time at the Point O; the Shadows of the Thread, thrown thereby on the Vault, being trac’d by a Pencil, make the third Net-work requir’d for painting the same.

For works on a flat surface, two grids are enough, as mentioned earlier: one drawn on the reference image and the other on the surface to be painted. But for arched surfaces or vaults, three are needed: one created on the reference image, which should be drawn according to the rules of horizontal perspective. The second is a frame made of small cords or threads that will be hung up, shaped like an M. The lines AB and EF show where this frame should be fixed, similar to the perspective N. The point of sight is O; the distance is LO. So, if you picture a lamp or candle placed at point O during the night, the shadows of the threads cast onto the vault, traced with a pencil, create the third grid needed for painting.

I say, if you imagine a Lamp thus fix’d; because either the Scaffold to the Vault, or the great Distance of the Vault from the Net-work, or the greater of both from the Light, may prevent the Shadows from being thrown at all, or at least, may render them so faint, as not to be distinct enough for the purpose. Therefore, where this happens, instead of the Light fix one End of a Thread in the Point O; and extending the other to the Vault, make use of it as a Ray from the Lamp or Candle, for describing the Place of the Shadows. It will be also of great use, to second the Motion of the Thread with the Light of a Candle you may have by you on the Scaffold, holding the same near the Thread itself. By this, and other such Helps, which your own Industry will suggest, you may lay these Shadows in Colours, and complete the third Net-work requir’d. The Frame of Threads may also be fix’d nearer the Vault at some Distance above the Cornice, as at GH, where the painted Architecture begins; for the Shadows thrown on the Arch will by that means become more visible and distinct.

I say, if you picture a lamp positioned like this; because either the scaffolding to the vault, or the significant distance of the vault from the net, or a combination of both from the light, may prevent the shadows from appearing at all, or at least make them so faint that they're not clear enough for the purpose. So, when this happens, instead of the light, attach one end of a thread at point O; and stretching the other end to the vault, use it as a ray from the lamp or candle to outline the location of the shadows. It will also be very helpful to complement the movement of the thread with the light of a candle you have on the scaffolding, holding it close to the thread itself. With this and other tips that your own effort will suggest, you can lay these shadows in colors and complete the third network required. The frame of threads can also be set closer to the vault at some distance above the cornice, like at GH, where the painted architecture starts; this way, the shadows cast on the arch will become more visible and distinct.

You must be very careful, that the Measures of your Copy are exactly the same with those of the Vault, that the Net-work thrown into the Angles, Arches and Lunettes of the Vault, may perfectly correspond with that of your Copy. Lastly, if you would not run into inextricable Errors; assure yourself, that all these Rules of horizontal Perspective are as strictly to be observ’d in the Figures of Men or Animals, as in painting Columns, Cornices, or the like.

You need to be very careful that the measurements of your copy match exactly with those of the vault, so that the network placed in the angles, arches, and lunettes of the vault aligns perfectly with your copy. Finally, to avoid serious mistakes, make sure that all these rules of horizontal perspective are followed as strictly for figures of people or animals as they are for painting columns, cornices, and similar structures.


Ut Perspectivæ Tyronibus consulerem, qui fortasse non adeo facilè percipient duodecim primas figurarum explicationes, totidem novas explicationes hic addo.

For the greater Help to Beginners, and those who are less conversant in the Art of Perspective, I here subjoin a farther Explanation of the first twelve Figures of this Book.

FIGURA PRIMA.

Explicatio linearum plani, & horizontis, punctorum oculi, & distantiæ; de hoc ultimo pressiús.

Explication of the lines of the plane, & horizon, points of the eye, & distance; on this last point in more detail.

Tres lineæ diversi inter se nominis, & muneris, item, & duo puncta præcipuè necessaria sunt, ut delineatio quælibet opticè reddi queat: prima vocatur linea plani, secunda horizontalis ubi est punctum oculi; de tertia loquar in elevationibus: alterum de duobus punctis assignatur oculo, & vulgò dicitur punctum oculi; alterum verò assignatur distantiæ, à qua nomen habet. Punctum oculi notissimum est, punctum verò distantiæ non ità; in hujus igitur explicatione morabor, & ut clariùs ostendam quid sit, & quomodo formandum sit, selegi descriptionem Ecclesiæ geometricè habitam, quam in tres partes divisi, in vestigium, sectionem, & interiorem faciem, in qua facie velit quis pingere, seu delineare aliquid opticè, ut elongetur ad mensuram aperturæ quadrati P, ut habes in vestigio, & ad mensuram profunditatis Q, quam habes in sectione.

Three lines with different names and functions, along with two essential points, are needed for any optical representation: the first is called the plane line, the second is the horizontal one where the eye point is located; I will talk about the third in elevations: one of the two points is assigned to the eye, commonly known as the eye point; the other is assigned to the distance, from which it gets its name. The eye point is well known, whereas the distance point is not as familiar; therefore, I will focus on explaining this and to clarify what it is and how it should be formed, I selected a geometric description of a church, divided into three parts: the footprint, the section, and the interior face, on which someone wants to paint or depict something optically, so that it extends to the measurement of the opening of square P, as you have in the footprint, and to the measurement of the depth Q, which you have in the section.

Super faciem CCCC quam puta esse delineamentum, habes rationem, qua debes disponere supradicta puncta, & lineas. HI erit linea plani: NON erit linea horizontalis, quæ fieri solet distans à linea plani altitudine hominis, ut vides in B. Punctum oculi erit in O; punctum distantiæ erit in N, ex qua parte malueris. Hoc punctum N debet tantum abesse à puncto O, quantum tuo arbitratu tu vis procul esse ut videas profunditatem illius quadrati PQ, sicut vides in exemplo vestigii, & sectionis; ubi rem velut in suo statu naturali exhibeo; in iis enim tam abest N ab O, quam abest homo ab A ad DE, & homo B in sectione, ab FG, ubi est murus in quo pingendum, vel delineandum est.

On the surface CCCC, which you consider to be a representation, you have a method to arrange the aforementioned points and lines. Hi will be the plane line: NON will not be a horizontal line, which typically is situated at a distance from the plane line corresponding to a person's height, as you can see in B. The eye point will be at O; the distance point will be at N, whichever side you prefer. This point N should be as far from point O as you wish it to be in order to perceive the depth of that square PQ, as you can see in the example of the footprint and section; where I present the object as if in its natural state; here point N is as far from O as a person is from A to DE, and person B in the section is from FG, where there is a wall to be painted or drawn.

Si ulteriùs curiosè descriptionem hanc consideres, videbis quam bene respondeat quadratum P in plano, & elevatio Q, ut naturalis status rei in sectione Perspectivæ positæ in facie CCCC, quæ est delineatio. Videbis enim visuales, quæ secant in plano spatium RS, ita pariter secare spatium TV in elevatione: & segmentum visualium XZ in sectione respondere YK in elevatione, quod demonstratione non caret.

If you look further into this detailed description, you will see how well the square P corresponds in the plane, and the elevation Q, to the natural state of the object in the sectional perspective presented on face CCCC, which is the drawing. You will observe the visual lines that intersect the area RS, and similarly intersect the area Television in elevation: and the segment of the visuals XZ in the section corresponds to YK in elevation, which is not without demonstration.

FIRST FIGURE.

An Explanation of the Lines of the Plan and Horizon, and of the Points of Sight and Distance; but more especially of this last.

A Breakdown of the Lines of the Plan and Horizon, and of the Points of View and Distance; but especially this last one.

For beginning any Design in Perspective, there are principally requir’d three Lines, and two Points: One Line where the Feet stand, which is call’d the Line of the Plan, or Ground-line: The second where the Eye is plac’d, call’d the horizontal Line: I shall speak of the third in the Elevations. Of the Points, one is assign’d to the Eye, the other to the Distance. The first of these is generally known, the latter not so well understood, though of great Use for giving the Removal or Depth of every Object. I shall therefore insist a while on the Explanation of the Point of Distance; and that I may more clearly shew what it is, I have chosen the Geometrical Description of a Church, which is divided into three Parts; viz. the Plan, Profile, and inner Face; in the midst of which Face one would paint a Piece of Perspective, that should seem to recede as much as the Square P in the Plan, and the Depth Q in the Profile.

To start any design in perspective, you mainly need three lines and two points: One line where the feet are placed, called the line of the plan or ground line; the second line where the eye is located, called the horizontal line; I’ll explain the third line in the elevations. One of the points corresponds to the eye, and the other to the distance. The first point is widely recognized, while the second is not as well understood, even though it’s very useful for showing the space or depth of each object. Therefore, I will spend some time explaining the point of distance; to clarify what it is, I have chosen the geometrical description of a church, which is divided into three parts: viz. the plan, profile, and inner face; in the center of which face, one would paint a piece of perspective that seems to recede just as much as the square P in the plan and the depth Q in the profile.

On the Face CCCC, which suppose that of the Design, you see the Manner of disposing the two Lines and the two Points. HI is the Ground-line. NON is the horizontal Line, which is usually made a Man’s Height above the Ground line, as in B. The Point of Sight is O, the Point of Distance N, on which side you will. This Point N must be as far from O, as the Distance you determine to place yourself at for viewing the Depth of the Square PQ; as is exemplify’d in the Plan and Profile, where you see the thing as in its natural Position: And in them N is distant from O, as far as the Man in A is remov’d from DE; or the Man B in the Profile from FG, which is the Wall to be drawn or painted on.

On the Face CCCC, which represents the Design, you can see how the two Lines and the two Points are arranged. HI is the Ground line. NON is the horizontal line, usually set at a person's height above the Ground line, like in B. The Point of Sight is O, and the Point of Distance is N, on whichever side you choose. This Point N must be as far from O as the Distance you decide to place yourself to view the Depth of the Square PQ; as shown in the Plan and Profile, where you see everything in its natural Position. In those, N is as far from O as the Man in A is from DE; or the Man B in the Profile is from FG, which is the Wall that needs to be drawn or painted on.

If you farther and more strictly examine this Description, you’ll discern how well the Square of the Plan P, and the Elevation Q, correspond as if naturally put into Perspective on the Face CCCC, which is the Draught. For you see the Visuals which cut the Space RN in the Plan, cut the same Space TV in the Upright; and the Segment of the Visuals XZ in the Profile, answer that of YK in the Elevation; which needs no Demonstration.

If you take a closer and more detailed look at this Description, you'll notice how well the Square of the Plan P and the Elevation Q match up, almost as if they were naturally put into Perspective on the Face CCCC, which is the Draft. You can see that the Visuals intersecting Space RN in the Plan also cut through the same Space TV in the Upright. Additionally, the Segment of the Visuals XZ in the Profile corresponds to that of YK in the Elevation, which doesn't require any proof.

FIGURA SECUNDA.

Quadratum opticè delineatum.

Optically outlined square.

Postquam descripseris in papyro separata quadratum geometricum A, facies duas lineas parallelas inter se distantes altitudine, quam dederis puncto oculi; linea inferior erit linea plani, linea superior erit linea horizontalis, super quam ponuntur puncta oculi O, & distantiæ E, quod sit ex parte quam mavis: linea distantiæ non debet esse brevior magnitudine rerum describendarum. Transfer posteà circino latitudinem quadrati A in CB, unà cum visualibus ad punctum O; & similiter transfer longitudinem ipsius quadrati in DC, ducens lineam à puncto D ad punctum distantiæ E, transeuntem per visualem CO, & ubi illa secat, habebis terminum quadrati optici GFCB, ducens parallelam ad lineam plani in F.

After you’ve drawn a separate geometric square A on paper, create two parallel lines that are spaced apart at the height you’ve set for the eye point. The lower line will be the plane line, while the upper line will be the horizontal line, on which the eye points O and the distance E will be placed, whichever side you prefer: the distance line should not be shorter than the size of the things you’re describing. Next, use a compass to transfer the width of square A to CB, along with the visuals to the point O; similarly, transfer the length of the square to DC, drawing a line from point D to the distance point E, crossing through the visual CO, and where that intersects, you will have the endpoint of the optical square GFCB, drawing a parallel to the plane line at F.

Ut autem hoc idem citiùs absolverem, sæpius chartam complicavi, ut habes in A.

To wrap this up more quickly, I folded the paper several times, just like you have in A.

SECOND FIGURE.

A Square in Perspective.

A Square in Perspective.

After you have drawn, on a separate Paper, the Geometrical Square A, make two parallel Lines as much distant one from the other, as you would have the Height of the Eye. The under Line is the Plan or Ground-line; the upper Line is that of the Horizon, on which are plac’d the Points of Sight O, and of Distance E, on which side you please. The Line of Distance should not be shorter than the Extent of the thing to be describ’d in Perspective. Then with your Compasses set the Breadth of the Square A on CB, and draw Visuals to the Point O; and from the Length of the Square transferr’d into DC, draw a Line from the Point D to the Distance E; and where that cuts the Visual CO, by drawing a Line parallel to GF, you describe the Square in Perspective GFCB.

After you've drawn the Geometrical Square A on a separate piece of paper, make two parallel lines, spaced apart as high as you want the eye level to be. The lower line is the ground line, and the upper line is the horizon, where you'll place the points of sight O and distance E on whichever side you choose. The distance line shouldn't be shorter than the extent of the object you're trying to depict in perspective. Then, using your compass, set the width of Square A on CB, and draw lines to point O. From the length of the square transferred to DC, draw a line from point D to distance E. Where that line intersects the visual line CO, draw a line parallel to GF; this will give you the square in perspective GFCB.

For the more quick Dispatch of this, I commonly fold the Paper, as you see in A.

For quicker processing of this, I usually fold the paper like you see in A.

FIGURA TERTIA.

Rectangulus altera parte oblongior opticé.

Rectangular on one side longer visually.

Quidquid in proximo quadrato vidisti, facies in præsenti. Transferres latitudinem BC in BC, & longitudinem in CD, ducens latitudinem BC ad punctum oculi O, & longitudinem CD ad punctum distantiæ E. Ubi vero hæc linea secat visualem CO, erit terminus rectanguli supradicti FG, BC, ducens parallelam, ut supra.

Whatever you saw in the nearby square, you will do in the present. You transfer the latitude Before Christ into BC, and the longitude into CD, leading the latitude BC to the eye point O, and the longitude CD to the distance point E. Where this line intersects the visual CO, it will be the boundary of the aforementioned rectangle FG, BC leading parallel, as before.

THIRD FIGURE.

An Oblong Square in Perspective.

An Oblong Square in Perspective.

What was done in the preceding, repeat in this Third Figure. Transfer the Breadth BC into BC, and the Length into CD, drawing the Breadth BC to the Point of Sight O, and the Length CD to the Point of Distance E. Where this cuts the Visual CO, you terminate the Square FG, BC, by drawing the Parallel, as before.

What was done in the previous step, repeat in this Third Figure. Transfer the Width BC into BC, and the Length into CD, drawing the Width BC to the Point of Sight O, and the Length CD to the Point of Distance E. Where this intersects the Visual CO, complete the Square FG, BC, by drawing the Parallel, just like before.

FIGURA QUARTA.

Quadratum duplex opticé.

Double optical square.

Eodem modo construes quadratum duplex A, transferens circino, aut duplicando chartulam, latitudinem cujuscumque lineæ, ut vides in punctis 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, super lineam plani in iisdem numeris, & ab istis transferes visuales ad punctum O. Postea transfer longitudinem 7, 8, 9, 10, super lineam plani in iisdem pariter numeris, & ab istis duc lineas ad punctum distantiæ E. Ubi hæ lineæ secant lineam 6, 7, O, fiunt lineæ parallelæ ad lineam plani, & quadratum conficitur; parem constructionem facies de quadrato secundo, & tertio, facilè ex dictis.

Similarly, construct the double square A by transferring with a compass or by doubling a paper, the width of any line, as you see at points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, on the plane line at the same numbers, and transfer those visuals to the point O. Then transfer the lengths 7, 8, 9, 10, on the plane line at the same numbers, and draw lines from these to the distance point E. Where these lines intersect the line 6, 7, O, they become parallel lines to the plane line, and a square is formed; you will create the same construction for the second and third squares, easily from what has been said.

FOURTH FIGURE.

A double Square in Perspective.

A double square in perspective.

The double Square A is made after the same manner as the former, by transporting, either with the Compasses, or folded Paper, the Breadth of every Line, as you see the Points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, on the Ground-line mark’d with the same Numbers; and from these draw Visuals to the Point of Sight. Then transfer the Points of Length 7, 8, 9, 10, into the Ground-line, as you see also in the same Numbers; and direct their Lines to the Point of Distance E. Where these intersect the Visual 6, 7, O, make Parallels to the Ground-line, and the Square is complete. The same is done in describing the middle Square, and that on the other Side.

The double Square A is created in the same way as the previous one, by measuring the width of each line using either Compasses or folded paper, as shown by the points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 on the baseline marked with the same numbers; then, draw lines to the Point of Sight from these. Next, transfer the length points 7, 8, 9, 10 onto the baseline, as indicated by the same numbers; and direct their lines to the Point of Distance E. Where these intersect the lines 6, 7, O, draw parallels to the baseline, and the Square is finished. The same process applies to drawing the middle Square and the one on the other side.

FIGURA QUINTA.

Quadratorum vestigia cum elevationibus.

Quadrant footprints with elevations.

Figuram hanc in duas partes divisi; in superiori parte vides tria quadrata optica aliquantulum adumbrata, eaque tam inter se distantia, quanta est distributio super lineam plani. BC erit quadratum primum. Secundum erit in EF. Si ergo posueris longitudinem quadrati in BC, eamque duxeris ad distantiam, secabit in DD visualem AO. Si pariter posueris alterum spatium longitudinis ejusdem quadrati in EF, & duxeris ad lineam distantiæ, habebis secundum quadratum opticé. Idem facies de tertio, & de aliis, quæ distribuenda sunt.

This figure is divided into two parts; in the upper part, you see three optical squares lightly shaded, spaced apart as indicated along the line of the plane. BC will be the first square. The second will be at EF. So, if you place the length of the square at BCE and extend it to the distance, it will intersect at DD with the visual AO. If you similarly place another length of that same square at EF and extend it to the distance line, you will have the second square visually. You will do the same for the third and for any others that need to be distributed.

In secunda parte. Si desideres supra totidem vestigia formare elevationes cuborum, & stylobatarum, ut in inferiori figuræ parte vides, satis erit ex omni vestigiorum angulo elevare lineas occultas, & apparentes, determinando altitudinem faciei L primo cubo, & anguli ejusdem faciei dabunt altitudinem omnium aliorum.

In the second part. If you want to create the same outlines for the elevations of cubes and stylobates, as you see in the lower part of the figure, it will be enough to raise hidden and visible lines from every corner of the outlines, determining the height of face L of the first cube, and the angles of that face will give the height of all the others.

Immò etiam totidem cubos formare potes sine lineis occultis, ducendo solùm apparentes, ut vides in tribus expositis adumbratis, & nitidis, quorum perpendiculares sumuntur ab angulis vestigiorum, ut in superiori figura habes in H, & lineæ plani translatæ sunt ab angulis elevationis, ut videtur in F.

Actually, you can also create the same number of cubes without hidden lines, just by using the visible ones, as you see in the three presented as shaded and bright, whose verticals are taken from the corners of the marks, as shown in the upper figure in H, and the flat lines are translated from the angles of elevation, as it appears in F.

FIFTH FIGURE.

Several Plans of Squares, with their Elevations.

Various designs of squares, along with their elevations.

I have divided this Figure into two Parts; In the uppermost you have three Squares in Perspective a little shadow’d, distant one from another, according to their Distribution on the Ground-line. BC is the first Square; EF the second. If you then set the Length of a Square on BC, and draw Lines to the Point of Distance, they will intersect the Visual AO in DD. In like manner, if you set another Length of the said Square on EF, and draw to the Point of Distance, you’ll have the second Square in Perspective. The same you may do in the third, and as many as you have occasion for.

I’ve split this Figure into two Parts. In the top part, you see three Squares in Perspective, slightly shaded and spaced apart according to where they sit on the Ground-line. BC is the first Square, and EF is the second. If you mark the Length of a Square on BC and draw Lines to the Point of Distance, they will meet the Visual AO at DD. Similarly, if you mark another Length of that Square on EF and draw to the Point of Distance, you'll get the second Square in Perspective. You can do the same for the third Square and as many as you need.

In the second Part you see, that if upon the fore-mention’d Plans the Elevations of Cubes or Pedestals were requir’d, it would suffice to elevate the occult and visible Lines from every Angle of the Plan; and determining the Height of the Face L of the first Cube, the Angles of that Face drawn to the Point of Sight, give the Height of all the others.

In the second part, you can see that if the elevations of cubes or pedestals are needed based on the plans mentioned earlier, it would be enough to raise the hidden and visible lines from every angle of the plan. By determining the height of the face L of the first cube, the angles of that face drawn to the viewpoint provide the height of all the others.

You may form the same Cubes without occult Lines, drawing only those that are apparent, as you see in the three Cubes that are finish’d and shadow’d; the Perpendiculars of which are taken with the Compasses from the Angles of the Plan, as is shewn in HI of the upper Figure; and the level Lines are transferr’d from the Angles of the Elevation, as in FG of the same Figure.

You can create the same cubes without hidden lines, drawing only the ones that are visible, as you see in the three completed and shaded cubes. The vertical lines are measured with a compass from the corners of the plan, as shown in HI of the upper figure, and the horizontal lines are transferred from the corners of the elevation, as in FG of the same figure.

FIGURA SEXTA.

Modus delineandi opticè sine lineis occultis.

Modus delineandi opticè sine lineis occultis.

Desiderans facili methodo figuram hanc exponere, dabo rationem elevandi corpora sine lineis occultis, ut in superiori tetigi; ostendam igitur hic, quomodo quinque cubi adumbrati desumantur ab eorum vestigiis, & elevationibus.

Wanting an easy way to explain this concept, I will provide a method for lifting bodies without hidden lines, as I mentioned earlier; I will show here how to obtain five shaded cubes from their outlines and elevations.

Duas debes facere præparationes, si libeat, in chartis etiam separatis. Prima erit formare geometricè vestigium, & elevationem, ut vides in B & A. Secunda erit distribuere super lineam plani latitudinem vestigii B, puta in NM, & in duabus proximis: Illius longitudo MX ducta ad distantiam D, secat visualem MO in R. Spatium autem obliquatum E utile etiam est aliis duobus quadratis positis super eamdem lineam plani; anguli quorum translati ad distantiam B, totidem angulos dabunt inter visuales NO, MO. Hoc posito, duces perpendicularem ad angulum N, quæ in elevationibus geometricis semper necessaria est, eaque tertia linea est, quam supra dixi. Transfer postea altitudinem A in NF, cum visualibus FO, NO, & invenies altitudinem ST. Hoc pariter de cæteris eveniet.

You need to make two preparations, if you'd like, on separate sheets of paper. The first will be to create a geometric outline and elevation, as you see in B & A. The second will involve distributing the width of the outline B along the line of the plane, say at NM, and in the two adjacent ones: Its length MX drawn to the distance D intersects visual MO at R. The slanted space E is also useful for the other two squares positioned on the same line of the plane; their angles, shifted by the distance B, will give the same angles between visuals NO, MO. With this established, draw a perpendicular line to angle N, which is always necessary in geometric elevations; this is the third line I mentioned earlier. Then transfer the height A to NF, using visuals FO, NO, and you'll find the height ST. The same will happen with the others.

Sciendum superest quonam modo supradicta præparatione uti possis ad construendos stylobatas adumbratos, & inornatos.

You should know how to use the aforementioned preparation to build shadowy and unadorned stylobates.

Super aliam igitur chartam dispone situm cum duabus lineis, plani scilicet, & horizontis, una cum puncto oculi O, & perpendiculari V, ejusdem mensuræ cum supradicta præparatione, & faciens uti me fecisse vides. Experire postea circino NF æqualia esse 1, 5, & 2, 6. Metire pariter ST, & invenies æqualia 7 & 3; facies postea lineas planas, & visuales ad punctum oculi, & habebis planum superius cubi in 1, 2, 3, 4. Hoc idem faciendum est de aliis. Uno verbo: anguli vestigiorum dabunt tibi lineas perpendiculares, & anguli elevationis dabunt lineas planas; atque hoc semper erit.

So, arrange another sheet with two lines, clearly horizontal and flat, along with the point of view O, and a perpendicular V, of the same measurement as the preparation mentioned earlier, and you can see how I did it. Next, use a compass NF to check if 1, 5, and 2, 6 are equal. Measure ST as well, and you'll find that 7 and 3 are equal; then, draw flat and visual lines to the point of view, and you'll have the upper plane of the cube at 1, 2, 3, 4. You need to do the same for the others. In short: the angles of the steps will give you perpendicular lines, and the angles of elevation will give you flat lines; and this will always be the case.

SIXTH FIGURE.

The Manner of designing in Perspective without occult Lines.

How to design in Perspective without hidden lines.

Being desirous to make this Rule as easy as possible, I shall give a farther Account of raising Solids without the Help of occult Lines, which I only touch’d upon in the foregoing Figure. I therefore here shew you, how the five shadow’d Cubes of this Figure are taken from their Plans and Elevations.

Being eager to make this Rule as simple as possible, I will provide a further explanation on how to create solids without the use of hidden lines, which I only briefly mentioned in the previous figure. Therefore, I will show you how the five shaded cubes in this figure are derived from their plans and elevations.

Two things preparatory are to be done, and, if you please, on separate Papers. The first is, to describe the Geometrical Plan and Elevation, as you see in B and A. The second is, to dispose on the Ground-line the Breadth of the Plan B; as, for Example, in NM, and the two next to it. The Length thereof MX, drawn to the Point of Distance D, cuts the Visual MO in R; and the Foreshortning E serves also for the other two Squares plac’d upon the same Ground-line, whole Angles being directed to the Distance D, give as many Angles on the Visuals NO, MO. This done, erect a Perpendicular on the Angle N, which in Geometrical Elevations is always necessary, and is the third Line mention’d in the first Figure. Then carry the Height A on NF, drawing the Visuals FO, NO, which determine the Height ST, and that of the other Squares.

Two things need to be prepared, and if you'd like, on separate sheets of paper. The first is to describe the geometric plan and elevation, as shown in B and A. The second is to position the width of Plan B along the ground line; for example, in NM, and the two next to it. The length MX, drawn to the point of distance D, intersects the visual line MO at point R; and the foreshortening E also applies to the other two squares placed on the same ground line, with all angles directed towards distance D, creating as many angles on the visuals NO, MO. Once that's done, draw a perpendicular line at angle N, which is always necessary in geometric elevations and is the third line mentioned in the first figure. Then bring the height A down on NF, drawing the visuals FO, NO, which determine the height ST, as well as the height of the other squares.

It remains to be known, how to make use of the foresaid Preparation for the Construction of the shadow’d Pedestals.

It is still unclear how to use the aforementioned preparation for building the shaded pedestals.

On another Paper therefore dispose the Horizontal and Ground-lines, together with the Point of Sight O, and the Perpendicular V, keeping the same Measures as in the aforesaid Preparation, and doing as I have done. You may prove by the Compasses, that NF is equal to 1, 5, and 2, 6, and measuring ST, you’ll find it equal to 7, 3, then drawing the level Lines, and the Visuals to the Point of Sight, you have the upper Face of the Cube C in 1, 2, 3, 4. The same must be done in the others. In a word, the Angles of the Plan give you the perpendicular Lines, and the Angles of the Elevation give the level Lines, or those parallel to the Ground-line; and this you are always to understand for the future.

On another piece of paper, lay out the horizontal and ground lines, along with the point of sight O and the perpendicular V, keeping the same measurements as in the previous setup, and following my example. You can check with the compass that NF is equal to 1.5 and 2.6, and by measuring ST, you'll find it equals 7.3. Then, by drawing the level lines and the visuals to the point of sight, you get the upper face of the cube C at 1, 2, 3, 4. You should do the same for the others. In short, the angles of the plan give you the perpendicular lines, and the angles of the elevation provide the level lines, or those parallel to the ground line; and you should always keep this in mind moving forward.

FIGURA SEPTIMA.

Aliud exemplum construendi vestigium geometricum, cum elevatione longitudinis.

Aliud exemplum construendi geometriche figuras, cum elevatione longitudinis.

Vides hic stylobatam P in quatuor partes divisum, & adumbratum. Si illum opticè delineare velis, construere debes supradictas præparationes, geometricam nempe, & opticam. Nomine geometricæ intelligo vestigium A, & elevationem B; nomine vero opticæ, totum id quod includitur in GCDEO.

Here you see the stylobate P divided into four parts and outlined. If you want to draw it optically, you need to set up the aforementioned preparations, specifically geometric and optical. By geometric, I mean the trace A and the height B; by optical, I refer to everything included in GCDEO.

Transfer igitur latitudinem geometricam CD vestigii A super lineam plani pariter CD, & transfer longitudinem DE super lineam plani pariter DE, operans more solito; & habebis vestigium opticé. Transfer posteà elevationem HX in CG perpendicularis; ducens visualem GO, eleva ad lineam GO omnem angulum, quem planum facit in linea CO, & habebis altitudinem necessariam etiam sectionis.

Now transfer the geometric width CD of the trail A onto the flat line CD, and transfer the length DE onto the flat line DE, working as usual; and you will have the trail visually. Then transfer the height HX to CG perpendicularly; drawing the visual I'm ready. Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize., raise every angle that the plane makes with the line CO along the line Sure! Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize., and you will have the necessary height as well for the section.

Transferes denique circino in aliam chartam angulos vestigii, qui dabunt tibi lineas perpendiculares, & anguli sectionis dabunt lineas planas: Visuales vero duces ad punctum oculi.

Finally, transfer the corners of the tracing to another sheet of paper, which will give you perpendicular lines, and the angles of the section will provide flat lines: Visual guides to the point of sight.

SEVENTH FIGURE.

Another Example of a Geometrical Plan, with the Elevation of its Length.

Another Example of a Geometric Plan, with the Elevation of its Length.

If you would delineate in Perspective the Pedestal P, which you here see divided into four Parts, and shadow’d; you must make the two foregoing Preparations; namely, the Geometrical and the Perspective. By the Geometrical, I mean the Plan A, and the Elevation B; By the Perspective, all that’s contain’d within G, C, D, E, O.

If you want to represent the pedestal P in perspective, which you see divided into four parts and shaded, you need to complete the two previous preparations: the geometrical and the perspective. By geometrical, I refer to the plan A and the elevation B; by perspective, I mean everything contained within G, C, D, E, O.

Then transfer the Geometrical Breadth CD of the Plan A, into CD of the Ground-line; and the Length DE of the said Plan into DE of the Ground-line working after the usual manner; and you will have the Plan in Perspective. Again, set the Elevation HX on CG of the Perpendicular, and drawing the Visual GO, elevate thereto every Angle made by the Plan on the Line CO, and you have all the Heights necessary for the Profile.

Then take the geometric width CD from Plan A and transfer it to the CD of the ground line; also transfer the length DE from the same plan to the DE of the ground line in the usual way, and you'll end up with the plan in perspective. Next, place the elevation HX on CG of the perpendicular, and by drawing the visual GO, raise every angle created by the plan on the line CO, and you'll have all the heights needed for the profile.

Lastly, by the Compasses you transport on a clean Paper the Angles of the Plan, which give the perpendicular Lines; and those of the Profile, which give the level Lines. The Visuals you draw to the Point of Sight.

Lastly, with the compasses, you transfer the angles of the plan onto a clean sheet of paper, which represent the vertical lines, and those of the profile, which represent the horizontal lines. The visuals are drawn to the point of sight.

FIGURA OCTAVA.

Stylobata opticé.

Stylobata opticé.

Hic etiam postquam feceris supradictas præparationes, geometricam scilicet, & opticam; facies præsentem stylobatam adumbratum, transferens circino angulos vestigii, ut construas perpendiculares; & angulos sectionis, ut formes lineas planas, ut supra. Nam sic duo anguli vestigii MO dabunt lineas perpendiculares EF; angulus vestigii R dabit perpendicularem P, & sic reliqui anguli dabunt reliquas lineas perpendiculares. Similiter à sectione angulus I dabit lineam planam HN. Breviter, primus terminus sectionis ID dabit altitudinem linearum planarum in facie stylobatæ adumbrati EFHN. Secundus terminus Q dabit altitudinem faciei oppositæ, & occultæ P.

After you have made the aforementioned preparations, specifically in geometry and optics, you will create a shaded plan for the base, transferring angles from the outline to draw perpendicular lines and section angles to form flat lines, as mentioned earlier. In this way, two angles from the outline, MO, will give you the perpendicular lines EF; the angle from the outline R will provide the perpendicular line P, and similarly, the other angles will yield the remaining perpendicular lines. Likewise, from the section, the angle I will give you the flat line HN. In short, the first endpoint of the section ID will determine the height of the flat lines on the shaded base EFHN. The second endpoint Q will establish the height of the opposite and hidden face P.

Duo tamen moneo; primum, ut faciens vestigia geometrica, ducas ab elevatione A totidem lineas ad latera vestigii B, quot angulos invenies in prominentiis supradictæ elevationis A, ut manifestè vides in lineis quas ex punctis composui, illæ enim à stylobata A cadunt super vestigium B; quare prominentia major in elevatione L facit lineam majorem L in vestigio.

However, I advise you of two things; first, as you create geometric outlines, draw from the height A as many lines to the edges of the outline B as there are angles in the projections of the previously mentioned height A, as you can clearly see in the lines I formed from the points; for they fall from the stylobate A onto the outline B; therefore, a larger projection in the height L creates a larger line L in the outline.

Secundum quod moneo sit, ut volens elongare vestigium opticè delineatum MOR à linea plani K, quantum erit spatium C in eadem linea plani, tantumdem elongabitur spatium G à linea ejusdem plani.

According to what I advise, if you want to extend the optical outline MOR from the plane line K, the amount you extend space C along that plane line will equally extend space G from the same plane line.

EIGHTH FIGURE.

A Pedestal in Perspective.

A Pedestal in Perspective.

Here also, after you have made the two foregoing Preparations, the Geometrical and the Perspective; this shadow’d Pedestal is made by taking with the Compasses the Angles of the Plan, for drawing the Perpendiculars, and the Angles of the Profile for the level Lines, as before. Thus the two Angles of the Plan MO, give the perpendicular Lines EF. The Angle of the Plan R, gives the Perpendicular P; and the other Angles give their respective Perpendiculars. So likewise in the Profile, the Angle I gives the level Line HN. In short, the first Out-line of the Profile ID gives the Height of the level Lines on the Front of the shadow’d Pedestal. The other Out-line Q gives the Height of the occult and back part thereof.

Here, once you've completed the two previous preparations, the Geometrical and the Perspective, this shadowed pedestal is created by using a compass to measure the angles of the plan, which helps in drawing the perpendiculars, and the angles of the profile to establish the level lines, as mentioned earlier. The two angles of the plan MO provide the perpendicular lines EF. The angle of the plan R gives the perpendicular P, and the other angles provide their corresponding perpendiculars. Similarly, in the profile, angle I gives the level line HN. In short, the initial outline of the profile ID determines the height of the level lines on the front of the shadowed pedestal. The other outline Q defines the height of the hidden and back part of it.

Nevertheless, two things are to be observ’d; first, that in making the Geometrical Plan, you draw from the Elevation A, as many Lines to the Side of the Plan B, as you have Angles in the Projectures of the said Elevation; as is manifest in the pointed Lines, which fall, from the Upright A, on the Plan B, where that of the greatest Projecture L in the Elevation makes the outer Line L of the Plan.

Nevertheless, two things should be noted: first, when creating the Geometrical Plan, you should draw as many lines from the Elevation A to the side of the Plan B as there are angles in the projections of that elevation; this is clear in the pointed lines that extend from the upright A to the Plan B, where the line corresponding to the largest projection L in the Elevation creates the outer line L of the Plan.

The second thing to be observ’d, is, That if you would have the Perspective-Plan MOR as far within the Ground-line K, as the Breadth of the Space C on the same Line, the Space G will then be the Distance thereof from the said Ground-line.

The second thing to observe is that if you want the Perspective-Plan MOR as far inside the Ground-line K as the Width of the Space C on the same line, then the Space G will be the Distance from that Ground-line.

FIGURA NONA.

Optica delineatio Architecturæ Jacobi Barozzii: & primum, de stylobata Ordinis Etrusci.

Optical Outline of the Architecture of Jacopo Barozzi: & first, about the stylobate of the Etruscan Order.

Quandoquidem omnibus nota est Architectura Barozzii, eam hic penitus immutatam cum suis regulis particularibus, & generalibus expono; Metieris autem illam modulis ut fieri solet; qui igitur illam desiderat, in sequentibus figuris inveniet totam, simulque discet opticè reddere. Cum autem non minus Opticæ studioso quam Architecturæ necesse sit, efficere delineamenta rei construendæ, ab hoc verè, ab illo fictè, id est, cum uterque facere debeat vestigium, elevationem, sectionem, & faciem, ob id delineavi hic stylobatam Ordinis Etrusci cum suo vestigio, quem vides in AB, ut faciliùs percipias quod in proxima figura dixi, à totidem scilicet angulis prominentiarum elevationis, totidem ducendas esse lineas super lineam vestigii; cum hoc necesse sit ad inveniendum illorum angulorum cum istis lineis concursum in suis degradationibus. Nota, longitudinem, quam voco F ductam in G esse illam, à qua non solùm nascitur vestigii obliquitas, verùm etiam ab illa nascitur obliquitas illius quam voco sectionem E. Ob id in altero hujus ejusdem figuræ stylobata totum id è contrario videbis.

Since everyone knows the architecture of Barozzi, I present it here, fully transformed with its specific and general rules. I’ll describe how to approach it in modular format; therefore, anyone who wants to understand it will find it in the following figures and will also learn how to represent it optically. It’s essential for both those interested in optics and architecture to create outlines for a structure, as both must produce a footprint, elevation, section, and façade. For that reason, I’ve outlined the stylobate of the Etruscan Order with its footprint, which you can see in AB, so you can better understand what I mentioned in the next figure: there should be as many lines drawn over the footprint as there are angles in the elevation of the projections; this is necessary to find the intersection of those angles with these lines in their degradations. Note, the length that I refer to as F drawn in G is the one from which not only the obliqueness of the footprint arises, but also the obliqueness of what I call section E originates from it. Therefore, in the other stylobate of the same figure, you will see the entire thing from the opposite perspective.

Non ampliùs repetam quonam modo eruatur nitida delineatio, de qua superiùs pluries; dicam tamen angulos primi termini sectionis E daturos lineas planas faciei D, & angulos vestigii daturos omnes perpendiculares.

I won't repeat how a clear outline is created, as I've mentioned it several times before; however, I will say that the angles of the first section point E will provide flat lines on face D and the footprints will give all perpendiculars.

NINTH FIGURE.

The Architecture of Vignola put in Perspective; and first, the Pedestal of the Tuscan Order.

The Architecture of Vignola viewed in perspective; and first, the pedestal of the Tuscany order.

Since every one is acquainted with Vignola’s Architecture, I determine not to alter it, but to explain it, with its general and particular Rules; measuring the same with Modules, after the usual manner. He therefore that has it not, may find it in the following Figures, and at the same time learn the Method of putting it in Perspective. And whereas the Drawing the Plan, Elevation and Profile of what’s to be built, is no less necessary for him that studies Perspective, than for the Architect, the first performing in Appearance, what the latter does in Reality; I have therefore here delineated the Tuscan Pedestal, with its Plan, as you see in AB, that you may the better apprehend what I said in the foregoing Figure, That from all the Angles of Projecture in the Elevation, Lines must be let fall on the Plan; this being of absolute necessity for finding the Correspondence of the Angles with the Lines in the Perspective Projection. Observe, that what I always call Length, as from F to G, is that from which proceeds not only the Foreshortning of the Plan; but also that which I call the Profile E. Wherefore, in the opposite Pedestal of the same Figure, you’ll see a contrary Disposition of the Whole.

Since everyone is familiar with Vignola’s Architecture, I won’t change it but will explain it, along with its general and specific rules; measuring it with modules, as is customary. Anyone who doesn't have it can find it in the following figures while also learning how to put it in perspective. Since drawing the plan, elevation, and profile of what needs to be built is just as essential for someone studying perspective as it is for the architect—where one creates the appearance while the other works in reality—I have illustrated the Tuscan Pedestal here, with its plan shown in AB. This will help you better understand what I mentioned in the previous figure: that from all angles of projection in the elevation, lines must be projected down onto the plan. This is absolutely necessary for determining the correspondence of the angles with the lines in the perspective projection. Note that I always refer to length, as from F to G, which is what gives rise not only to the foreshortening of the plan but also to what I call the profile E. Therefore, in the opposite pedestal of the same figure, you will see a different arrangement of the whole.

I shall not here repeat, how the finish’d Pedestal is taken from these; having so largely spoken of that before; but briefly tell you, that the Angles of the first Out-line of the Profile E give the level Lines of the Face D, and the Angles of the Plan give all the Perpendiculars.

I won’t go over again how the finished pedestal is derived from these, having discussed that in detail before; instead, I'll briefly explain that the angles of the initial outline of Profile E establish the level lines of Face D, and the angles of the plan provide all the perpendiculars.

FIGURA DECIMA.

Stylobata Doricus, & ratio vitandi difficultatem quamdam, quæ occurrit inter illum opticè delineandum.

Stylobata Doricus, & the way to avoid a certain difficulty that arises when trying to outline it visually.

Hic oritur difficultas hæc. Vestigium A opticè translatum in C adeò contrahitur, ut distinctè videri nequeat ubi collocetur circini pes, ut transferri possint perpendiculares stylobatæ adumbrati; totaque hæc difficultas oritur à propinquitate quam habet linea horizontalis, seu punctum oculi cum linea plani. Ut igitur illam vincas: Duces lineam plani inferiùs quantum libuerit, & super illam feres denuò latitudinem, & longitudinem more solito, retinendo puncta oculi, & distantiæ OF, & sic videbis vestigia magis minusve distincta; Vestigium enim E distinctius est vestigio D, & D distinctius est vestigio C.

This is where the difficulty arises. The trace A visually translated to C becomes so compressed that it cannot be clearly seen where the foot of the compass is placed, making it impossible to transfer the perpendiculars to the shaded stylobate; and this entire difficulty arises from the proximity of the horizontal line or the eye point to the plane line. To overcome this: Draw the plane line below as far as you wish, and then again add the width and length above it as usual, keeping the eye point and the distance OF, and thus you will see the traces more or less distinct; for the trace E is clearer than the trace D, and D is clearer than the trace C.

TENTH FIGURE.

A Dorick Pedestal, with the Manner of shunning a Difficulty, which occurs in putting the same in Perspective.

A Doric style Pedestal, with the way of avoiding a challenge that comes up when placing it in perspective.

In this Figure a Difficulty arises, which is this; That the Plan A put in Perspective in C, is so foreshorten’d, that one can’t see distinctly, where to place the Compasses, for transferring the Perpendiculars on the shadow’d Pedestal; which is caus’d by the too near Approach of the horizontal Line to the Ground-line. For avoiding this Difficulty, draw another Ground-line as much below the first as you please, and carry the Breadth and Length thereon, after the usual manner, still keeping the same Points of Sight and Distance O and F: And according to the Removal of the Ground-line, the Plans will be more or less distinct; as you see the Plan E is more distinct than D, and D is more so than C.

In this figure, there's a challenge: the Perspective of Plan A shown in C is so compressed that it’s hard to see clearly where to position the compass for marking the vertical lines on the shaded pedestal. This happens because the horizontal line is too close to the ground line. To solve this problem, draw another ground line at a distance below the first one that you prefer, and measure the width and length from there as usual, while still keeping the same Points of Sight and Distance O and F. Depending on how far you move the ground line, the plans will appear more or less clear; for example, Plan E is clearer than D, and D is clearer than C.

FIGURA UNDECIMA.

Stylobata Ionicus, & ratio vitandi aliam difficultatem in elevationibus.

Stylobata Ionicus, & a way to avoid another difficulty in elevations.

In elevationibus etiam sectionis opticè potest accidere, ut si visualis LK nimis recta sit, sectio B restringatur. Elongando lineam plani ab L ad M, visualis MN erit inclinatior, & consequenter sectio C erit latior, & distinctior.

In higher sections, it can also happen that if the visual LK is too straight, section B will be restricted. By extending the line of the plane from L to M, the visual MN will be more inclined, and as a result, section C will be wider and clearer.

Nota, difficultatem hanc sæpe sæpiùs te habiturum in figuris præcipuè, quæ multas lineas habent, ut in figura quadragesimasecunda, ubi pariter rationem vitandi confusionem reddam.

Note, you will often have this difficulty in figures, especially those with many lines, as in figure forty-two, where I will also explain how to avoid confusion.

Neque tibi molestiæ sim, quod in hac figura lineam horizontalem infra lineam plani collocaverim, id enim feci, ut illarum diversos effectus videas, utque tu in tuis studiis mutes, & discas.

Don't worry about me being a bother because I've placed a horizontal line below the flat line in this figure; I did this so you can see the different effects of those lines, and so you can make changes in your studies and learn.

ELEVENTH FIGURE.

The Ionick Pedestal, and the Way to shun another Difficulty in the Elevations.

The Ionick Pedestal, and how to avoid another challenge in the Elevations.

In Elevations of the Profile in Perspective, it may sometimes happen, that the Visual LK may be so direct, as to render the Profile B too close and narrow; wherefore prolonging the Ground-line from L to M, make the Visual MN, which being much more oblique, does consequently render the Profile C more broad and distinct.

In Elevations of the Profile in Perspective, it may occasionally occur that the Visual LK is so direct that it makes Profile B appear too close and narrow. Therefore, by extending the Ground-line from L to M, create Visual MN, which is much more angled and therefore makes Profile C appear broader and clearer.

And observe, that this Difficulty will very often occur; especially in Figures that have many Lines, as the Forty-second Figure has, where I speak also of the manner of avoiding the same.

And keep in mind that this challenge will often come up, especially in Figures that have a lot of Lines, like the Forty-second Figure, where I also discuss how to avoid it.

Nor let it trouble you, that in this Figure I have plac’d the horizontal Line below the Ground-line; which I have done, that you might see their different Effects, and by changing the Disposition of your Designs, improve and learn.

Nor let it bother you that in this figure I've placed the horizontal line below the ground line; I've done this so you can see their different effects, and by changing the arrangement of your designs, you can improve and learn.

FIGURA DUODECIMA.

Stylobata Corinthius cum suis pilis.

Corinthian stylobate with its columns.

Fecisse septimam figuram magno tibi documento erit ad construendum, & dividendum stylobatam A, & vestigium B; cum nihil addere debeas præter pilas C cum coronice, quæ duo latera ambit. Opticè hoc vestigium delineabis in D, quæ delineatio distinctior est, quia inferiùs duxi lineam plani; & distinctior etiam est sectio E, cum elongaverim visualem FG. Sic semper agam, ut detur locus figuræ adumbratæ, & ut etiam videas perpendiculares stylobatæ adumbrati cadere super angulos vestigii, & lineas planas incidere è diametro super angulos sectionis E. Iterùm libenter moneo, ut facias supradictas præparationes in chartulis separatis, ut initio assuescas transferendis figuris nitidis circino; facile enim tibi postea erit integras machinas Perspectivæ jucundioris delineare, ut videbis: in hoc enim tota regulæ hujusce, & totius operis facilitas sita est.

Creating the seventh shape will serve as a great guide for building and dividing the stylobate A and footprint B; since you should only need to add spheres C with a crown that surrounds both sides. You will visually outline this footprint in D, which is a clearer outline, as I have drawn the flat line below; and the section E is also clearer, as I have extended the visual FG. Thus, I will always ensure there is space for the outlined figure, and that you can also see the perpendicular outlines of the stylobate falling on the corners of the footprint, and the flat lines intersecting from the diameter over the corners of section E. Again, I gladly remind you to make the aforementioned preparations on separate sheets, so you can get used to transferring clean figures with a compass; it will be much easier for you to later sketch complete machines of a more pleasing perspective, as you will see: for in this lies the essence of this rule and the overall ease of the work.

TWELFTH FIGURE.

A Corinthian Pedestal, with its Pilasters.

A Corinthian Pedestal with Pilasters.

The Performance of the Seventh Figure will be a great Assistance to you, in the Construction and Division of this Pedestal A, and the Plan B; since you have nothing more to add here, but the Pilasters C, and the Mouldings which surround the two Sides. This Plan is put in Perspective in D, and becomes more distinct by my sinking the Ground-line lower; and the Profile E is also more distinct by the Removal of the Visual FG, as mention’d in the foregoing Chapter. This I shall always do, that there may remain Room for the shadow’d Figure, and that you may also see that the Perpendiculars of the shaded Pedestal fall directly upon the Angles of the Plan, and that the level Lines directly answer the Angles of the Profile E. I repeat my Advice, that you would make the foresaid Preparations on several Papers, and accustom yourself at the beginning to take off the finish’d Figures with the Compasses; for it will become very easy to you afterward, to design entire Machines of delightful Perspectives, as you’ll see hereafter. And indeed in this Practice, the Facility of this Rule, and of all that follows in this Work, does chiefly consist.

The performance of the Seventh Figure will be a great help to you in constructing and dividing this Pedestal A and the Plan B. Since you have nothing more to add here, just the Pilasters C and the Mouldings surrounding the two sides. This Plan is shown in perspective in D and becomes clearer by lowering the ground line. The Profile E is also clearer by removing the visual FG, as mentioned in the previous chapter. I will always do this to allow room for the shaded figure and to show that the perpendiculars of the shaded Pedestal fall directly on the angles of the Plan, and that the horizontal lines directly correspond to the angles of the Profile E. I repeat my advice that you should make the aforementioned preparations on multiple sheets of paper and get into the habit of using compasses to reproduce the finished figures at the beginning. This will make it much easier for you later to design entire machines with delightful perspectives, as you'll see later on. Indeed, the ease of this rule and all that follows in this work mainly consists of this practice.


Respondetur objectioni factæ circa punctum oculi opticum.

Non omnium sensus est, uni optico operi unicum tantùm punctum assignare, e. g. toti spatio fornicis, tholi, & tribunæ, quam vocant, expressæ in figura nonagesimatertia, nolunt concedi unicum punctum, volunt concedi plura.

Non every sense is the same; for a single optical work, it's not just assigned one specific point, e. g. in the entire space of an arch, dome, and what they call the tribune expressed in the figure ninetieth, they refuse to concede a single point; they prefer to concede multiple.

Respondeo, objectionem hanc dupliciter intelligi posse: vel enim intelligi posset, non esse assignandum unicum punctum toti illi spatio; atque in hoc sensu vera est; cum enim spatium illud valde oblongum sit, dividi debuit in partes, atque assignanda tribunæ, quam dicunt, tholo, & fornici, propria puncta; cum hoc communiter doceant, ubi situs nimium est longus, & parùm altus. Vel potest intelligi de qualibet ex dictis partibus, & sic intellecta penitùs falsa est. Primò, quia præstantiores fornices aularum, & templorum, qui optico artificio ornati sint, si unicum opus reddunt, à suismet authoribus determinatum idemque unicum punctum accepisse compertum est. Secundò, quia cum ars optica sit mera veri fictio, non id pictor facere potest, ut à qualibet parte simulet veritatem, verùm ab uno determinato puncto id ostendit. Tertiò, quia si, e. g. fornici, qui uno integroque optico opere ornetur, plura puncta assignaveris, nullum reperies locum, unde integrum opus spectare possis, & ad summum ex quolibet puncto tantùm partem illius spectabis, nusquam verò totum opus. Ex dictis igitur rationibus concludo ab inducentibus plura puncta in eodem opere induci malum majus eo, quod unicum punctum inducit; quare hoc omnino necessarium est situi in quo unicum opus formandum sit, ad quod collimare debeant ex omni operis parte figuræ simul & architectura. Quo posito, negari rationabiliter nequit, à me etiam concedi unicum punctum spectando fornici amplo, aptoque ad repræsentandum unicum opus, qualis est fornix in D. Ignatii templo. Si verò propter situm irregularem, ut dicimus, architectura extra punctum aliquantulum deformetur, & figuræ pariter operi optico intermixtæ extra commune punctum aliquam patientur deformitatem, præterquam quod à supradictis rationibus excusatur, nequaquam id vitio arti est, sed laudi; quandoquidem ars à suo puncto exhibet, proportione positâ, ut rectum, ut planum, ut concavum, id quod tale non est.

I'm responding, this objection can be understood in two ways: either it could be understood that a single point should not be assigned to that entire space; and in this sense it is true; since that space is very elongated, it must be divided into parts, assigning dedicated points to the so-called arch and vault, as they commonly teach, where the location is too long and not high enough. Or it could refer to any of the mentioned parts, and understood this way it is completely false. First, because the prominent arches of halls and temples, which are adorned with optical artistry, have been established to be made from one single work, determined by their own authors, who have acknowledged the same unique point. Secondly, because since optical art is merely a fiction of reality, the painter cannot create an illusion of truth from any angle; rather, he demonstrates it from one determined point. Thirdly, because if, e.g., an arch adorned with a unified optical work were assigned multiple points, you would find no place from which you could view the entire work, and at most from any given point you would only see part of it, never the whole piece. Therefore, from these reasons, I conclude that introducing multiple points in the same work is a greater error than introducing a single point; thus it is absolutely necessary that the location in which the singular work is formed be such that figures and architecture must all converge towards a single point from all parts of the work. With this established, it cannot reasonably be denied that I also concede a unique point when observing a broad arch, suitable for representing a singular work, like the arch in the temple of St. Ignatius. However, if due to an irregular location, as we say, the architecture somewhat deforms outside of that point, and the figures likewise mixed with the optical work suffer some deformation outside the common point, aside from being excused by the aforementioned reasons, it is by no means a flaw in the art, but a commendation; since the art presents from its point, proportionately positioned, as straight, as flat, or as concave, that which is not such.

An Answer to the Objection made about the Point of Sight in Perspective.

Every one does not approve, that in a Perspective of great Extent one Point of Sight only should be assign’d the whole Work; as for Example, In the whole Length of the Nave, Cupola, and Tribune, express’d in the Ninety-third Figure, they will by no means allow of one single Point, but insist upon several.

Not everyone agrees that a large perspective should have just one viewpoint for the entire piece. For example, in the full length of the nave, dome, and apse shown in the ninety-third figure, they do not accept a single viewpoint but rather insist on multiple ones.

I answer, This Objection may be understood two ways; either that one Point alone is not sufficient for that whole Length, and in this sense ’tis true; for that Space being very long, it ought to be divided into Parts, and proper Points assign’d to the Tribune, Cupola, and Vault of the Nave; as is commonly taught, where the Situation is of a great Length, and not very high. Or it may be understood of any One of the said Parts, and so is altogether false. First, Because in the Vaults of Halls or Churches painted by the greatest Masters, if they consist of one Piece only, we find but one Point of Sight assign’d. Secondly, Since Perspective is but a Counterfeiting of the Truth, the Painter is not oblig’d to make it appear real when seen from Any part, but from One determinate Point only. Thirdly, Because, if in a Vault, for Example, where you would paint one entire Design of Architecture and Figures, you assign several Points of Sight, you will find no place whence you may take a perfect View of the Whole, and at best you can only view each Part from its proper Point. From all which Reasons I conclude, that the Introduction of many Points into the same Piece, is more injurious to the Work, than making use of one only: Wherefore ’tis absolutely necessary in a regular Situation, and where the Work is all of a piece, so to place the same, as that the Figures and Architecture may from every part of the Design have respect thereto. This suppos’d, I confess that I myself make use of one Point of Sight only, in very large Vaults that consist of one Design, such as that of the Nave of the Church of S. Ignatius. If therefore through the Irregularity of the Place, the Architecture appear with some Deformity, and the Figures intermix’d therewith seem any thing lame and imperfect when view’d out of the proper Point, besides the Reasons just now given, it’s so far from being a Fault, that I look upon it as an Excellency in the Work, that when view’d from the Point determin’d, it appear, with due Proportion, streight, flat, or concave; when in reality it is not so.

I'm responding, this objection can be viewed in two ways; either that one point alone isn’t enough for the entire length, and in this sense, it’s true; because that space is very long, it should be divided into sections, with specific points assigned to the Tribune, Cupola, and Vault of the Nave, as is commonly taught for situations that are long but not very high. Or it could refer to any one of those sections, which is entirely false. First, because in the vaults of halls or churches painted by the greatest masters, if they consist of a single piece, there’s usually just one point of sight assigned. Second, since perspective is merely a representation of reality, the painter isn’t required to make it look real from any part, but only from one specific point. Thirdly, because if in a vault, for instance, you want to paint a complete design of architecture and figures, and you assign several points of sight, you won't find a location from which you can get a perfect view of the whole thing, and at best, you can only see each part from its designated point. For all these reasons, I conclude that introducing multiple points into the same piece is more harmful to the work than using just one: therefore, it’s absolutely necessary in a regular situation, and where the work is cohesive, to align it in such a way that the figures and architecture can be viewed appropriately from every part of the design. That said, I admit that I use only one point of sight for very large vaults that consist of a single design, such as the nave of the church of S. Ignatius. Thus, if the irregularity of the space makes the architecture appear somewhat distorted, and the figures intermixed look somewhat awkward and imperfect when viewed from the proper point, it’s far from being a fault; instead, I consider it an excellence in the work that when viewed from the determined point, it appears, in proper proportion, straight, flat, or concave; when in reality, it is not.


INDEX.

INSTRUMENTA paranda, Fig. UTENSILS for Drawing.
Explicatio linearum plani & horizontis, ac punctorum oculi & distantiæ, I. Explication of the Lines of the Plan and Horizon, and of the Points of the Eye and of the Distance.
Modus delineandi opticè quadratum, II. The Manner of delineating a Square in Perspective.
Optica delineatio rectanguli, alterâ parte longioris, III. The Delineation of an oblong Square in Perspective.
Optica descriptio quadrati duplicis, IV. The Optical Delineation of a double Square.
Vestigia quadratorum cum elevationibus, V. Plans of Squares with their Elevations.
Modus opticæ delineationis absque lineis occultis, VI. The Manner of designing in Perspective without occult Lines.
Aliud exemplum vestigii geometrici, cum elevatione longitudinis, VII. Another Example of a Geometrical Plan and Upright put into Perspective.
Optica projectio stylobatæ, VIII. The Projection of a Pedestal in Perspective.
Optica delineatio Architecturæ Jacobi Barozzii, & primum de stylobata Ordinis Etrusci, IX. The Architecture of Vignola in Perspective, and first of his Pedestal of the Tuscan Order.
Optica deformatio stylobatæ Dorici; ubi de modo vitandi confusionem in vestigiis delineandis, X. A Dorick Pedestal in Perspective, with the Manner of avoiding Confusion in designing the Plans.
Stylobatæ Ionici deformatio; ubi de vitanda confusione in elevationibus, XI. The Ionick Pedestal in Perspective, with the Manner of avoiding Confusion in Elevations.
Deformatio stylobatæ Corinthii, cum duabus pilis, XII. The Corinthian Pedestal, with its Pilasters, in Perspective.
Projectio stylobatæ Ordinis Compositi, XIII. The Projection of a Pedestal of the Composite Order.
Deformatio circulorum, XIV. Circles in Perspective.
Optica delineatio columnæ, XV. A Column in Perspective.
Optica projectio basis Etruscæ, XVI. The Tuscan Base in Perspective.
Deformatio basis Doricæ, XVII. The Dorick Base in Perspective.
Optica delineatio basis Ionicæ, XVIII. The Ionick Base in Perspective.
Optica imminutio basis Corinthiæ, XIX. The Corinthian Base in Perspective.
Basis Atticurga opticè imminuta, XX. The Attick Base in Perspective.
Optica imminutio capitelli Etrusci, XXI. The Tuscan Capital in Perspective.
Optica projectio capitelli Dorici, XXII. The Projection of a Dorick Capital in Perspective.
Deformatio capitelli Ionici, XXIII. The Ionick Capital in Perspective.
Optica projectio capitelli Corinthii, XXIV. The Corinthian Capital in Perspective.
Optica descriptio capitelli Compositi, XXV. The Composite Capital in Perspective.
Deformatio coronicis Etruscæ, XXVI. The Tuscan Entablature in Perspective.
Optica delineatio coronicis Doricæ, XXVII. The Dorick Entablature in Perspective.
Præparatio figuræ sequentis, XXVIII. Preparatory to the following Figure.
Optica projectio ædificii Dorici, XXIX. A Projection of the Dorick Order in Perspective.
Optica projectio ædificii Ionici; ubi de modo jungendi fictum cum vero, XXX. An Ionick Work in Perspective, with the Manner of reconciling the fictitious to the solid Architecture.
Optica projectio coronicis Corinthiæ, cum capitello & summitate columnæ, XXXI. The Optick Projection of a Corinthian Cornice, with the Capital and part of the Column.
Delineatio geometrica coronicis Ordinis Compositi, XXXII. The Geometrical Design of a Cornice of the Composite Order.
Deformatio coronicis Compositæ, XXXIII. A Composite Cornice in Perspective.
Præparatio ad figuram trigesimamquintam, XXXIV. Preparatory to the Thirty-fifth.
Deformatio coronicis Compositæ ad latus inspectæ, XXXV. A Side-View of the Composite Cornice in Perspective.
Præparatio ad figuram trigesimamseptimam, XXXVI. Preparatory to the Thirty-seventh.
Deformatio columnæ Etruscæ, XXXVII. A Tuscan Column in Perspective.
Præparatio ad figuram trigesimamnonam, XXXVIII. Preparatory to the Thirty-ninth.
Deformatio ædificii Dorici, XXXIX. A Piece of Dorick Architecture in Perspective.
Vestigium geometricum ædificii Ordinis Dorici, XL. The Geometrical Plan of a Design of the Dorick Order.
Elevatio geometrica ædificii Dorici, XLI. The Geometrical Elevation of the foregoing Design.
Modus vitandi confusionem in contractione vestigiorum & elevationum, XLII. The Manner of avoiding Confusion in reducing Plans and Elevations into Perspective.
Contractio vestigii figuræ quadragesimæ, XLIII. The Plan of the Fortieth Figure in Perspective.
Contractio elevationis figuræ quadragesimæprimæ, XLIV. The Elevation of the Forty-first Figure in Perspective.
Dimidium ædificii Dorici opticè deformati, XLV. One half of the Dorick Design in Perspective.
Alterum dimidium ejusdem ædificii, XLVI. The other half of the same Design.
Vestigia ædificii Ionici, XLVII. The Plan of an Ionick Building.
Elevatio geometrica ædificii Ionici, XLVIII. Geometrical Upright of the foregoing Ionick Design.
Deformatio elevationis ædificii Ionici, XLIX. The Elevation of the Ionick Design in Perspective.
Architectura Ionica, L. A Design of Ionick Architecture.
Ordo Corinthius, LI. A Corinthian Design in Perspective.
Delineatio columnæ spiralis Ordinis Compositi, LII. The Description of a wreath’d Column of the Composite Order.
Ordines Architecturæ desumpti ex Palladio & Scamozzio, LIII. A. The Orders of Architecture taken from Palladio and Scamozzi.
Modus triplex delineandi columnas spirales, LIII. B. Three different ways of delineating wreath’d Columns.
Vestigia ædificii Ordinis Corinthii, LIV. The Plan of a Design of the Corinthian Order.
Elevatio ædificii Ordinis Corinthii, LV. The Geometrical Elevation of a Corinthian Work.
Deformatio vestigiorum & elevationis ædificii Corinthii, LVI. The Perspective-Plans and Upright of the Corinthian Design foregoing.
Adumbratio figuræ sequentis, LVII. The rough Draught of the following Figure.
Ædificium Ordinis Corinthii octangulare, LVIII. Part of an Octangular Work of the Corinthian Order.
Vestigia Tabernaculi octangularis, LIX. The Plans of an Octangular Tabernacle.
Tabernaculum octangulare, LX. An Octangular Tabernacle in Perspective.
Modus erigendi machinas quæ constant pluribus ordinibus telariorum, LXI. The Manner of erecting Machines that consist of several Ranges of Frames.
De reticulandis telariis, quæ repræsentent ædificia solida, LXII. Of making the Net-work on Frames, for representing the Architecture as solid.
Vestigia ædificii quadrati, LXIII. The Plan of a square Design.
Ædificium quadratum, LXIV. A square Design in Perspective.
Vestigium ædificii rotundi opticè imminutum, LXV. The Plan of a Circular Work in Perspective.
Projectio ædificii rotundi, LXVI. A Circular Design in Perspective.
Vestigium geometricum, ac prima præparatio ad figuram septuagesimamprimam, LXVII. The Geometrical Plan, and first Preparation to the Seventy-first Figure.
Elevatio geometrica vestigii præcedentis, & secunda præparatio ad figuram septuagesimamprimam, LXVIII. The Geometrical Elevation of the foregoing Plan, and second Preparation to the Seventy-first Figure.
Deformatio vestigii figuræ sexagesimæseptimæ, & præparatio tertia ad figuram septuagesimamprimam, LXIX. The Plan of the Sixty-seventh Figure in Perspective, and third Preparation to the Seventy-first Figure.
Deformatio elevationis figuræ sexagesimæoctavæ, & præparatio quarta ad figuram septuagesimamprimam, LXX. The Perspective of the Elevation of the Sixty-eighth Figure, and fourth Preparation to the Seventy-first.
Theatrum repræsentans nuptias Canæ Galilææ, constructum Romæ anno 1685, in expositione Ven. Sacramenti, in templo Farnesiano Societatis Jesu, LXXI. A Theater representing the Marriage of Cana in Galilee, erected in the Jesuits Church at Rome, 1685, for the Solemnity of exposing the Holy Sacrament.
De theatris scenicis, LXXII. Of Scenes for the Stage.
Aliud vestigium theatri; ubi de modo inveniendi ejus punctum, LXXIII. Another Plan of a Theater, with the Method of finding the Point of Sight therein.
Sectio scenarum theatri, LXXIV. The Section or Profile of Scenes for Theaters.
Elevatio scenarum coram inspectarum; ubi docetur artificium, ut scenæ obliquæ appareant rectæ, LXXV. The Elevation of Scenes in Front, and how the oblique Scenes are made to appear direct.
Modus delineandi exemplar scenarum, LXXVI. The Manner of delineating the Designs of Scenes.
Modus reticulandi & pingendi scenas theatri, LXXVII. The Manner of making the Net-work or Squares, and painting the Scenes of Theaters.
De projectionibus horizontalibus, LXXVIII. Of horizontal Projections.
Projectiones vestigii & elevationis mutuli, LXXIX. The Plan and Elevation of a Corbel in Perspective.
Horizontalis projectio mutuli inumbrati, LXXX. The horizontal Projection of a shaded Corbel.
Stylobatæ Corinthii horizontaliter contracti, LXXXI. Corinthian Pedestals in an horizontal Perspective.
Columna Corinthia horizontaliter deformata, LXXXII. A Corinthian Column in horizontal Perspective.
Capitella Corinthia horizontaliter contracta, LXXXIII. A Corinthian Capital in horizontal Perspective.
Coronix Corinthia, LXXXIV. A Corinthian Cornice.
Coronix Corinthia horizontaliter contracta, LXXXV. A Corinthian Cornice in horizontal Perspective.
Horizontalis projectio columnæ, LXXXVI. A Column in horizontal Perspective.
Præparatio necessaria ad sequentem figuram, & ad projectiones horizontales in laquearibus vel testudinibus, LXXXVII. The Preparation necessary to the following Figure, and to all other horizontal Perspectives, whether on flat or vaulted Ceilings.
Horizontalis projectio balustiorum figuræ octogesimæseptimæ, cum brevi distantia, LXXXVIII. The horizontal Projection of the Balustrade of the Eighty-seventh Figure, view’d at a small Distance.
Horizontalis projectio Architecturæ in laqueari quadrato, LXXXIX. A horizontal Piece of Architecture in a square Ceiling.
Horizontalis projectio tholi, XC. A Cupola in horizontal Perspective.
Tholus figuræ nonagesimæ, cum luminibus & umbris, XCI. The Cupola of Fig. 90, with its Lights and Shades.
Tholus octangularis, XCII. An Octangular Cupola.
Vestigium templi Ludovisiani S. Ignatii almæ urbis, XCIII. The Geometrical Plan of S. Ignatius’s Church at Rome.
Orthographia templi Ludovisiani, XCIV. The Orthography of S. Ignatius’s Church.
Aliæ præparationes ad figuras 98 & 99, XCV. Other Preparations to the 98th and 99th Figures.
Aliæ præparationes ad figuras 98 & 99, XCVI. Other Preparations to the 98th and 99th Figures.
Alia præparatio ad figuras 98 & 99, XCVII. Another Preparation to the 98th and 99th Figures.
Quadrans Architecturæ horizontalis in fornice, cum luminibus & umbris, XCVIII. Fourth-part of the Architectonical Design on the Vault of S. Ignatius’s Church, with its Lights and Shades.
Alter quadrans totius operis, XCIX. Another Quarter of the whole Design.
Modus reticulationis faciendæ in testudinibus, C. The Method of drawing the Net-work on Vaults.

FINIS.

THE END.


Followers.

  • A
  • His Grace the DUKE of ST. ALBANS.
  • Mr. Tho. Acres.
  • Capt. Matthew Adams.
  • Hen. Aldrich, DD. DC.C.
  • Mr. Joseph Alleine Writing Mr.
  • Mr. Wm. Allingham, Teacher of Mathemat. Chan̄el-Row-Westmr.
  • James Anderson, Writer to Her Matys Signet, Reg. Scot.
  • Mr. Robert Andrews, Letter-Founder.
  • Tho. Atkinson, Gent.
  • J. Aislabie, Esqr.
  • B
  • Mr. R. Baker, Teacher of Mathemat.
  • Mr. Henry Bankes.
  • Mr. Matthew Bankes.
  • Mr. John Barnes, Bookseller.
  • Mr. Chr. Bateman, Bookseller.
  • Allen Bathurst, Esqꝫ.
  • Mr. Benj. Beardwell, Printer.
  • His Grace the DUKE of BEAUFORT.
  • The Honble. the Lady Mary Bertie.
  • Mr. Philip Bishop, Bookseller, Exon.
  • Mr. Saml. du Bois.
  • Jon. Bridgeman, Esqꝫ of Blodwell Salop.
  • James Broughton, of Westmr. Gent.
  • Mr. Jon. Buckler, for the Mathemat. Soc. Jones Coffee-house Finch-lane.
  • Mr. Wm. Butcher, Carpenter, Richmond.
  • Mr. Jon. Brown, Cl. of the Works at Windsr.
  • Ferd. Buss, Carpr.
  • C
  • Mr. Chr. Cass.
  • John Churchill, Esqꝫ, Mr. Carpenter, to Her MATY.
  • Mr. Robt. Churchill, Mason.
  • Mr. Tho. Churchill Bricklayer Westm.
  • Edwd. Coke, Esqꝫ.
  • Mr. Collins Mason.
  • The Rt. Honble. The LD CONINGSBY.
  • Mr. Richd. Conyers.
  • His Excell. Fr. Cornaro, Venetian Amb.
  • Will. Cowper, Surgeon.
  • John Crauford, Esqꝫ.
  • Tho. Curtis, Joyner.
  • D
  • The Rt. Honble. The EARL of DENBIGH.
  • Mr. Charles Delafaye.
  • Edmund Dummer, Esqꝫ.
  • Mr. John Dowling, Painter.
  • E
  • Mr. Talbot Edwards, Engineer to Her MATY.
  • Mr. John Ellis, Com. Brazen-Nose-Coll. Oxon.
  • Mr. Emmet.
  • Mr. Robert Inglish, Comptll. of Her MATIES. Royal Hospl. at Chelsea.
  • The Rt. Honble. The EARL of ESSEX.
  • Mr. John Ettie, of York.
  • Mr. Richd. Evans.
  • F
  • Mr. John Farlow, Painter.
  • Matthew Foxall, Gent.
  • G
  • John Gape, Esqꝫ, St. Albans.
  • Saml. Gee, Gent.
  • His Excell. Snr. Jacob Giraldi Kt. Envoy from the Gr. D. of Toscany.
  • Mr. Tho. Gittins Bookseller Shrewsbury.
  • Capt. John Goodwyn.
  • Mr. John Gough, Agent.
  • Wm. le Grand, Esqꝫ.
  • Mr. Richd. Gregory, Carpenter.
  • Mr. Jam. Grove, Mr. Carpenter.
  • Mr. John Grove, Her MAties. Plaisterer.
  • Richd. Graham, Esqꝫ.
  • H
  • Mr. Charles Hale, Plomber.
  • Sr. Tho. Hanmer, Bart.
  • John Harris, D.D.
  • Mr. Tho. Harris, Plate Polisher.
  • Mr. N. Hawksmoor, Cl. of Her MATIES Works.
  • Mr. Jacob Henckell.
  • John Henley, Esqꝫ.
  • Mr. Robt. Hester.
  • Mr. Tho: Hill.
  • Mr. Tho: Highmore, Serjeant-Painter.
  • Mr. Cha. Hopson, Mr. Joyner.
  • Sr. James How, Kt.
  • Mathew Humberston, Esqꝫ.
  • Sr. George Hungerford, Kt. Cadnum Wilts.
  • Sam. Horn, Painter.
  • I
  • Mr. John James, of Greenwich.
  • Mr. R. Janeway, Printer.
  • Mr. John Johnson.
  • Mr. Hen. Jones.
  • K
  • Mr. Robt. Knaplock, Bookseller.
  • L
  • Mr. Bernard Lens Painter, Drawing-Mr. to Christs-Hospitall.
  • Mr. Bernard Lens, } Painters.
  • Mr. Edwd. Lens, }
  • M
  • Mr. Sam. Marriot, Junr.
  • Mr. John Mist, of St. Ann Westmr.
  • Mr. Benj. Motte, Printer.
  • Mr. James Moore.
  • Mr. Robt. More, Writing-Mr.
  • Mr. George Moult, Chymist.
  • Jos. Moyle, Esqꝫ.
  • N
  • Wm. Naper, Esqr.
  • David Netto.
  • Mr. Wm. Newton, Math. Mr. to Chr. Hospl.
  • Wm. Nicholas, Esqr.
  • Mr. John Nicholson, Bookseller.
  • Mr. John Nix.
  • Mr. John Norris, of Westmr.
  • Mr. John Nutt, Printer.
  • O
  • Dr. Adam Oatley, of Pickford, ArchD. of Salop and Hereford.
  • Mr. Austin Oldesworth, Stationer.
  • Mr. Danl. Osburn B.D. Exeter Coll.
  • His Grace the DUKE of ORMOND.
  • Sr. James Oxenden, Kt. Bart.
  • P
  • Ralph Palmer, Esqꝫ.
  • Mr. Barth. Peisley, Oxon.
  • Mr. Elias Pen Writing-Mr.
  • Mr. Tho. Pestel, Jeweller.
  • Clement Petit, Esqꝫ.
  • Madam Dorothea Petit.
  • Mr. James Petiver, Pharm. Lond. FRS.
  • Mr. Edmund Powel, Printer.
  • Mr. John Paine.
  • R
  • The Rt. Honble The LORD RABY.
  • The Rt. Honble Richard EARL of RANELAGH.
  • Edw. Richards, Esqꝫ, LB. Exeter Coll.
  • Benj. Robinson Sec. to the Dutchess of Bucclough.
  • Dr. Tancred Robinson.
  • Mr. Richd. Rogerson, Carpenter.
  • Chr. Rawlinson, Esqꝫ, of Cark-Hall, Lanc.
  • S
  • The Right Honble James EARL of SALISBURY, Christ Church Oxon.
  • Mr. John Savage, A. M.
  • Edw. Sayer, Esqr, of Barkhamsteed.
  • Mr. Will. Scrimshire.
  • The Right Honble The EARL of SEAFIELD, Chanc. of Scotland.
  • Dr. Hans Sloane, S.R.S.
  • Mr. Joseph Smart, Town-Clerks-Office.
  • Mr. Ralph Snow, Writing-Mr.
  • Sam. Stebbins, Esqr.
  • Rob. Steel, Bookbinder, in little Britain.
  • Mr. James Stone, Gent.
  • Mr. John Stuart, Stationer.
  • Mr. Jacob Sturt, of Woodhouse, Sussex.
  • T
  • Mr. John Tallman.
  • Mr. John Taylor.
  • Mr. Lewis Thomas, Oxon.
  • Mr. John Thorpe, A.M. F.R.S.
  • Mr. Edw. Thwaites, A.M. Queens Coll.
  • Mr. John Tijou.
  • Andr. Tooke, A.M. Geom. Prof. Gresham Col.
  • Benj. Tooke, Bookseller.
  • Mr. Will. Townsend, Oxon.
  • Lewis Tremayne, Esqr.
  • Capt. Edw. Tuffnall, St. Margt. Westmr.
  • Mr. John Tuffnall, Joyner, St. Margt. Westmr.
  • Cholmondley Turner, Esqr.
  • V
  • J. Vanbrugh, Comptll. of Her MAties Works &c.
  • W
  • Saml. Waters, Gent.
  • Mr. Jon. Wilbraham, Brazen-Nose-Coll.
  • Mr. John Wilkinson, of the Excheqr Gent.
  • Mr. John White.
  • Mr. Saml. Whitfield.
  • Mr. Tho. Whitmore, Painter.
  • Mr. John Williams, Printer.
  • Mr. Waldive Willington.
  • Sr. Francis Windham Kt.
  • Mr. Henry Wise, Mr. Gardener.
  • Nicol Wolstenholme, Esqr.
  • Sr. Chr. Wren Kt. Survr. Genl. of Her MATIES Works.

Transcriber’s Note

Transcription Note

The following is a list of changes made to the original text to correct suspected printing errors:

The following is a list of changes made to the original text to fix suspected printing errors:

Under the heading:

Under the title:

FIGURA QUARTA. 6, 7, => 6, 7, O
FIGURA OCTAVA. ex lilinea => ex linea
The Ninth Figure. yon must => you must
Figura Trigesimaprima. qudratâ => quadratâ
Figura Trigesimaquinta. denineationem => delineationem
The Seventy-second FIGURE. hundred an twenty => hundred and twenty
FIGURA OCTOGESIMA. qnam => quam
FIGURA Nonagesima. centrum => Centrum
Figura Nonagesimaprima. spospondit => spopondit
FIGURA SECUNDA. longitudidinem => longitudinem
FIGURA QUINTA. superoiri => superiori
INDEX. Doric => Dorick (twice, lines XL and XLV)
Members. Gr. D. of Tosoany => Gr. D. of Toscany
Respondetur objectioni... punctum aliqualem => punctum aliquam
On the thirty-second figure the illustrated capital letters U and T were printed against the wrong passage, and have been swapped round.

Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!